7SR224 - Argus Complete Technical Manual

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SR224 Recloser Controller

Overcurrent Relay
Answers for energy.
7SR224 Argus Contents
Contents
1.
Description of Operation
2.
Settings, Configuration & Instruments
3.
Performance Specification
4.
Data Communications
5.
Installation
6.
Commissioning and Maintenance
7.
Applications Guide
7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Overcurrent Relay
Document Release History

This document is issue 2012/12. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2008/03
First issue
2008/06
Second issue
2009/04
Third issue
2009/09
Fourth issue
2010/04
Fifth issue
2010/05
Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand
2010/09
Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol.
2012/10
Eighth Issue. Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2012/12
Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents
Software Revision History

2008/03
2435H80011R2d-1a
First Release
2008/06
2435H80011R3d-2b
Loss Of Voltage
2008/10
2435H80011R4-3
Single/Triple Autoreclose function
2009/09
2435H80011R4c-3b
Maintenance Release
2010/04
2435H80011R4d-4
Check Synchronising function
2010/09
2435H80011R4f-4b
IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol
2012/09
2435H85010R7b-7a
IEC61850 communication protocol
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
File handling during shutdown
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
Contents
Section 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................................6
1.1 Current Transformer Circuits ..............................................................................................................6
1.2 External Resistors..............................................................................................................................6
1.3 Fibre Optic Communication................................................................................................................6
1.4 Front Cover .......................................................................................................................................6
1.5 Front Fascia ......................................................................................................................................6
Section 2: Hardware Description ........................................................................................................................9
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Case ...............................................................................................................................................10
2.3 Front Cover .....................................................................................................................................10
2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU).................................................................................................................10
2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia................................................................................................................10
2.6 Current Inputs..................................................................................................................................12
2.7 Voltage Inputs .................................................................................................................................13
2.8 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................................13
2.9 Binary Outputs (Output Relays)........................................................................................................14
2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs ........................................................................................................................15
2.11 Self Monitoring Of The Controller .....................................................................................................15
2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective...............................................................................................15
2.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser .........................................................................16
Section 3: Protection Functions ........................................................................................................................17
3.1 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67, 51, 50)...........................................................................17
3.1.1
Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67)................................................................17
3.1.2
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) ..........................................................................19
3.1.3
Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) ..........................................................................20
3.2 Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V) ..............................................................................22
3.3 Current Protection: Measured EF (67G, 51G, 50G)...........................................................................23
3.3.1
Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G) ..............................................23
3.3.2
Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G).........................................................24
3.3.3
Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) .........................................................25
3.4 Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF, 51SEF, 50SEF) ................................................................26
3.4.1
Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF)............................................26
3.4.2
Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF) ......................................................27
3.4.3
Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF) ......................................................28
3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H)..................................................................29
3.6 Current Protection: Cold Load (51c) .................................................................................................30
3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. OC (46NPS)......................................................................31
3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37).............................................................................................32
3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) .......................................................................................33
3.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59).....................................................................35
3.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47).......................................................37
3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N)..................................................................................38
3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81)................................................................................39
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................................40
4.1 Autoreclose (79) ..............................................................................................................................40
4.1.1
Overview............................................................................................................................40
4.1.2
Autoreclose sequences ......................................................................................................42
4.1.3
AUTORECLOSE PROTN Menu.........................................................................................43
4.1.4
AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu ........................................................................................43
4.1.5
P/F SHOTS sub-menu........................................................................................................45
4.1.6
E/F SHOTS sub-menu........................................................................................................45
4.1.7
SEF SHOTS sub-menu ......................................................................................................45
4.1.8
EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu ...............................................................................................46
Chapter 1 Page 2 of 75
4.2 Manual Close ..................................................................................................................................48

4.3 Synchronising..................................................................................................................................48
4.3.1
Reclosure Modes ...............................................................................................................48
4.3.2
Charge Delays ...................................................................................................................49
4.3.3
Voltage monitoring elements...............................................................................................49
4.3.4
Sync Override Logic ...........................................................................................................50
4.3.5
Check Synchronising Mode ................................................................................................50
4.3.6
System Split Detector .........................................................................................................51
4.3.7
System Sync Reversion......................................................................................................51
4.3.8
System Synchronising Mode...............................................................................................51
4.3.9
Close on Zero Mode...........................................................................................................52
4.4 Live/Dead Indication ........................................................................................................................54
4.5 Circuit Breaker.................................................................................................................................54
4.6 Hot Line In/Out ................................................................................................................................56
4.7 Quick Logic .....................................................................................................................................57
Section 5: Supervision Functions......................................................................................................................59
5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)..........................................................................................................59
5.2 VT Supervision (60VTS) ..................................................................................................................60
5.3 Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus) ............................................................................................................62
5.4 CT Supervision (60CTS) ..................................................................................................................62
5.5 Broken Conductor (46BC) ................................................................................................................63
5.6 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ......................................................................................................63
5.7 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................................................64
5.8 Battery Test.....................................................................................................................................65
5.9 Capacitor Test .................................................................................................................................66
5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S)..................................................................................................................67
Section 6: Other Features ................................................................................................................................68
6.1 Data Communications......................................................................................................................68
6.2 CB Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................68
6.3 Output Matrix Test ...........................................................................................................................69
6.4 Data Storage ...................................................................................................................................69
6.4.1
General..............................................................................................................................69
6.4.2
Event Records ...................................................................................................................69
6.4.3
Waveform Records.............................................................................................................69
6.4.4
Fault Records.....................................................................................................................70
6.4.5
Demand.............................................................................................................................70
6.4.6
Data Log............................................................................................................................70
6.4.7
Energy Storage ..................................................................................................................70
6.4.8
Fault Locator......................................................................................................................71
6.5 Metering..........................................................................................................................................72
6.6 Operating Mode...............................................................................................................................73
6.7 Control Mode...................................................................................................................................73
6.8 Real Time Clock ..............................................................................................................................74
6.8.1
Time Synchronisation Data Communication Interface .......................................................74
6.8.2
Time Synchronisation Binary Input ...................................................................................74
6.8.3
Time Synchronisation IRIG-B (Optional)...........................................................................74
6.9 Settings Groups...............................................................................................................................74
6.10 Password Feature............................................................................................................................75
List of Figures
Figure 1.5-1
Figure 2.5-1
Figure 2.8-1
Figure 2.9-1
Figure 3.1-1
Figure 3.1-2
Figure 3.1-3
Figure 3.2-1
Figure 3.3-1
Figure 3.3-2
Figure 3.3-3
Figure 3.4-1
Figure 3.4-2
Figure 3.4-3
Figure 3.5-1
Figure 3.6-1
Figure 3.7-1
Figure 3.8-1
Figure 3.9-1
Figure 3.10-1
Figure 3.11-1
Figure 3.12-1
Figure 3.13-1
Figure 4.1-1
Figure 4.1-2
Figure 4.3-1
Figure 4.3-2
Figure 4.3-3
Figure 4.3-4
Figure 4.3-5
Figure 4.4-1
Figure 4.5-1
Figure 4.7-1
Figure 5.1-1
Figure 5.2-1
Figure 5.4-1
Figure 5.5-1
Figure 5.6-1
Figure 5.7-1
Figure 5.8-1
Figure 5.9-1
Figure 5.10-1
Figure 6.4-1
Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections .........................8

7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case..................................................10
Binary Input Logic .................................................................................................................13
Binary Output Logic...............................................................................................................15
Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67) .............................................................18
Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element..............................................................19
Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element ...............................................................21
Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection .....................................................22
Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection ..................................................24
Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element.................................................24
Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G).......................................25
Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF)..................................................................26
Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element ..........................................................................27
Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF).............................................................28
Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H)...........................................................................29
Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c) ...............................................................................30
Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ...........................................31
Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37)............................................................................32
Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S)................................................................34
Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59)............................................................36
Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47)...................................................................37
Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element.........................................................................39
Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) .............................................................39
Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip..................................42
Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram ...................................................................................47
Voltage Detector Operation ...................................................................................................49
Check Sync Function ............................................................................................................50
System Sync Function...........................................................................................................52
Close On Zero Function ........................................................................................................52
Close On Zero Timing ...........................................................................................................53
Voltage Detector Operation ...................................................................................................54
Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status ...................................................................................56
Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off) ............................58
Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF)............................................................59
Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS)..................................................................61
Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS) .................................................................62
Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC) ...............................................................63
Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS).......................................................64
Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2) ................................................................64
Battery Test timing diagram...................................................................................................65
Capacitor Test timing diagram ...............................................................................................66
Sag and Swell Indices - IEEE 1159........................................................................................67
Energy Direction Convention .................................................................................................71
List of Tables
Table 1-1
Table 2-1
Table 6-1
7SR224 Ordering Options ...................................................................................................7

Summary of Controller Relay Configurations ....................................................................9
Operation Mode .................................................................................................................73
Symbols and Nomenclature

The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Setting Menu Location

Setting:
Setting value:
Alternatives:
MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU
Elem name -Setting
value
[1st] [2nd] [3rd]
Elem Char Dir

Binary input signal
visible to user
Elem Inhibit
Binary Output visible to user
Elem Starter
List of settings associated with a specific

function
Appropriate list is TRUE when setting
selected.
Non-Dir
Forward
Reverse
Common setting for multiple functions

Digital signal not visible to
user, to/from another element
Digital signal not visible to

user, internal to this element
Analogue signal with signal

description
PhaseAFwd
L1 Dir Blk
Common control input (c) for multiple

functions. All functions are enabled
when control input is TRUE.
Function.
Elem Reset Delay
c
start
trip
start
IL1
Individual functions are enabled when

associated control input (c) is TRUE.
c
And Gate
(2 inputs shown)
Or Gate
(3 inputs shown)
EVENT: IEC, Modbus or DNP

Where applicable
EVENT
1
Relay instrument
Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate

(3 inputs shown)
trip
&
INST.
Section 1: Introduction
This manual is applicable to the following relays:
7SR224 Directional Overcurrent and Directional Earth Fault Recloser Control Relay
The 7SR224 relay integrates the protection and control elements required to provide a complete recloser control
relay.
The Ordering Options Tables summarise the features available in each model
General Safety Precautions
1.1
The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in
injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
1.2
Fibre Optic Communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters
should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
1.4
External Resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched.
1.3
Current Transformer Circuits
Front Cover
The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in
place during normal operating conditions.
1.5
Front Fascia
For safety reasons the following symbols are displayed on the fascia
ORDER-No.:
7 S R 2
|
|
|
|
Protection Product Family

Overcurrent - Directional
Relay Type
Recloser
10
11
12
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
|
A
|
|
|
|
C
D
|
A
|
|
|
|
C
D
|
A
|
|
E10 case, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-4 2-3
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-4 2-3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Measuring Input
4xCT 1/5 A, 4xVT 63.5/110V
4xCT 1/5 A, 6xVT 63.5/110V
2
3
Auxiliary Nominal Voltage

30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC
30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC
A
B
Region Specific Functions

Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Reyrolle fascia
Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Siemens fascia
Region USA, 60/50Hz, language English-US (ANSI), (language changeable), Siemens fascia
10
A
B
C
Communication Interface
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port
Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B
Standard version - plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B
Standard version - plus additional rear RS232 and IRIG-B
Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2)
Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2)
1-4 2-3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3
4
7
8
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
8
8
|
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 and IEC61850
12
1-4
1-4
7-8
2
3
8
Spare
Protection Function Packages

Standard version - included in all models
21FL
Fault Locator
27/59
Under/overvoltage
27/59
Under/overvoltage, Sag/swell
37
Undercurrent
46BC
Broken conductor/load unbalance
46NPS
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
47NPS
Negative phase sequence overvoltage
49
Thermal overload
50BF
Circuit breaker fail
51V
Voltage dependent overcurrent
59N
Neutral voltage displacement
60CTS
CT supervision
60VTS
VT supervision
67/50
Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
67/50G
Directional instantaneous earth fault
67/51
Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent
67/51G
Directional time delayed earth fault
67/50HIZ
Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault
67/51HIZ
Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault
74TC
Trip circuit supervision
74BF
Circuit breaker close fail
79
Autoreclose
81
Under/overfrequency
81HBL2
Inrush restraint
86
Lockout
Battery and capacitor test
Cold load pickup
Programmable logic
Standard version - plus
27/59
Under/overvoltage
60VTS
VT supervision
Loop automation by loss of voltage
Standard version - plus
Single/triple pole autoreclose
2-4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Case, I/O and Fascia 1)
13 14 15 16
- 0
6-8
|
|
C
E
|
A
|
|
|
|
C
E
|
A
|
|
|
|
C
E
|
A
|
|
| | |
| | |
| C/E |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
13 |
|
0 | |
| |
14 |
C |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional Functionality
No additional functionality
25
A
|
|
|
A
|
|
15
Synchronising, synchronising check
|
Settings File
Standard settings and standard labels for Siemens Recloser
1)
16
4CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting).
Table 1-1
7SR224 Ordering Options
7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
NOTE: The use of some

functions are mutually exclusive
VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
27
59
(x4)
V5
(VY)
27
59
(x4)
V6
(VZ)
27
59
(x4)
47
(x2)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)*
* 59N can be configured

as derived or Vx
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
25
V5 & V6 voltage inputs are optional. 1x 27/59

element is provided in 4xVT variants.
Figure 1.5-1 Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections
Section 2: Hardware Description

2.1
General
The structure of the relay is based upon the Multi-function hardware platform. The relays are supplied in a size
E10 or E12 case (where 1 x E = width of approx. 26mm). The hardware design provides commonality between
products and components across the Multi-function range of relays.
Relay
Current
Voltage
Binary
Output
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
Relays
LEDs
Function
Case
Keys
7SR2242-2
13
14
12
E10
7SR2242-3
13
14
12
E10
7SR2243-2
23
22
12
E10
7SR2243-3
23
22
12
E10
7SR2244-2
33
14
12
E10
7SR2244-3
33
14
12
E10
7SR2246-2
33
14
16
12
E12
7SR2246-3
33
14
16
12
E12
7SR2247-2
33
30
16
12
E12
7SR2247-3
33
30
16
12
E12
7SR2248-2
43
22
16
12
E12
7SR2248-3
43
22
16
12
E12
Table 2-1
Summary of Controller Relay Configurations
Relays are assembled from the following modules:

1) Front Fascia with three fixed function LEDs, Function Keys and ordering options of configurable LEDs.
2) Processor module.
3) Analogue Input module - 4 x Current + 4 or 6 x Voltage.
4) Power Supply (PSU) and Basic Binary Input (BI) and Binary Output (BO).
5) Binary Input/Output Module.
6) Data Comms module (optional)
(2x rear fibre optic serial ports + 1x IRIG-B port),
(1x rear RS485 + 1x IRIG-B port),
(1x rear RS232 + 1x IRIG-B port),
(2x Electrical Ethernet for IEC 61850),
or
(2x Optical Ethernet for IEC 61850).
2.2
Case
The relays are housed in cases designed to fit directly into standard panel racks. The case has a width of 260mm
(E10), 312mm (E12) and a height of 177 mm (4U). The required panel depth for wiring clearance is 242 mm and
287mm to accommodate the bending radius of fibre optic data communications cables for serial ports if fitted.
Relays with IEC 61850 communications option require a depth of 261.5 mm to allow for the communication
module and a clearance from devices fitted below the relay of 75 mm to accommodate fitment of the Ethernet
cables.
The complete relay assembly is withdrawable from the front of the case. Shorting contacts on the rear connection
block in the case ensure that the CT circuits remain short-circuited when the relay is removed. For the IEC 61850
variant options the rear retaining screw must be re-fitted following re-insertion to ensure relay performance claims.
External connections to the rear terminal block are made via M4 screws. Each terminal can accept two 4mm
crimps.
Located at the top rear of the case is a screw clamp earthing point, this must be connected to the main panel
earth.
2.3
Front Cover
With the transparent front cover in place the user does not have access to the push buttons. The front cover is
used to secure the relay assembly in the case and must be refitted after removal for access.
2.4
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The relay PSU can be directly connected to any dc supply via a suitably rated fuse from 30V dc to 220V dc.
In the event of the supply voltage level falling below the relay minimum operate level the PSU will automatically
switch itself off and latch out this prevents any PSU overload conditions occurring. The PSU is reset by
switching the auxiliary supply off and on.
2.5
Operator Interface/ Fascia
The operator interface is designed to provide a user-friendly method of controlling, entering settings and retrieving
data from the relay.
Figure 2.5-1 7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case
NOTE: Transparent cover with pushbuttons not shown

The fascia is an integral part of the relay. Handles are located at each side of the relay which allow it to be
withdrawn from the relay case.
Relay Information
Above the LCD three labels are provided, these provide the following information:
1) Product name and order code.
2) Nominal current rating, rated frequency, voltage rating, auxiliary dc supply rating, binary input supply
rating, configuration and serial number.
3) Blank label for user defined information.
A template is available to allow users to create and print customised labels.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

A 4 line by 20-character liquid crystal display indicates settings, instrumentation, fault data and control
commands.
To conserve power the display backlighting is extinguished when no buttons are pressed for a user defined
period. A setting within the SYSTEM CONFIG menu allows the timeout to be adjusted from 1 to 60 minutes and
Off (backlight permanently on). After an hour the display is completely de-activated. Pressing any key will reactivate the display.
The LCD contrast can be adjusted using a flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw located below the contrast
symbol . Turning the screw clockwise increases the contrast, anti-clockwise reduces the contrast.
PROTECTION HEALTHY LED

This green LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that DC voltage has been applied to the relay power supply and
that the relay is operating correctly. If the internal relay watchdog detects an internal fault then this LED will
continuously flash.
PICKUP LED
This yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function(s) has picked up. The LED will self reset
after the initiating condition has been removed.
Functions are assigned to the PICKUP LED in the OUTPUT CONFIG>PICKUP CONFIG menu.
TRIP LED
This red LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function has operated to trip the circuit
breaker. Functions are assigned to the Trip LED using the OUTPUT CONFIG>Trip Contacts setting.
Operation of the LED is latched and can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, energising a
suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications
channel(s).
Indication LEDs
Relays have either 8 or 16 user programmable LED indicators depending upon the variant ordered. Each LED
can be programmed to be illuminated as either green, yellow or red.
LEDs can be designated to indicate operated states of protection elements or binary conditions or to indicate the
starter pickup of protection elements
Configuration options are: Self Reset LEDs
- automatically reset upon loss of initiating condition.
PU LEDs
- illuminate for element pickup before the associated time delay expires
Green LEDs
- illuminate green
Red LEDs
- illuminate red
Yellow LEDs
- illuminate yellow (when both red and green are selected)
PU Green LEDs
- illuminate green response to the detection of a pickup condition
PU Red LEDs
- illuminate red in response to the detection of a pickup condition
Colour selection is achieved by checking (ticking) the appropriate box i.e. red or green. To select yellow, check
both red & green boxes. Functions are assigned to the LEDs in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu.
A single LED can be used to indicate operation of a protection element with one colour whilst also
providing indication of pickup of the element as a different colour.
Each LED can be labelled by withdrawing the relay and inserting a label strip into the pocket behind
the front fascia. A template is available to allow users to create and print customised legends. This
can be found in: -Reydisp Evolution\Help\Open Relay LED Template\Open RM LED Template
Each LED can be user programmed as hand or self resetting. Hand reset LEDs can be reset by either pressing
the TEST/RESET
button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate
command over the data communications channel(s).
The status of hand reset LEDs is stored by a back up storage capacitor in the event of an interruption to the d.c.
supply voltage so that when the supply is restored the previous indication is repeated.
Standard Keys
The relay is supplied as standard with five navigation / control pushbuttons and 12 programmable function keys.
The navigation / control buttons are used to navigate the menu structure and control relay functions. They are
labelled:
Increases a setting or moves up menu.
Decreases a setting or moves down menu.
TEST/RESET
Moves right, can be used to reset selected functionality and for LED test (at
relay identifier screen).
ENTER
Used to initiate and accept settings changes.
CANCEL.
Used to cancel settings changes and/or move up the menu structure by one
level per press.
NOTE: All settings and configuration of LEDs, BI, BO and function keys can be accessed and set by the user
using these keys. Alternatively configuration/settings files can be loaded into the relay using Reydisp.
Function Keys/ LEDs

The 12 programmable function keys can be configured by the user to initiate selected functions from the Control
menu (INPUT CONFIG > FUNCTION KEY MATRIX).
Each programmable function key has an associated LED. These can be programmed as hand or self reset and
can be illuminated as green, yellow or red (OUTPUT CONFIG > LED CONFIG).
Function keys can be used with Quick Logic.
2.6
Current Inputs
Four current inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module. Terminals are available for both 1A and 5A
inputs.
Current is sampled at 1600Hz for both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. Protection and monitoring functions of
the relay use either the Fundamental Frequency RMS or the True RMS value of current appropriate to the
individual function.
The waveform recorder samples and displays current input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at
50Hz).
All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A,
Phase B and Phase C. The three current inputs I1, I2 and I3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase
references A, B and C by user settings. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to
suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation.
2.7
Voltage Inputs
Four voltage inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module as standard. V1, V2 and V3 inputs are typically
used for the main three phase voltage measurement with the additional input V4 (VX) used for single phase
voltage detection, measurement and the option Check Synchronising function, on the other side of the primary
switching device. Six voltage input models are also available to provide three phase voltage measurement on
both sides of the primary equipment. Voltage inputs V4, V5 and V6 of the 6 VT models are provided mainly for
detection and measurement of voltage and have reduced operating range.
Voltage is sampled at 32 samples per cycle (1600Hz) both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. Protection and
monitoring functions of the relay use fundamental frequency voltage measurement.
The waveform recorder samples and displays voltage input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at
50Hz).
All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A,
Phase B and Phase C. The three voltage inputs V1, V2 and V3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase
references A, B and C by user settings. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to
suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation.
NB: The Relay has a flat frequency response measuring harmonic currents up to and including the 50th Harmonic
but does not measure the content at the aliasing frequencies i.e. 800 Hz (16th harmonic) + 1600 Hz (32nd
harmonic) + 2400 Hz (48th harmonic).
2.8
Binary Inputs
The binary inputs are operated from a suitably rated dc supply.

Relays are fitted with 13, 33 or 43 binary inputs (BI) depending on the variant. The user can assign any binary
input to any of the available functions (INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX).
The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O incorporating 3 x BI and 6 x BO.
Pick-up (PU) and drop-off (DO) time delays are associated with each binary input. Where no pick-up time delay
has been applied the input may pick up due to induced ac voltage on the wiring connections (e.g. cross site
wiring). The default pick-up time of 20ms provides ac immunity. Each input can be programmed independently.
Each input may be logically inverted to facilitate integration of the relay within the user scheme. When inverted the
relay indicates that the BI is energised when no d.c. is applied. Inversion occurs before the PU & DO time delay,
see fig. 2.8-1.
Each input may be mapped to any front Fascia indication LED and/or to any Binary output contact and can also
be used with the internal user programmable logic. This allows the relay to provide panel indications and alarms.
Figure 2.8-1 Binary Input Logic
2.9
Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
Relays are fitted with 14, 22 or 30 binary outputs. All outputs are fully user configurable and can be programmed
to operate from any or all of the available functions.
The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes six binary outputs each fitted with 1
contact providing in total 1 x normally closed (NC), 2 x change-over (CO) and 3 x normally open (NO) contacts.
In the default mode of operation binary outputs are self reset and remain energised for a user configurable
minimum time of up to 60 seconds. If required, outputs can be programmed to operate as hand reset.
Alternatively, outputs can be programmed as Pulsed outputs. When operated, these outputs will reset
automatically after a delay of the minimum operating time.
The binary outputs can be used to operate the trip coils of the circuit breaker directly where the trip coil current
does not exceed the 'make and carry' contact rating. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or other in-series
auxiliary device must be used to break the trip coil current.
Any BO can be assigned as a Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>TRIP CONFIG menu. Operation of a Trip
Contact will operate any LED or virtual assigned from the trip triggered feature in the same menu and will initiate
the fault record storage, actuate the Trip Alert screen where enabled and CB Fail protection when enabled.
When the relay is withdrawn from the case all normally closed contacts will be open circuited. This should be
considered in the design of the control and protection circuitry.
Notes on Pulsed Outputs

When operated, the output will reset after a user configurable time of up to 60 seconds regardless of the initiating
condition.
Notes on Self Reset Outputs

Self reset operation has a minimum reset time of 100ms
With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow is interrupted by an upstream
device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. Where
this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be
utilised.in the primary system
Notes on Hand Reset Outputs

Hand reset outputs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET
button, by energising a suitably
programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s).
On loss of the auxiliary supply hand-reset outputs will reset. When the auxiliary supply is re-established the binary
output will remain in the reset state unless the initiating condition is still present.
Figure 2.9-1 Binary Output Logic
2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs

The relays have 16 virtual input/outputs, these are internal logic states. Virtual I/O is assigned in the same way as
physical Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs. Virtual I/O is mapped from within the INPUT CONFIG > INPUT
MATRIX and OUTPUT CONFIG > OUTPUT MATRIX menus.
2.11 Self Monitoring Of The Controller

The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features. Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset
recovery sequence.
Supervision includes a power supply watchdog, code execution watchdog, memory checks by checksum and
processor/ADC health checks. When all checks indicate the relay is operating correctly the Protection Healthy
LED is illuminated.
If an internal failure is detected, a message will be displayed; also an event will be generated and stored. The
relay will reset in an attempt to rectify the failure. This will result in de-energisation of any binary output mapped to
protection healthy and flashing of the protection healthy LED. If a successful reset is achieved by the relay the
LED and output contact will revert back to normal operational mode, and the relay will restart.
2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective

When the relay has an auxiliary DC supply and it has successfully passed its self-checking procedure then the
front facia Protection Healthy LED is turned on.
A normally open contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection healthy
signal.
A normally closed contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection defective
signal. With the Protection Healthy this contact is open. When the auxiliary DC supply is not applied to the relay
or a problem is detected within the relay then this output contact closes to provide external indication.
A shorting contact in the case at positions 25-26 of the PSU module can be used to provide an external indication
when the relay is withdrawn.
2.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser

The quiescent battery voltage VAUX is constantly monitored to ensure that the charging system is connected and
operating correctly. The capacitor voltage is monitored externally by the Switch Unit Driver and Monitor. The
healthy condition of the capacitor is indicated to the Controller by the state of two binary signals. These signals
are constantly monitored and used to provide alarms and operation blocking for quiescent capacitor voltage levels
which are out of limits.
Battery and capacitor tests are initiated at user set intervals - typically once per week/month. The condition and
state of the Recloser battery and Recloser capacitor are assessed; any unhealthy states are identified and can be
alarmed. Battery and capacitor tests are not carried out at the same time. The battery test is initiated first to avoid
any possible interaction with the capacitor test which is performed 30 minutes afterwards. This functionality is
described in further detail in section 5.8 and 5.9
Section 3: Protection Functions

3.1
Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67, 51, 50)
All phase overcurrent elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS or True
RMS current:
True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS
Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental
3.1.1 Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67)

The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with overcurrent elements. These outputs
can then be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous over-current element.
If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional
detector. However, if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur
only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. Conversely, if a protection element is programmed for
reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone. Typically
the forward direction is defined as being away from the busbar or towards the protected zone.
The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the
directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it.
The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone.
Voltage polarisation is achieved for the phase-fault elements using the quadrature voltage i.e. at unity power
factor I leads V by 90. Each phase current is compared to the voltage between the other two phases, i.e for
normal phase sequence A-B-C:
IA ~ VBC
IB ~ VCA
IC ~ VAB
When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks, i.e. A-C-B, the polarizing is corrected internally by the
Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu.
The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67 Char Angle
setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67 Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the
forward and reverse zones.
The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67 Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with Ifault
Angle for maximum sensitivity i.e.
For fault current of -60 (I lagging V by 60) a 67 Char Angle of +30 is required for maximum sensitivity
(i.e. due to quadrature connection 90 - 60 = 30).
OR
For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45) a 67 Char Angle of +45 is required for maximum sensitivity
(i.e. due to quadrature connection 90 - 45 = 45).
Two-out-of-three Gate
When the 67 2-Out-Of-3 Logic setting is set to Enabled, the directional elements will only operate for the
majority direction, e.g. if IA and IC are detected as forward flowing currents and IB is detected as reverse current
flow, phases A and C will operate forwards, while phase B will be inhibited.
Minimum Polarising Voltage

The 67 Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising
voltage is below this level no directional output is given and operation of protection elements set as directional will
be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be
present.
Figure 3.1-1 Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67)
3.1.2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50)

Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse.
Each instantaneous element (50-n) has independent settings. 50-n Setting for pick-up current and 50-n Delay
follower time delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic
is provided independently for each 50-n element.
Operation of the instantaneous overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50-n
A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms.
79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-n
When delayed trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence

(79 P/F Protn Trip n = Delayed).
50-n Inrush Action: Inhibit
Operation of the inrush current detector function.
50-n VTS Action: Inhibit
Operation of the VT Supervision function.
User Inhibit
Reylogic (graphical logic)
Figure 3.1-2 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element
3.1.3 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51)

51-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. Where the voltage controlled overcurrent function (51VCO) is used a
multiplier is applied to this setting where the voltage drops below the setting VCO Setting, see section 3.2.
A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is
selected from IEC, ANSI or manufacturer specific curves using 51-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the
characteristic curves using the 51-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be
chosen using 51-n Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51-n Delay
(DTL) setting is used instead. The full list of operating curves is given in section 2 Settings, Configuration and
Instruments Guide. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in section 3 Performance Specification.
The 51-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an
ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be
instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output see
Applications Guide.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51-n Follower DTL setting.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic
is provided independently for each 51-n element.
Operation of the time delayed overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 51-n
79 P/F Inst Trips: 51-n

(79 P/F Protn Trip n = Delayed).
51c
Activation of the cold load settings (see section 3.7).
51-n Inrush Action: Inhibit
Operation of the inrush current detector
51-n VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
function.
See Voltage Controlled

Overcurrent (51V)
&
AUTORECLOSE
= 51-n
A
B
C
&
= Delayed
51c
A 81HBL2
Enable
&
A Dir En
&
Enable
Pickup
trip
B 81HBL2
&
B Dir En
&
Enable
Pickup
trip
C 81HBL2
&
C Dir En
&
Enable
Pickup
trip
IA
IB
IC
&
&
VT Fail
&
IA Fwd
1
&
&
IA Rev
&
IB Fwd
&
IC Fwd
&
IC Rev
A Dir En
1
&
&
IB Rev
B Dir En
1
&
C Dir En
Figure 3.1-3 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element
3.2
Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V)
Each shaped overcurrent element 51-n Setting can be independently controlled by the level of measured
(control) input voltage.
For applied voltages above VCO Setting the 51-n element operates in accordance with its normal current setting
(see 3.1.3). For input Ph-Ph control voltages below VCO Setting a multiplier (51-n Multiplier) is applied to
reduce the 51-n pickup current setting.
51-n Multiplier is applied to each phase independently when its control phase-phase voltage falls below VCO
Setting. The voltage levels used for each phase over-current element are shown in the table below. Relays with a
Ph-N connection automatically calculate the correct Ph-Ph control voltage.
Current Element
Control Voltage
IA
VAB
IB
VBC
IC
VCA
The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function (51V) can be inhibited from:

VCO VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
&
&
VT Fail
Enable
VA
VB
VC
VAB
VBC
VCA
Enable
<
<
<
Enable
x IA 51-n Setting
Enable
x IB 51-n Setting
Enable
x IC 51-n Setting
A
B
C
See
Delayed
Overcurrent
(51-n)
Figure 3.2-1 Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection
3.3
Current Protection: Measured EF (67G, 51G, 50G)
The earth current is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input.
All measured earth fault elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS, True
RMS current or the derived sum current:
True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS
Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental
Additionally these elements can be selected to operate on a Fundamental Frequency current which is calculated
from the sum of the phase currents, i.e. a Derived quantity. This option should only be used when the fourth
current input is required for connection of a Core Balance Current Transformer to achieve very low earth fault
sensitivity using the 50/51SEF elements.
51/50 Measurement = Calculated
3.3.1 Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G)

The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with measured earth fault elements. These
outputs can be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element.
The measured directional earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising.
Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its
equivalent voltage:
I0 ~ V0
The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67G Char
Angle setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67G Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust
the forward and reverse zones.
The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67G Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with Ifault
Angle for maximum sensitivity e.g.
For fault current of -15 (I lagging V by 15) a 67G Char Angle of -15 is required for maximum
sensitivity, OR
For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45) a 67G Char Angle of -45 is required for maximum
sensitivity.

The 67G Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising
voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. Operation of protection elements set as directional
will be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can
be present.
Figure 3.3-1 Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection
3.3.2 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G)

Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50G-n Setting and a follower time
delay 50G-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50G-n Dir. Control setting. Directional
logic is provided independently for each 50G-n element.
Operation of the instantaneous measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50G-n
79 E/F Inst Trips: 50G-n

(79 E/F Protn Trip n = Delayed).
50G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit
Operation of the current inrush detector function.
50G-n VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
Figure 3.3-2 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element
3.3.3 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G)

51G-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.
selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51G-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves
using the 51G-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51G-n Char.
When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51G-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The
full list of operating curves is given in section 2 Settings, Configuration and Instruments Guide. Operating curve
characteristics are illustrated in section 3 Performance Specification.
The 51G-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic
an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be
instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output see
Applications Guide.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51G-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51G-n Follower DTL setting.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51G-n Dir. Control setting. Directional
logic is provided independently for each 51G-n element.
Operation of the time delayed measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 51G-n
79 E/F Inst Trips: 51G-n

(79 E/F Protn Trip n = Delayed).
51G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit
Operation of the inrush current detector function.
51G-n VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
Figure 3.3-3 Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G)
3.4
Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF, 51SEF, 50SEF)
Current for the Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) elements is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input.
SEF elements measure the fundamental frequency RMS current.
3.4.1 Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF)

The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with SEF elements. These outputs can be
mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element.
The directional sensitive earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising.
Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its
equivalent voltage:
I0 ~ V0
The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67SEF Char
Angle setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (Vref) and the 67SEF Char Angle setting is added to this to
adjust the forward and reverse zones.
The centre of the forward zone is set by (Vref Angle + 67SEF Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with
Ifault Angle for maximum sensitivity i.e.
For fault current of -15 (I lagging V by 15) a 67SEF Char Angle of -15 is required for maximum
sensitivity.
OR
For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45) a 67SEF Char Angle of -45 is required for maximum
sensitivity.
For application of 67SEF protection to networks with compensation (Peterson) coils fitted, an additional setting,
67SEF Compensated Networks is available which when set to Enabled will increase the directional boundary to
closer to 90 to suit this application. This setting should be set to Disabled for application on networks with other
earthing arrangements.

The 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured
polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. Operation of protection elements set as
directional will be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise
voltages can be present.
Figure 3.4-1 Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF)
3.4.2 Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF)

Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50SEF-n Setting and a follower time
delay 50SEF-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50SEF-n Dir. Control setting. Directional
logic is provided independently for each 50SEF-n element.
Operation of the instantaneous earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50SEF-n
79 SEF Inst Trips: 50SEF-n

(79 SEF Protn Trip n = Delayed).
50SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0) is above the 67SEF Minimum
Voltage setting i.e. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the
Forward/Reverse operating range. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled, the calculated residual real power
must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. The residual power Pres is
equal to the wattmetric component of 3V0ISEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V0I0
Figure 3.4-2 Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element
3.4.3 Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF)

51SEF-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.
selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51SEF-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves
using the 51SEF-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51SEF-n Char.
When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51SEF-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.
The 51SEF-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI
characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the
reset will be instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip
output see Applications Guide.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51SEF-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51SEF-n Follower DTL setting.
For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51SEF-n Dir. Control setting. Directional
logic is provided independently for each 51SEF-n element.
Operation of the time delayed earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 51SEF-n
79 SEF Inst Trips: 51SEF-n

(79 SEF Protn Trip n = Delayed).
51SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit
User Inhibit
If the I4 input is used for SEF, REF cannot be used.

Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0) is above the 67SEF Minimum
Voltage setting i.e. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the
Forward/Reverse operating range. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled, the calculated residual real power
must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. The residual power Pres is
equal to the wattmetric component of 3V0ISEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V0I0
Figure 3.4-3 Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF)
3.5
Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H)
One high impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF) element is provided.

The relay utilises fundamental current measurement values for this function.
The single phase current input is derived from the residual output of line/neutral CTs connected in parallel. An
external stabilising resistor must be connected in series with this input to ensure that this element provides a high
impedance path. If I4 is utilised for this purpose, SEF protection cannot be used.
64H Current Setting sets the pick-up current level. An output is given after elapse of the 64H Delay setting.
External components a series stabilising resistor and a non-linear resistor are used with this function. See
Applications Guide for advice in specifying suitable component values.
Operation of the high impedance element can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 64H
User Inhibit
Figure 3.5-1 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H)
3.6
Current Protection: Cold Load (51c)
The setting of each shaped overcurrent element (51-n) can be inhibited and alternative cold load settings (51c-n)
can be applied for a period following circuit switch in.
The Cold Load settings are applied after the circuit breaker has been open for longer than the Pick-Up Time
setting.
Following circuit breaker closure the cold load overcurrent settings will revert to those defined in the Phase
Overcurrent menu (51-n) after either elapse of the Drop-Off Time setting or when the measured current falls
below the Reduced Current Level setting for a time in excess of Reduced Current Time setting.
During cold load settings conditions any directional settings applied in the Phase Overcurrent menu are still
applicable.
A CB Dont Believe It (DBI) condition is not acted on, causing the element to remain operating in accordance
with the relevant 51-n settings. Where the Reduced Current setting is set to OFF reversion to 51-n settings will
only occur at the end of the Drop-Off Time. If any element is picked up on expiry of Drop-Off Time the relay will
issue a trip and lockout.
If the circuit breaker is re-opened before expiry of the Drop-Off Time the drop-off timer is held but not reset.
Resetting the timer for each trip could result in damaging levels of current flowing for a prolonged period during a
rapid sequence of trips/closes.
Cold load trips use the same binary output(s) as the associated 51-n element.
Figure 3.6-1 Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c)
3.7
Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. OC (46NPS)
The negative sequence phase (NPS) component of current (I2) is derived from the three phase currents. It is a
measure of the quantity of unbalanced current in the system.
When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks, i.e. 1-3-2, the NPS/PPS sequence is corrected
automatically by the Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu.
Two NPS current elements are provided 46IT and 46DT.
The 46IT element can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT),
46IT Setting sets the pick-up current level for the element.
selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 46IT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using
the 46IT Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 46ITChar. When
Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 46IT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.
The 46IT Reset setting can apply a, definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset.
The 46DT element has a DTL characteristic. 46DT Setting sets the pick-up current and 46DT Delay the follower
time delay.
Operation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 46IT
Inhibit 46DT
User Inhibit
&
Enable
Pickup
trip
IL1
IL2
NPS
I2
IL3
&
Enable
Enable
46DT
Figure 3.7-1 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)
3.8
Current Protection: Under-Current (37)
Two under-current elements are provided.

Each phase has an independent level detector and current-timing element. 37-n Setting sets the pick-up current.
An output is given after elapse of the 37-n Delay setting.
Operation of the under-current elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 37-n
User Inhibit
Figure 3.8-1 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37)
3.9
Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49)
The relay provides a thermal overload suitable for the protection of static plant. Phase segregated elements are
provided. The temperature of the protected equipment is not measured directly. Instead, thermal overload
conditions are calculated using the measure True RMS current.
Should the current rise above the 49 Overload Setting for a defined time an output signal will be initiated.
Operate Time (t):-
ln
I 2 IP2
I2
k IB
Where
T = Time in minutes
= 49 Time Constant setting (minutes)
In = Log Natural
I = measured current
IP = Previous steady state current level
k = Constant
IB = Basic current, typically the same as In
k.IB = 49 Overload Setting (I )
Additionally, an alarm can be given if the thermal state of the system exceeds a specified percentage of the
protected equipments thermal capacity 49 Capacity Alarm setting.
For the heating curve:
I2
I
Where:
(1 e
) 100%
= thermal state at time t

I = measured thermal current
I = 49 Overload setting (or k.IB)
The final steady state thermal condition can be predicted for any steady state value of input current where t > ,
I2
F
100%
I2
Where:
= final thermal state before disconnection of device
49 Overload Setting I is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.I B
as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of
thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time and it is therefore normally set slightly above the full load
current of the protected device.
The thermal state may be reset from the fascia or externally via a binary input.
Thermal overload protection can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 49
User Inhibit
Figure 3.9-1 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S)
3.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59)

Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the Phase Voltages from the main a, b & c inputs.
One under/over voltage elements is provided for the Auxiliary input voltage Vx in the four voltage input devices.
Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the three additional x, y & z voltage inputs in the six voltage
input devices
The relay utilises fundamental frequency RMS voltage for this function.
Under/over voltage elements have common settings to measure phase to phase (Ph-Ph) or phase to neutral (PhN) voltage using the Voltage Input Mode and Vx Voltage Input Mode settings respectively.
Voltage elements can be blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 27/59 U/V Guard or the Vx 27/59 U/V Guard
settings respectively.
27/59-n Setting (Vx 27/59- n Setting) sets the pick-up voltage level for the element.
The sense of the element (undervoltage or overvoltage) is set by the 27/59-n Operation (Vx 27/59-n Operation)
setting.
The 27/59-n O/P Phases (Vx 27/59-n O/P Phases) setting determines whether the time delay is initiated for
operation of any phase or only when all phases have detected the appropriate voltage condition. An output is
given after elapse of the 27/59-n Delay (Vx 27/59-n Delay) setting.
The 27/59-n Hysteresis (Vx 27/59-n Hysteresis) setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the
element.
Operation of each of the a, b, c under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 27/59-n
27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes
27/59-n U/V Guarded
Under voltage guard element.
User Inhibit
Operation of each of the x, y, z under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from:

Inhibit Vx 27/59-n
Vx 27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes
Vx 27/59-n U/V Guarded
Under voltage guard element
User Inhibit
Phase segregated outputs are provided for each voltage input, these are common to all applicable 27/59
under/over voltage elements:
27/59 PhA, 27/59 PhB, 27/59 PhC;
Vx 27/59 (4 voltage input models);
Vx 27/59 PhA, Vx 27/59 Ph B &, Vx 27/59 PhC (6 voltage input models).
Figure 3.10-1 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59)
3.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence

Overvoltage (47)
Negative phase sequence (NPS) voltage (V2) is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced voltage in the system.
The relay derives the NPS voltage from the three input voltages (V A, VB and VC).
Two elements are provided.
47-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element.
The 47-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.
Operation of the negative phase sequence voltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 47-n
User Inhibit
Figure 3.11-1 Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47)
3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N)

Two Neutral Overvoltage (or Neutral Voltage Displacement) elements are provided.
59N Voltage Source setting selects the source of the residual voltage to be measured. The voltage is measured
directly from the Vx input or derived from the line voltages where suitable VT connections are present. The relay
utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function.
One of the elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT),
59NIT Setting sets the pick-up voltage level (3V0) for the element.
An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) can be selected using 59NIT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the
characteristic curves using the 59NIT Time Mult setting (M):
t op
M
3Vo
Vs
Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 59NITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the
time multiplier is not applied and the 59NIT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.
An instantaneous or definite time delayed reset can be applied using the 59NIT Reset setting.
The second element has a DTL characteristic. 59NDT Setting sets the pick-up voltage (3V0) and 59NDT Delay
the follower time delay.
Operation of the neutral overvoltage elements can be inhibited from:

Inhibit 59NIT
Inhibit59NDT
User Inhibit
It should be noted that neutral voltage displacement can only be applied to VT arrangements that allow zero
sequence flux to flow in the core i.e. a 5-limb VT or 3 single phase VTs. The VT primary winding neutral must be
earthed to allow the flow of zero sequence current.
Figure 3.12-1 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element
3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81)

Four under/over frequency elements are provided.
The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. The frequency calculation is based
on the highest input voltage derived from the voltage selection algorithm.
Frequency elements are blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 81 U/V Guard setting.
The sense of the element (under-frequency or over-frequency) is set by the 81-n Operation setting.
81-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element.
The 81-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.
Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 81-n
81-n U/V Guarded
Under voltage guard element.
User Inhibit
Figure 3.13-1
Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81)
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions

4.1
Autoreclose (79)
4.1.1 Overview
A high proportion of faults on an Overhead Line (OHL) network are transient. These faults can be cleared and the
network restored quickly by using Instantaneous (Fast) Protection trips followed by an automated sequence of CB
reclosures after the line has been dead for a short time. This deadtime allows the fault current arc to fully
extinguish. Typically, this autoreclose (AR) sequence of Instantaneous Trip(s) and Reclose Delays (Dead times)
followed by Delayed Trip(s) provides the automatic optimum method of clearing all types of fault i.e. both
Transient and Permanent, as quickly as possible and achieving the desired outcome of keeping as much of the
Network in-service as possible.
The AR function, therefore, has to: Control the type of Protection trip applied at each stage of a sequence
Control the Autoreclose of the Circuit Breaker to provide the necessary network Dead times, to allow
time for Arc extinction
Co-ordinate its Protection and Autoreclose sequence with other fault clearing devices.
A typical sequence would be 2 Instantaneous+1Delayed+HighSet Trips with 1 sec & 10 sec dead times.
The Autoreclose feature can be switched off if it is not required by the setting:
79 Autoreclose ENABLE/DISABLE (AUTORECLOSE CONFIG menu)
When the Autoreclose feature is enabled by the above setting, it may be switched in and out of service by a
number of methods, these are:
A keypad change from the CONTROL MODE
Customer programmed function key (using Quick Logic)
Via the data communications channel(s),
From a 79 OUT binary input. Note the 79 OUT binary input has priority over the 79 IN binary input - if
both are raised the autoreclose will be Out of Service.
Knowledge of the CB position status is integral to the autoreclose functionality. CB auxiliary switches must be
connected to CB Closed and CB Open binary inputs. A circuit breakers service status is determined by its
position i.e. from the binary inputs programmed CB Open and CB Closed. The circuit breaker is defined as being
in service when it is closed. The in service status has a drop-off delay of 2 sec, this delay is known as the circuit
memory time. This functionality prevents autoreclosing when the line is normally de-energised, or normally open.
Autoreclose (AR) is started by a valid trip relay operation while the associated circuit breaker is in service.
The transition from AR started to deadtime initiation takes place when the CB has opened and the protection
pickups have reset and the trip relay has reset. If check synchronising feature is included, the line or bus voltage
must be detected as dead, unless the Live Line Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled. If
any of these do not occur within the 79 Sequence Fail Timer setting the relay will Lockout. This prevents the AR
being primed indefinitely. 79 Sequence Fail Timer can be switched to 0 (= OFF).
Once an AR sequence has been initiated, up to 4 reclose operations can be attempted before the AR feature is
locked-out. Number of recloses is determined by 79 Num Shots. Each reclosure (shot) is preceded by a time
delay - 79 Elem Deadtime n - giving transient faults time to clear. Separate dead-time settings are provided for
each of the 4 recloses and for each of the four fault types P/F, E/F, SEF and External.
Once a CB has reclosed and remained closed for a specified time period (the Reclaim time), the AR sequence is
re-initialised and a Successful Close output issued. A single, common Reclaim time is used (Reclaim Timer).
When an autoreclose sequence does not result in a successful reclosure, i.e. if a trip occurs in the Reclaim Time
of the final shot, the relay will raise the 79 Last Trip Lockout output and the relay goes to the lockout state
Indications
The Instruments Menu includes the following meters relevant to the status of the Autoreclose and Manual Closing
of the circuit breaker: Status of the AR sequence
AR Shot Count.
CB Open Countdown Timer
CB Close Countdown Timer
Inputs
External inputs to the recloser functionality need to be wired to the binary inputs. Functions which can be mapped
to these binary inputs include: 79 Out (edge triggered)
79 In (edge triggered)
CB Closed
CB Open
79 Ext Trip
79 Ext Pickup
79 Block Reclose
79 Lockout
79 Reset Lockout
Block Close CB
Close CB
79 Trip & Reclose
79 Trip & Lockout
79 Line Check
Hot Line In
Hot Line Out
Instantaneous Protection In/Out
Outputs
Outputs are fully programmable to either binary outputs or LEDs. Programmable outputs include: 79 Out Of Service
79 In Service
79 In Progress
Sequence Fail
CB Close
79 Successful AR
79 Last Trip Lockout
79 Lockout
79 CloseOnFault
79 CB Close Fail
4.1.2
Autoreclose sequences
The CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE PROTN and CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE CONFIG
menus, allow the user to set independent Protection and Autoreclose sequences for each type of fault i.e. Phase
Fault (P/F), Earth Fault (E/F), Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) or External Protections (EXTERN). Each Autoreclose
sequence can be user set for up to four-shots i.e. five trips + four reclose sequence, with independently
configurable type of Protection Trip, either Fast (Inst) or Delayed with associated Deadtime Delay time for each
shot. The user has programming options for Autoreclose Sequences up to the maximum shot count i.e.:Inst or Delayed Trip 1 + (DeadTime 1: 0.1s-14400s)
+
Inst or Delayed Trip 2 + (DeadTime 2: 0.1s-14400s)
Inst or Delayed Trip 5 Lockout.
The AR function recognizes developing faults and, as the shot count advances, automatically applies the correct
type of Protection Trip and associated Dead time for that fault-type at that point in the sequence.
A typical sequence would consist of two Inst trips followed by at least one combined Delayed + HighSet (HS)
Trip. This sequence enables transient faults to be cleared quickly by the Inst trip(s) and permanent fault to be
cleared by the combined Delayed trip. The delayed trip must be graded with other Recloser/CBs to ensure
system discrimination is maintained, i.e. that as much of the system as possible is live after the fault is cleared.
A HS trips to lockout setting is provided such that when the number of operations of elements assigned as HS
trips reach the setting the relay will go to lockout.
The number of Shots (Closes) is user programmable, note: - only one Shot Counter is used to advance the
sequence, the Controller selects the next Protection characteristic/Dead time according to the type of the last Trip
in the sequence e.g. PF, EF, SEF or EXTERNAL.
Reclose Dead Time

User programmable dead times are available for each protection trip operation.
The dead time is initiated when the trip output contact reset, the pickup is reset and the CB is open. Additionally, .
if check synchronising feature is included, the line or bus voltage must be detected as dead, unless the Live Line
Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled.
The CB close output relay is energised after the dead time has elapsed.
st
1 Trip (Inst)
st
nd
2 Trip (Inst)
1 Dead Time
nd
2 Dead Time
rd
3 Trip (Inst)
rd
3 Dead Time
th
4 Trip (Delayed)
th
4 Dead Time
Figure 4.1-1 Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip
4.1.3 AUTORECLOSE PROTN Menu

This menu presents the Overcurrent Protection elements available for each type of Fault i.e. P/F, E/F or SEF and
allows the user to select those that are to be applied as Inst trips; those that are to be applied as Delayed Trips;
and those that are to be applied as HS Trips (HighSet), as required by the selected sequence. There is no
corresponding setting for External as the External protection type is not normally controlled by the Autoreclose
Relay. The resultant configuration enables the Autoreclose function to correctly apply the required Protection for
each shot in a sequence.
4.1.4 AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu

This menu allows the following settings to be made:-
79 Autoreclose Enabled turns ON all Autoreclose Functions.

79 Num Shots
Sets the allowed number of Autoreclose attempts in a sequence.
79 Retry Enable
Enabled configures the relay to perform further attempts to automatically Close the
Circuit Breaker where the CB has initially failed to close in response to a Close
command. If the first attempt fails the relay will wait for the 79 Retry Interval to expire
then attempt to Close the CB again.
79 Retry Attempts
Sets the maximum number of retry attempts.
79 Retry Interval
Sets the time delay between retry attempts.
79 Reclose Blocked Delay If the CB is not ready to receive a Close command or if system conditions are such
that the CB should not be closed immediately e.g. a close-spring is not charged, then
a Binary input mapped to Reclose Block can be raised and the Close pulse will not be
issued but will be held-back. The 79 Reclose Blocked Delay sets the time Reclose
Block is allowed to be raised, if this time delay expires the Relay will go to Lockout. If
Reclose Block is cleared, before this time expires, then the CB Close pulse will be
issued at that point in time. Dead Time + Reclose Blocked Delay = Lockout.
79 Sequence Fail Timer Sets the time that AR start can be primed. Where this time expires before all the AR
start signals are not received i.e. the CB has opened, protection pickups have reset
and the trip relay has reset, the Relay goes to Lockout.
79 Minimum Lockout Delay Sets the time that the Relays Lockout condition is maintained. After the last allowed
Trip operation in a specific sequence the Circuit Breaker will be left locked-out in the
open position and can only be closed by manual or remote SCADA operation. The 79
Minimum Lockout Delay timer can be set to delay a too-fast manual close after
lockout, this prevents an operator from manually closing onto the same fault too
quickly and thus performing multiple sequences and possibly burning-out Plant.
79 Reset LO by Timer
Set to Enabled this ensures that the Lockout condition is reset when the timer expires,
Lockout indication will be cleared; otherwise, set to Disabled, the Lockout condition will
be maintained until the CB is Closed by a Close command.
79 Sequence Co-Ord
When set to Enabled the Relay will co-ordinate its sequence and shot count such that
it automatically keeps in step with downstream devices as they advance through their
sequence. The Relay detects that a pickup has operated but has dropped-off before its
associated time delay has expired, it then increments its Shot count and advances to
the next stage of the autoreclose sequence without issuing a trip, this is repeated as
long as the fault is being cleared by the downstream device such that the Relay moves
through the sequence bypassing the INST Trips and moving on to the Delayed Trip to
maintain Grading margins.
79 Cold Load Action
Set to Delayed will inhibit all instantaneous protection elements when Cold Load
settings are being used.
79 Live Line Checking
will set such that it will stop the autoreclose sequence before the Deadtime is started if
neither the line nor bus voltages become dead following the trip. This can be used as a
check that the remote end circuit breaker is tripped before proceeding with the
sequence on a ring connected system. If this check is not required, the 79 Live Line
Check setting should be set to disabled.
79 Check Synchronising during the Deadtime will start the Check Synchronising before the completion of the
deadtime if the dead state of the line or bus becomes live during the deadtime. This
restoration of Live voltage state indicates that the remote end circuit breaker has
reclosed and therefore it is not necessary to delay the CB close until the deadtime
expires. This feature can be disabled if it is not required.
79 LO Line VT Fail
will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Line voltage is dead whilst the Bus voltage is
live when the circuit breaker is closed.
79 LO Bus VT Fail
will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Bus voltage is dead whilst the Line voltage is
live when the circuit breaker is closed.
Notes on the Lockout State

The Lockout state can be reached for a number of reasons. Lockout will occur for the following: -
1. 79 Sequence Fail Timer.

2. At the end of the Reclaim timer if the CB is in the open position.
3. A protection operates during the final Reclaim time.
4. If a Close Pulse is given and the CB fails to close.
5. The 79 Lockout binary input is active.
6. At the end of the 79 Reclose Blocked Delay due to presence of a persistent Block signal.
7. When the 79 Elem HS Trips to Lockout count is reached.
8. When the 79 Elem Delayed Trips to Lockout count is reached.
Once lockout has occurred, an alarm (79 Lockout) is issued and all further Close commands, except manual
close, are inhibited.
If the Lockout command is received while a Manual Close operation is in progress, the feature is immediately
locked-out.
Once the Lockout condition has been reached, it will be maintained until reset. The following will reset lockout: -
1. By a Manual Close command, from fascia, comms or Close CB binary input.

2. By a 79 Reset Lockout binary input, provided there is no signal present that will cause
Lockout.
3. At the end of the 79 Minimum LO Delay time setting if 79 Reset LO by Timer is selected
to ENABLED, provided there is no signal present which will cause Lockout.
4. Where Lockout was entered by an A/R Out signal during an Autoreclose sequence then
a 79 In signal must be received before Lockout can reset.
5. By the CB Closed binary input, provided there is no signal present which will cause
Lockout.
6. The Lockout condition has a delayed drop-off of 2s.
4.1.5 P/F SHOTS sub-menu

This menu allows the Phase fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:-
79 P/F Protn Trip1
The first protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.
79 P/F Deadtime 1
Sets the first Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip2
The second protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.
79 P/F Deadtime 2
Sets the second Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip3
The third protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.
79 P/F Deadtime 3
Sets the third Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip 4
The fourth protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed.
79 P/F Deadtime 4
Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip5
The fifth and last protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or
Delayed.
79 P/F HighSet Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed HighSet trips. The relay will go to Lockout on the
last HighSet Trip. This function can be used to limit the duration and number of high
current trips that the Circuit Breaker is required to perform, if the fault is permanent
and close to the Circuit Breaker then there is no point in forcing a number of Delayed
Trips before the Relay goes to Lockout that sequence will be truncated.
79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed Delayed trips, Relay will go to Lockout on the last
Delayed Trip. This function limits the number of Delayed trips that the Relay can
perform when the Instantaneous protection Elements are externally inhibited for
system operating reasons - sequences are truncated.
4.1.6 E/F SHOTS sub-menu

This menu allows the Earth Fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but E/F settings.
4.1.7 SEF SHOTS sub-menu

This menu allows the Sensitive Earth trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but SEF Settings, Note: - SEF does not have HighSets
4.1.8 EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu

This menu allows the External Protection autoreclose sequence to be parameterized:-
79 P/F Protn Trip1
Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary

output to Block an External Protections Trip Output.
79 P/F Deadtime 1
Sets the first Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) for the External sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip2

Output to Block an External Protections second Trip output.
79 P/F Deadtime 2
Sets the second Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) in the External sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip3

output to Block an External Protections third Trip Output.
79 P/F Deadtime 3
Sets the third Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip4

output to Block an External Protections fourth Trip Output.
79 P/F Deadtime 4
Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence.
79 P/F Protn Trip5

output to Block an External Protections fifth Trip Output.
79 P/F Extern Trips to Lockout - Sets the number of allowed External protection trips, Relay will go to Lockout
on the last Trip.
These settings allow the user to set-up a separate Autoreclose sequence for external protection(s) having a
different sequence to P/F, E/F or SEF protections. The Blocked setting allows the Autoreclose sequence to
raise an output at any point in the sequence to Block further Trips by the External Protection thus allowing the
Overcurrent P/F or Earth Fault or SEF elements to apply Overcurrent Grading to clear the fault.
Other Protection Elements in the Relay can also be the cause of trips and it may be that Autoreclose is required;
the External Autoreclose sequence can be applied for this purpose. By setting-up internal Quick Logic equation(s)
the user can define and set what should occur when any one of these other elements operates.
Note: If the CB Total Trip Count or the CB Frequent Ops Count target is reached the relay will do one delayed
tip and lockout*.
*NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROTN menu the relay will not trip.
Figure 4.1-2 Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram
4.2
Manual Close
A Manual Close Command can be initiated in one of four ways: via a Close CB binary input, via the data
communication Channel(s), from the relay CONTROL MODE menu or from the relay fascia function keys. It
causes an instantaneous operation via 79MC Close CB binary output, over-riding any autoreclose (AR) sequence
in progress. When check syncronising is used, the manual close operation is performed using mode settings
which are independent of those of the 79 autoreclose.
Repeated Manual Closes are avoided by checking for Positive edge triggers. Even if the Manual Close input is
constantly energised the relay will only attempt one close.
A Manual Close will initiate Line Check if enabled. If a fault appears on the line during the Close Pulse or during
the Reclaim Time with Line Check enabled, the relay will initiate a Trip and Lockout. This prevents a CB being
repeatedly closed onto a faulted line. Where Line Check = DELAYED then instantaneous protection is inhibited
until the reclaim time has elapsed.
Manual Close resets Lockout, if the conditions that set Lockout have reset i.e. there is no trip or Lockout input
present.
Manual Close cannot proceed if there is a Lockout input present.
Manual Close cannot proceed if Hot Line is In. Hot Line must be switched Out before Manual Close will be
successful, then switched back In afterwards if required.
With the Autoreclose function set to Disabled the Manual Close control is still active.
4.3
Synchronising
The optional Synchronising function is used to check that the voltage conditions, measured by the voltage
transformers on either side of the open circuit breaker, indicate that it is safe to close without risk of damage to
the circuit breaker of disturbance to the system. The timing of closure, for charging lines which are dead following
fault clearance, is controlled to co-ordinate with other devices.
The window of time in which voltage conditions must be met is applied as a setting or can be disabled such that
an indefinite period is allowed.
4.3.1
Reclosure Modes
The Synchronising element can be set to allow the autoreclose sequence to proceed for various system voltage
conditions. The voltage conditions selected must be met within the Synch Close Window time which is settable
and starts at the end of the deadtime for autoreclose or the receipt of a Close CB command.
The voltage applied to the V4 input is considered to be the BUSBAR voltage and the voltages applied to inputs
V1,V2 & V3 are the LINE voltage.
79 Dead Bar Charge, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is
dead.
Manual Close DBC, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is
dead.
79 Dead Line Charge, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is
dead.
Manual Close DLC, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is
dead.
79 Dead Line & Dead Bar Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage and the
Busbar voltage are dead.
Manual Close DLDB, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage and the Busbar voltage
are dead.
79Check Sync Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered
live AND other synchronising requirements are met.
Manual Close CS, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered live
AND other synchronising requirements are met.
79 Unconditional Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of the Bus
or Line.
Unconditional Manual Close, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of
the Bus or Line.
Separate Enable/Disable settings are thus provided for each option for Autoreclose and Manual Close.
4.3.2
Charge Delays
Separate delay settings are provided for Dead Line Charge and Dead Bus Charge closure. These are applied
after the autoreclose Dead Time when voltage conditions are checked and met, at the Close Inhibit stage of the
sequence. This feature effectively allows the dead time to be set differently for faults on each side of the recloser.
4.3.3
Voltage monitoring elements
The single phase voltage source used for synchronising can be selected as any phase to phase or phase to earth
voltage for flexibility. The voltage is compared to the corresponding voltage from the three phase arrangement on
the other side of the circuit breaker. Voltage settings are set as a percentage of the nominal voltage specified in
the CT/VT Config menu.
Voltage detectors
Voltage detectors determine the status of the line or bus. If the voltages on either the line or bus are below a set
threshold level they can be considered to be dead. If the voltages are within a setting band around the nominal
voltage they are classed as live. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus.
If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area.
Similarly, if a voltage is live, it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. This effectively allows
for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set. Figure 4.3-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation.
Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate. When any voltage is applied to the relay it
will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first.
A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap.
Figure 4.3-1 Voltage Detector Operation
Under-voltage detectors
The under-voltage detectors, if enabled, can block a close output command if either the line voltage or the bus
voltage is below the under-voltage setting value. Both line and bus have their own independent settings.
Differential voltage detectors

The differential voltage detector, if enabled, can block a close output command if the difference between the line
and bus voltages is greater than the differential voltage setting value.
4.3.4
Sync Override Logic
For certain switching operations, a means of bypassing the Check Synchronisation function is provided. This is
provided by separate binary inputs for 79 Override Sync and Man Override Sync.
4.3.5
Check Synchronising Mode
The MOS On/Off input is provided to bypass the voltage and synchronising checks to provide an emergency
close function. Similarly, check synchronising can be overridden by the 79 OS On/Off input during autoreclose.
MOS On/Off can be set by binary inputs, Control commands and the function keys.
For the relay to issue a Check Sync Close the following conditions have to be met :
The Line and Bus voltages must both be considered live.
25 Check Sync Angle the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase
angle setting value. Whilst within the limits the phase angle can be increasing or decreasing and the element will
still issue a valid close signal.
25 Check Sync Slip Freq, [if enabled] the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip
frequency setting value.
25 Check Sync Timer, [if enabled] the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their
parameters for the length of the slip timer setting. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of
their limits the slip timer is reset. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an
output is given. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the system
due to e.g. some remote switching operations).
25 Line Undervolts, [if enabled] the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also
above 5V for an output to be given.
25 Bus Undervolts, [if enabled] the bus voltage has to be above the bus under-voltage setting value and also
25 Volt Differential, [if enabled] the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than
the differential voltage detector setting value for an output to be given.
The synchronising is always started in the Check Synchronising mode of operation and the Check Synchronising
limits are applied. To proceed to System Synchronisation a system split must be detected as described in section
4.3.6
SLIP
Slip Within Range ?
Slip Frequency Setting
Angle
Phase Within Range ?
Slip Timer
Phase Angle Setting
Line U/V
Block
Block
Bus U/V
BLock
Block
V Block
Block
&
&
CheckSync
Close
Slip Timer
Setting
Figure 4.3-2 Check Sync Function
4.3.6
System Split Detector
A system split occurs where part of the system becomes islanded and operates separately. Under these
conditions the frequencies of the voltages either side of the breaker are asynchronous and therefore high phase
angle differences can occur as the voltage phasors slip past each other.
The decision to change to System Split settings, apply Close on Zero function, Lockout or ignore, during
autoreclose and manual closing is set separately by the 25 DAR Split Mode and 25 MC Split Mode settings. The
System Split condition is detected when either the measured phase difference angle exceeds the pre-set 25 Slip
Angle value or if the slip frequency exceeds a pre-set 25 Split Slip rate based on the selection of 25 System Split
Mode.
Note : the system split setting is effectively an absolute value and therefore a split will occur at the value
regardless of the direction of the frequency slip e.g. if an angle of 170 is selected, then starting from 0, a split
will occur at +170 or -170 (effectively +190).
If a system split occurs during an autoreclose Check Sync operation, with 25 System Sync set to Enabled, the
following events occur:
A System Split event is recorded.
The split flag can be mapped to an output relay for alarm indication.
The system split LED will stay on for a minimum time, or can be latched using non self reset LEDs.
If the 25 DAR Split Mode is set to CS, Check Sync will continue
If the 25 DAR Split Mode setting has been set to SS, the System Sync function is started.
If the 25 DAR Split Mode has been set to LOCKOUT, then, a system split LED indication is given. The relay will
stay in this lockout mode until one of the following methods of resetting it is performed
1. The relay is reset from Lockout by binary input or a command.
2. The CB is manually closed
4.3.7
System Sync Reversion
If the close conditions of System Sync are not met and a zero slip condition is subsequently detected, by the slip
falling below the 25 Split Slip setting, the relay will exit from System Sync mode and revert to Check
Synchronising mode. The reversion allows the device to use the wider Check Sync parameters, to allow a close
following the restoration of normal operation when the islanded network has been reconnected to the main
network by successful reclosure of a parallel connection.
4.3.8
System Synchronising Mode
For the relay to issue a System Sync Close the following conditions have to be met :
Both the Bus and Line voltages must be considered Live by the Voltage Monitoring elements.
25 System Sync Angle the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase
angle setting value and the phase angle has to be decreasing before the element will issue a valid close signal.
25 System Sync Slip, [if Enabled] the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip
frequency setting value. Slip frequency must be above the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion to Check
Synchronising conditions. The settings for 25 System Sync Slip and 25 Split Slip must differ by at least 20mHz.
25 System Sync Timer, [if Enabled] the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their
parameters for the length of the slip timer setting. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of
their limits the slip timer is reset. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an
output is given. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the
system due to e.g. some remote switching operations).
25 Line Undervolts, [if Enabled] the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also
25 Bus Undervolts, [if Enabled] the bus voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also
25 Volt Differential, [if Enabled] the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the
detector setting value for an output to be given.
The System Synchronising operation of the relay will only be started after a System Split is detected as described
in section 4.3.6 during an autoreclose or manual close sequence.
SLIP
Slip Within Range ?
Slip Frequency Setting
Angle
Phase Within Range ?

AND
Phase Decreasing ?
Slip Timer
&
Phase Angle Setting
Live Line
Slip Timer
Setting
&
Live Bus
Line U/V
Block
Block
Bus U/V
BLock
Block
V Block
Block
SystemSync
Close
Figure 4.3-3 System Sync Function
4.3.9
Close on Zero Mode
If the 25 DAR Split Mode or 25 MC Split Mode is set to COZ the relay will apply a Close On Zero to the respective
closing operation if the synchronising mode changes to System Split. The measured slip frequency and the
measured phase difference are used to provide a Close Pulse which will close the CB when the phase difference
is reducing and timed with the setting 25 CB Close Time such that the instant of closure is when the phase
difference is zero. The slip frequency must be less than the 25 COZ Slip Freq but greater than the 25 Split Slip
setting to avoid reversion to Check Synchronising conditions.
Since this feature is part of the System Synchronising function, 25 System Sync must also be set to Enabled.
SLIP
Slip Within Range ?

(> Split Slip & < COZ slip)
Split Slip Setting
&
COZ Slip Frequency Setting
Angle
Phase Difference
Phase Decreasing
&
?
&
CB Close Time
COZ
Close
Live Line
Live Bus
Line U/ V
Block
Block
Bus U/ V
BLock
Block
V Block
Block
&
Figure 4.3-4 Close On Zero Function

Close on Zero will not be accurate if slow CB times are applied in conjunction with fast slip rates during testing.
Practical application limits are shown below
Maximum Slip Frequency (Hz)
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
200
400
600
800
CB Close Time (ms)
Figure 4.3-5 Close On Zero Timing
4.4
Live/Dead Indication
Outputs are provided to identify each voltage input as either Live or Dead using voltage user settings. These
outputs are controlled independently of the 25 Check Synchronising Voltage monitoring elements but operate in
the same way.
Voltage detectors are provided for each phase input A, B, C & X and inputs Y & Z when fitted. If the voltage on
the respective input is below a set threshold level they can be considered to be dead. If the voltages are above
a voltage setting they are classed as live. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus.
If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area.
Similarly, if a voltage is live, it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. This effectively allows
for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set. Figure 4.4-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation.
Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate. When any voltage is applied to the relay it
will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first.
A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap.
Figure 4.4-1 Voltage Detector Operation

Live and Dead outputs are provided for each voltage input:
A Live, B Live, C Live, A Dead, B Dead, C Dead, X Live, Y Live, Z Live, X Dead, Y Dead & Z Dead,
Combined outputs are also provided separately to indicate ALL phases Live or Dead:
ABC Live, ABC Dead, XYZ Live & XYZ Dead
4.5
Circuit Breaker
This menu includes relay settings applicable to both manual close (MC) and autoreclose (AR) functionality.
CB Controls Latched
CB controls for closing and tripping can be latched i.e. until confirmation that the action has been completed i.e.
binary input is edge triggered when latched.
Close CB Delay
The Close CB Delay is applicable to manual CB close commands received through a Close CB binary input or
via the Control Menu. Operation of the 79 MC Close CB binary output is delayed by the Close CB Delay setting.
Close CB Pulse
The duration of the CB Close Pulse is settable to allow a range of CBs to be used. The Close pulse will be
terminated if any protection picks-up operates or a trip occurs. This is to prevent Close and Trip Command pulses
existing simultaneously. A 79 Close On Fault Output is given if a pick-up or trip operates during the Close Pulse.
This can be independently wired to Lockout.
CB Failed To Open and CB Failed to Close features are used to confirm that a CB has not responded correctly to
each Trip and Close Command. If a CB fails to operate, the AR feature will go to lockout.
79 CB Close Fail is issued if the CB is not closed at the end of the close pulse, CB Close Pulse.
Reclaim Timer
The Reclaim time will start each time a Close Pulse has timed out and the CB has closed.
Where a protection pickup is raised during the reclaim time the relay advances to the next part of the reclose
sequence.
The relay goes to the Lockout state if the CB is open at the end of the reclaim time or a protection operates during
the final reclaim time.
Blocked Close Delay

The close command may be delayed by a Block Close CB signal applied to a binary input. This causes the
feature to pause before it issues the CB close command and can be used, for example, to delay CB closure until
the CB energy has reached an acceptable level. If the Block signal has not been removed before the end of the
defined time, Blocked Close Delay, the relay will go to the lockout state.
Open CB Delay
The Open CB Delay setting is applicable to CB trip commands received through an Open CB binary input or via
the Control Menu. Operation of the Open CB binary output is delayed by the Open CB Delay setting.
Open CB Pulse
The duration of the CB open Command pulse is user settable to allow a range of CBs to be used.
CB Failed To Open is taken from the Circuit Breaker Failure Element.
CB Travel Alarm
The CB Open/CB Closed binary inputs are monitored. The relay goes to Lockout and an output can be given
where a 0/0 condition exists for longer than the CB Travel Alarm setting.
An instantaneous output is given for a 1/1 state.
Figure 4.5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status
4.6
Hot Line In/Out
The Hot Line function can be used to provide an immediate trip and auto-reclose inhibit for any Overcurrent, Earth
Fault or Sensitive Earth Fault detection. This function is used to increase safety when personnel are working in
the vicinity of live primary equipment.
When Hot Line is enabled, pickup of any 50, 51, 50G, 51G, 50SEF or 51SEF element will cause an instantaneous
trip, bypassing any time delay setting of the element. Any autoreclose sequence will be inhibited and Auto-reclose
Lockout will be raised. This feature is not triggered by pick-up or operation of other protection elements such as
under/over voltage, frequency, thermal or negative sequence overcurrent .
Additionally, when Hot Line is In, Manual Close is inhibited. This can help to prevent unintended energisation of a
dead circuit whilst personnel are working nearby. Hot Line must be switched to Out before the Manual Close
action will be successful.
Hot Line can be configured to be switched In/Out by binary inputs, function keys or by commands via the
communications protocols. There are no other configurable options for Hot Line.
4.7
Quick Logic
The Quick Logic feature allows the user to input up to 16 logic equations (E1 to E16) in text format. Equations
can be entered using Reydisp or at the relay fascia.
Each logic equation is built up from text representing control characters. Each can be up to 20 characters long.
Allowable characters are:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Digit
( )
Parenthesis
NOT Function
AND Function
EXCLUSIVE OR Function
OR Function
En
Equation (number)
Fn
Function Key (number)

1 = Key pressed, 0 = Key not pressed
In
Binary Input (number)

1 = Input energised, 0 = Input de-energised
Ln
LED (number)
1 = LED energised, 0 = LED de-energised
On
Binary output (number)

1 = Output energised, 0 = Output de-energised
Vn
Virtual Input/Output (number)

1 = Virtual I/O energised, 0 = Virtual I/O de-energised
Example Showing Use of Nomenclature

E1= ((I1^F1).!O2)+L1
Equation 1 = ((Binary Input 1 XOR Function Key 1) AND NOT Binary Output 2)
OR
LED 1
When the equation is satisfied (=1) it is routed through a pick-up timer (En Pickup Delay), a drop-off timer (En
Dropoff Delay), and a counter which instantaneously picks up and increments towards its target (En Counter
Target).
The counter will either maintain its count value En Counter Reset Mode = OFF, or reset after a time delay:
En Counter Reset Mode = Single Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started only when the counter
is first incremented (i.e. counter value = 1) and not for subsequent counter operations. Where En
Counter Reset Time elapses and the count value has not reached its target the count value is reset to
zero.
En Counter Reset Mode = Multi Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started each time the counter is
incremented. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses without further count increments the count value
is reset to zero.
Equation n
P.U. DELAY
D.O. DELAY
Counter
Counter Value 1
Increment
Counter
Counter
= Target Value
En = 1
.D
O
D.
P.
U
.D
EL
AY
AY
EL
Equation Output 1
1
For Counter Target = 2
En = 1
Figure 4.7-1 Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off)
When the count value = En Counter Target the output of the counter (En) = 1 and this value is held until the
initiating conditions are removed when En is instantaneously reset.
The output of En is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu where it can be programmed to
any binary output (O), LED (L) or Virtual Input/Output (V) combination.
Protection functions can be used in Quick Logic by mapping them to a Virtual Input / Output.
Refer to Section 7 Applications Guide for examples of Logic schemes.
Section 5: Supervision Functions

5.1
Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)
The circuit breaker fail function has two time delayed outputs that can be used for combinations of re-tripping or
back-tripping. CB Fail outputs are given after elapse of the 50BF-1 Delay or 50BF-2 Delay settings.
The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from:
An output Trip Contact of the relay (MENU: OUTPUT CONFIG\BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG\Trip
Contacts), or
A binary input configured 50BF Ext Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\BINARY INPUT MATRIX\50BF Ext
Trip).
A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF Mech Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\ 50BF
Mech Trip).
CB Fail outputs will be issued providing any of the 3 phase currents are above the 50BF Setting or the current in
the fourth CT is above 50BF-I4 for longer than the 50BF-n Delay setting, or for a mechanical protection trip the
circuit breaker is still closed when the 50BF-n Delay setting has expired indicating that the fault has not been
cleared.
Both 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 can be mapped to any output contact or LED.
If the 50BF CB Faulty input (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\50BF CB Faulty) is energised when a CB
trip is given the time delays 50BF-n Delay will be by-passed and the output given immediately.
Operation of the CB Fail elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50BF
User Inhibit
Figure 5.1-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF)
5.2
VT Supervision (60VTS)
1 or 2 Phase Failure Detection

Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) or zero phase sequence (ZPS) voltage in a power
system is accompanied by NPS or ZPS current. The presence of either of these sequence voltages without the
equivalent level of the appropriate sequence current is used to indicate a failure of one or two VT phases.
The 60VTS Component setting selects the method used for the detection of loss of 1 or 2 VT phases i.e. ZPS or
NPS components. The sequence component voltage is derived from the line voltages; suitable VT connections
must be available. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function.
The element has user settings 60VTS V and 60VTS I. A VT is considered to have failed where the voltage
exceeds 60VTS V while the current is below 60VTS I for a time greater than 60VTS Delay.
3 Phase Failure Detection

Under normal load conditions rated PPS voltage would be expected along with a PPS load current within the
circuit rating. Where PPS load current is detected without corresponding PPS voltage this could indicate a three
phase VT failure. To ensure these conditions are not caused by a 3 phase fault the PPS current must also be
below the fault level.
The element has a 60VTS VPPS setting, an 60VTS IPPS Load setting and a setting for 60VTS IPPS Fault. A VT is
considered to have failed where positive sequence voltage is below 60VTS VPPS while positive sequence current
is above IPPS Load and below IPPS Fault level for more than 60VTS Delay then a VT failure will be detected.
External MCB
A binary input can be set as Ext_Trig 60VTS to allow the 60VTS Delay element to be started from an external
MCB operating.
Once a VT failure condition has occurred the output is latched on and is reset by any of the following:Voltage is restored to a healthy state i.e. above VPPS setting while NPS voltage is below VNPS setting.
Ext Reset 60VTS
A binary or virtual input, or function key and a VT failure condition no longer

exists.
Inhibit 60VTS
User Inhibit
Figure 5.2-1 Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS)
5.3
Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus)
When the optional synchronising function is fitted, the synchronising voltage transformer is utilised to provide an
additional monitoring function to check the validity of the measured line and busbar voltages. When the circuit
breaker is closed, both voltages should be either Live or Dead. If the Bus voltage indicates that the VT is Dead
but the corresponding Line voltage is Live, this raises the Bus VT Fail output. A time delay setting is provided to
avoid spurious operations during transient switching conditions. Additionally, this output can be enabled by a
setting, 79 LO Bus VT Fail, to apply a Lockout signal to the autoreclose function so that a sequence will not be
attempted after a trip occurs if it is known that the voltage measurement is not reliable. A similar setting is
available, 79 LO Line VT Fail, which when Enabled will provide a Lockout for a Line VT failure detected by the
60VTS function.
5.4
CT Supervision (60CTS)
Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) current in a power system is accompanied by NPS
voltage. The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure.
The element has a setting for NPS current level 60CTS Inps and a setting for NPS voltage level 60CTS Vnps If
the negative sequence current exceeds its setting while the negative sequence voltage is below its setting for
more than 60CTS Delay then a CT failure output (60CTS Operated) is given.
Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 60CTS
User Inhibit
Figure 5.4-1 Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS)
5.5
Broken Conductor (46BC)
The element calculates the ratio of NPS to PPS currents. Where the NPS:PPS current ratio is above 46BC
Setting an output is given after the 46BC Delay.
The Broken Conductor function can be inhibited from
Inhibit 46BC
User Inhibit
&
Enable
Enable
IA
IA
IB
IB
NPS
Filter
I2
PPS
Filter
I1
IC
IC
IA
IB
IC
Figure 5.5-1 Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC)
5.6
Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS)
The relay provides three trip circuit supervision elements.

One or more binary inputs can be mapped to 74TCS-n. The inputs are connected into the trip circuit such that at
least one input is energised when the trip circuit wiring is intact. If all mapped inputs become de-energised, due to
a break in the trip circuit wiring or loss of supply an output is given.
The 74TCS-n Delay setting prevents failure being incorrectly indicated during circuit breaker operation. This delay
should be greater than the operating time of the circuit breaker.
The use of one or two binary inputs mapped to the same Trip Circuit Supervision element (e.g.
74TCS-n) allows the user to realise several alternative monitoring schemes see Applications Guide.
The Trip Circuit Supervision elements can be individually inhibited from:
User Inhibit
Figure 5.6-1 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS)
5.7
Inrush Detector (81HBL2)
Inrush restraint detector elements are provided, these monitor the line currents.
The inrush restraint detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer
magnetising inrush conditions.
The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement:
Phase
Each phase is inhibited separately.
Sum
With this method the square root of the sum of the squares of the second harmonic in each
phase is compared to each operate current individually.
Cross
All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition.
An output is given where the measured value of the second harmonic component is above the 81HBL2 setting.
Figure 5.7-1 Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2)
5.8
Battery Test
The DC battery voltage is constantly monitored by the relay. The output function Battery Healthy is provided to
indicate that the battery charging system is connected and functioning correctly by measurement of the Float
Charge voltage level and comparison with the minimum float voltage based on the Battery Nominal Voltage
setting.
In addition to this, the relay can be used to apply a loading test to the battery system at a settable periodic
interval. The test sequence is shown below.
If a protection Pickup occurs at any time during the test, the test will be abandoned and the charging system reconnected. The battery voltage level will be maintained such that the Recloser will be capable of normal operation
throughout the duration of the test. Battery tests can be executed at manual request from a binary input or from
the Control Menu of the relay. If the time elapsed since the previous battery test is less than 12 hours, the test will
not execute and Test Aborted will be displayed on the Battery Condition meter.
Figure 5.8-1 Battery Test timing diagram

When the test is required, the output Battery Test is raised to interface with external equipment. This signal is
used to disconnect the charging system and the battery is allowed to settle for a fixed period of 30 minutes. The
battery voltage with no load is then measured (V1) and the output Battery Load Test is then raised. This is used
to connect the resistive load to the battery and the voltage is measured again after 500ms (V2). This voltage is
used to asses the battery internal resistance and the resistance of connections. If V1-V2 ( V) is greater than the
Battery Volts Drop setting the test will be considered as a failure and the test stopped, otherwise voltage is
measured again after a further 5 seconds with the load resistance connected. This voltage, (V3), is compared to
V2 and must not differ by more than 2 volts or the test will be stopped and recorded as a fail. The load is then
disconnected, by the drop-off of the Battery Load Test output and a 10 minute recovery time applied before the
voltage is measured again (V4). This voltage must not differ from the pre-test voltage by more than 0.5 volts or
Recovery Fail output will be raised. The Battery Test output is now cleared which will reconnect the charging
system to allow the system to return to normal. The quiescent voltage monitoring will resume after 30 minutes.
5.9
Capacitor Test
The actuator mechanism of the recloser can be driven from a charged capacitor network. The condition of the
capacitors is monitored externally to the relay and the interface to the relay is in the form of two binary signals
which are driven by undervoltage detectors as shown below. These inputs are CapMon Input 1 and CapMon
Input 2.
In the quiescent state, both logical inputs should be in the 1 state and the detection of 0 on both inputs will
trigger the CapacitorSupplyFail output.
In addition to the monitoring during quiescent conditions, the state of the inputs can be monitored to assess
capacitor condition during an externally applied discharge test. When the Cap Element setting is Enabled, the
sequence is executed automatically, 30 minutes after completion of a successful battery test. The sequence can
be started manually on demand by energising the Capacitor Test binary input. If any protection element pickup
occurs at any time during the capacitor test sequence, the sequence will be terminated.
Figure 5.9-1 Capacitor Test timing diagram

When the test is required, the output Cap Test Active is raised. This is used externally to start the discharge test.
When the voltage reduces to the higher voltage detector, the relay binary inputs CapMon Input 2 will change to
state 0 from the quiescent 1. CapMon Input 1 will remain at the 1 state. The relay recognises this 1-0
condition and starts a timer which runs for the Cap Holdup Time. If the CapMon Input 1 changes state to 0
during this time, the test is recorded as a fail and the relay goes to the recovery state as described below. If the
timer expires with the 1-0 condition still maintained, the test is considered as a pass. The sequence now enters
the recovery state and the Cap Test Active output is cleared causing the external discharge test to end The
Capacitor voltage will now recover and the quiescent 1-1 state for CapMon Input 1 and CapMon Input 2 will be
re-established. If the 1-1 state is not achieved at the end of the 10 second recovery time, the Cap Recovery Fail
output and the Capacitor Only Trip output are raised and the reclose function of the relay are internally blocked.
Normal continuous monitoring of the quiescent state will be resumed 10 seconds after the reset of the Cap Test
Active output.
5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S)

Voltage sag (27S) and voltage swell (59S) elements monitor the power supply quality.
The elements monitor the deviation of the voltage from the nominal value and the duration of this under or over
voltage in accordance with IEEE 1159.
Figure 5.10-1 Sag and Swell Indices - IEEE 1159
Section 6: Other Features

6.1
Data Communications
Two serial communication ports, COM1 and COM2 are provided. RS485 connections are available on the
terminal blocks at the rear of the relay (COM1). A USB port, (COM 2), is provided at the front of the relay for local
access using a PC.
Other rear mounted communication ports are available as an optional extra
2x fibre optic communication serial ports with ST connectors (COM 3 and COM 4) plus 1x IRIG B
1x RS232 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B
1x RS485 serialport (COM 3) plus IRIG B
2x Electrical Ethernet with RJ45 connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4),
2x Optical Ethernet with ST connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4).
Communication is compatible with Modbus-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 FT 1.2, DNP 3.0, and IEC60870-5-101
transmission and application standards for all serial ports and IEC 61850 for Ethernet ports.
For communication with the relay via a PC (personal computer) a user-friendly software package, Reydisp
Evolution, is available to allow transfer of relay settings, waveform records, event records, fault data records,
Instruments/meters and control functions. REYDISP EVOLUTION is compatible with IEC60870-5-103.
Data communications operation is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual.
6.2
CB Maintenance
Several CB trip operations counters are provided:
CB Total Trip Count:
Increments on each trip command issued. During an

autoreclose sequence, when the target count is reached the
relay will perform one Delayed Trip and lockout*.
CB Delta Trip Count:
Additional counter which can be reset independently of the

Total Trip Counter. This can be used, for example, for
recording trip operations between visits to a substation.
CB Count to AR Block:
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB.

When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed
Trip to Lockout.
CB Frequent Ops Count
Logs the number of trip operations in a rolling window period

of one hour. During an autoreclose sequence, when the
target count is reached the relay will perform one Delayed
Trip and lockout*.
CB LO Handle Ops
Displays the number of CB (lock out) LO Handle Ops

experienced by the CB. When the target is reached the relay
will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout.
*NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROTN menu the relay will not trip.
An I2t counter is also included; this can provide an estimation of contact wear and maintenance requirements. The
I2t value at the time of trip is added to the previously stored value.
Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the user defined
Count Target or Alarm Limit is reached.
The counters do not increment for manual operations.
6.3
Output Matrix Test
The feature is only visible from the Relay fascia and allows the user to operate the relays functions. The test of
the function will automatically operate any Binary Inputs or LEDs already assigned to that function.
Any protection function which is enabled in the setting menu will appear in the Output Matrix Test.
6.4
Data Storage
6.4.1
General
The relay stores three types of data: relay event records, analogue/digital waveform records and fault records.
Data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the event of loss of
auxiliary d.c. supply voltage.
6.4.2
Event Records
The event recorder feature allows the time tagging of any change of state (Event) in the relay. As an event
occurs, the actual event condition is logged as a record along with a time and date stamp to a resolution of 1
millisecond. There is capacity for a maximum of 5000 event records that can be stored in the relay and when the
event buffer is full any new record will over-write the oldest. Stored events can be erased from the front fascia via
DATA STORAGE>Clear Events setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Events > Reset Events.
The following events are logged:
Change of state of Binary outputs.
Change of state of Binary inputs.
Change of Settings and Settings Group
Change of state of any of the control functions of the relay.
All events can be retrieved over the data communications channel(s) and can be displayed in the Reydisp
Evolution package in chronological order, allowing the sequence of events to be viewed. Events are also made
available spontaneously to an IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 or IEC6-870-5-101 compliant control
system.
For a complete listing of events available in each model, refer to Technical Manual section 4 Data Comms.
6.4.3
Waveform Records.
Relay waveform storage can be triggered either after user selected relay operations, from the relay fascia, from a
suitably programmed binary input or via the data comms channel(s). The stored analogue and digital waveforms
illustrate the system and relay conditions at the time of trigger.
In total the relay provides 10 seconds of waveform storage, this is user selectable to 1 record of 10 seconds
duration, 2 records of 5 seconds duration, 5 records of 2 seconds duration or 10 records of 1 second duration.
When the waveform recorder buffer is full any new waveform records will over-write the oldest. The most recent
record is Waveform 1.
As well as defining the stored waveform record duration the user can select the percentage of the waveform
storage prior to triggering.
The waveform recorder samples at a rate of 32 samples per cycle (1600Hz).
Stored waveforms can be erased using the DATA STORAGE>Clear Waveforms setting or using Reydisp
Evolution via Relay > Waveform > Reset Waveform Records.
6.4.4
Fault Records
Up to ten fault records can be stored and displayed on the Fascia LCD.
Fault records provide a summary of the relay status at the time of trip, i.e. the element that issued the trip, any
elements that were picked up, the fault type, LED indications, date and time. The Max Fault Rec. Time setting
sets the time period from fault trigger during which the operation of any LEDs is recorded.
When examined together the event records and the fault records will detail the full sequence of events leading to
a trip.
Fault records are stored in a rolling buffer, with the oldest faults overwritten. The fault storage can be cleared with
the DATA STORAGE>Clear Faults setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Data Records > Reset Data
Log Record.
6.4.5
Demand
The Demand / Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. Up to 10,080
individual time stamped records can be stored at a user defined rate e.g. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1
year @ 1 hour intervals.
Maximum, minimum and mean values of line current, voltage and power (where applicable) are available as
instruments which can be read in the relay INSTRUMENTS MENU or via Reydisp Evolution.
In the menu DATA STORAGE > DEMAND / DATA LOG: The Data Log Period setting is used to define the period between stored samples.
The Gn Demand Window setting defines the maximum period of time over which the demand values are
calculated. A new set of demand values is established after expiry of the set time.
The Gn Demand Window Type is the mode used to calculate demand values and can be set to FIXED or
PEAK or ROLLING: When set to FIXED the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over
fixed Window duration. At the end of each window the internal statistics are reset and a new window
is started.
When set to PEAK the maximum and minimum values since the feature was reset are recorded.
When set to ROLLING the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated
over a moving Window duration. The internal statistics are updated when the window advances.
The statistics can be reset from a binary input or communication command, after a reset the update period and
window are immediately restarted.
6.4.6
Data Log
The Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. Up to 10,080 individual
time stamped records of each phase current and voltage (where fitted) analogue signal are recorded and stored
at a user defined rate e.g. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1 year @ 1 hour intervals.
6.4.7
Energy Storage
The measured Power is continuously integrated (over a one-second window) to produce 4 Energy quantities:
Active Export Energy (W)
Active Import Energy (W)
Reactive Export Energy (VAr)
Reactive Import Energy (VAr)
The Direction of Energy transfer is set by: SYSTEM CONFIG> Export Power/Lag VAr. With both Export Power
(W) and Lag VAr (VAr) set to be +ve, the Direction of Energy transfer will follow the IEC convention, as shown in
the figure.
REACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT

(vars reverse)
IEC CONVENTION : -ve vars
+90
POWER FACTOR LAGGING

ACTIVE (W) IMPORT
REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT
ACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT
(watts reverse)
IEC CONVENTION : -ve watts
POWER FACTOR LEADING

ACTIVE (W) EXPORT
REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT
180
POWER FACTOR LEADING

ACTIVE (W) IMPORT
REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT
ACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT

(watts forward)
IEC CONVENTION : +ve watts
POWER FACTOR LAGGING

ACTIVE (W) EXPORT
REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT
-90
REACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT
(vars forward)
IEC CONVENTION : +ve vars
Figure 6.4-1 Energy Direction Convention

Setting either the Export Power (W) or Lag VAr (VAr) to be -ve, will reverse the Direction of the Energy transfer
for these quantities. So forward VAr will then be reported as Imported Reactive Energy, and forward Watts will be
reported as Exported Active Energy.
When the accumulated Energy quantities reach a set increment, the Relay issues a pulse to the binary outputs:
OUTPUT CONFIG/OUTPUT MATRIX> Active Exp Pulse, Active Imp Pulse, Reactive Exp Pulse and Reactive
Imp Pulse.
The Energy increments are set by the settings: DATA STORAGE/ENERGY STORAGE> Active Exp Energy
Unit, Active Imp Energy Unit, Reactive Exp Energy Unit and Reactive Imp Energy Unit. These setting also
define the resolution of the stored energy values reported by instruments and communications protocols. The
value is stored in the range 0-999999 which continues from zero automatically when 999999 is reached.
6.4.8
Fault Locator
The relay provides a Single End type fault locator which is able to estimate the fault position using
analogue information measured by the relay at one end of the protected circuit during the short
duration of the fault.
Following relay operation due to a system fault, the fault waveform record is automatically evaluated to
establish the fault type in terms of the phase(s) affected and the relevant current and voltage is used
to calculate the fault impedance. The relay compares this information to a line model based on
characteristic impedance parameters which are input to the relay as settings and provides an output
estimate of the fault location. This data is presented as a percentage of line length or a distance in
miles or kilometres.
The Positive Sequence Impedance on the protected line must be provided to the relay as settings for
impedance magnitude and characteristic phase angle to enable the distance to fault to be calculated.
The Earth Fault return impedance is specified in terms of the ratio of zero to positive sequence
impedance magnitudes and the characteristic phase angle of the zero sequence impedance. The
characteristic angle of the zero sequence impedance is often significantly different to that of the
positive sequence impedance.
When power systems are earthed through compensation (Peterson) coils, the earth fault currents are
extremely low and are not proportional to fault location. Impedance based fault location cannot be
used for earth faults. Phase to phase fault location can be estimated. On networks of this type it is
possible to have two earth faults on the network simultaneously on different phases of the same circuit
which will appear as a phase to phase fault. This is known as a Cross Country fault. In these cases
the measured impedance cannot give an accurate estimate of the fault condition. The 7SR224
provides detection of this condition using the measured zero sequence voltage to positive sequence
voltage ratio (U0/U1) to allow the possible cross country fault to be reported. This threshold is
adjustable by a user setting.
Fault Location is reported for faults calculated in a zone which extends to 200% of the forward line
impedance and 10% in the reverse direction. High resistance fault results where fault resistance is
calculated as up to 20 times the line impedance are reported. For faults beyond these limits, the
message No Location is reported.
The Fault Location estimation is initiated by operation of the Trip Output. Some protection elements
may be set to provide tripping for system conditions where a fault location is not applicable. The
initiation of the Fault Locator can be inhibited by user settings.
The settings for the Fault Locator are found as a sub-menu in the Data Storage menu
The Fault Locator result data is available in the Fault Data records and can be viewed at the relay
fascia and downloaded from the relay.
6.5
Metering
The metering feature provides real-time data available from the relay fascia in the Instruments Mode or via the
data communications interface.
For a detailed description refer to Technical Manual Section 2 Settings and Instruments.
6.6
Operating Mode
The relay has three operating modes, Local, Remote and Out of Service.
functions operation in each mode.
The following table identifies the
The modes can be selected by the following methods:

SYSTEM CONFIG>RELAY MODE setting, a Binary Input or Command
REMOTE MODE
LOCAL MODE
OUT OF SERVICE
MODE
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Setting Option
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Setting Option
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Changing of Settings
Rear Ports (when set as Remote)
Rear Ports (when set as Local)
Fascia
USB
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Historical Information
Waveform Records
Event Records
Fault Information
Setting Information
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
OPERATION
Control
Rear Serial Ports (when set as Remote)
Rear Serial Ports (when set as Local)
Fascia (Control Mode)
USB
Binary Inputs
Binary Outputs
Reporting
Spontaneous
IEC 101/103
DNP3
General Interrogation
IEC 101/103
DNP3
MODBUS
Table 6-1
6.7
Operation Mode
Control Mode
This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items
listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The user is prompted to confirm the
action, again by pressing the ENTER key, before the command is executed.
Control Mode commands could be password protected using the Control Password function see section 6.8.
Commands available in the Control Mode are:
Open CB
Close CB
79 In/Out
79 Trip and Reclose
79 Trip & Lockout
Hotline Work In/Out
E/F In/Out
SEF In/Out
Instantaneous Protection In/Out
Battery Test Required

Set Local Mode
Set Local or Remote Mode
Set Remote Mode
Set Out of Service Mode
6.8
Real Time Clock
Time and date can be set either via the relay fascia using appropriate commands in the System Config menu, via
the data comms channel(s) or via the optional IRIG-B input. Time and date are maintained while the relay is deenergised by a back up storage capacitor.
The default date is set at 01/01/2000 deliberately to indicate the date has not yet been set. When editing the
Time, only the hours and minutes can be edited. When the user presses ENTER after editing the seconds are
zeroed and the clock begins running.
6.8.1 Time Synchronisation Data Communication Interface

Where the data comms channel(s) is connected the relay can be directly time synchronised to the nearest second
or minute using the global time synchronisation. This can be from a dedicated substation automation system or
from Reydisp Evolution communications support software.
6.8.2 Time Synchronisation Binary Input

A binary input can be mapped Clock Sync from BI. The seconds or minutes will be rounded up or down to the
nearest value when the BI is energised. This input is leading edge triggered.
6.8.3 Time Synchronisation IRIG-B (Optional)

A BNC connector on the relay rear provides an isolated IRIG-B time synchronisation port. The IRIG-B input
expects a modulated 3-6 Volt signal and provides time synchronisation to the nearest millisecond.
6.9
Settings Groups
The relay provides eight groups of settings Group number (Gn) 1 to 8. At any one time only one group of
settings can be active SYSTEM CONFIG>Active Group setting.
It is possible to edit one group while the relay operates in accordance with settings from another active group
using the View/Edit Group setting.
Some settings are independent of the active group setting i.e. they apply to all settings groups. This is indicated
on the top line of the relay LCD where only the Active Group No. is identified. Where settings are group
dependent this is indicated on the top line of the LCD by both the Active Group No. and the View Group No.
being displayed.
A change of settings group can be achieved either locally at the relay fascia, remotely over the data comms
channel(s) or via a binary input. When using a binary input an alternative settings group is selected only whilst the
input is energised (Select Grp Mode: Level triggered) or latches into the selected group after energisation of the
input (Select Grp Mode: Edge triggered).
The settings group that is currently active is indicated by signals in the output matrix which can be used for
indication and alarms.
6.10 Password Feature

The relay incorporates two levels of password protection one for settings, the other for control functions.
The programmable password feature enables the user to enter a 4 character alpha numeric code to secure
access to the relay functions. A Password of NONE indicates that a Password has not been set and that the
Password feature is disabled. Where a Relay is delivered with the Password already set, this will be "AAAA".
The password must be entered twice as a security measure against accidental changes. Once a password has
been entered then it will be required thereafter to change settings or initiate control commands. Passwords can be
de-activated by using the password to gain access and by entering the password NONE. Again this must be
entered twice to de-activate the security system.
As soon as the user attempts to change a setting or initiate control the password is requested before any changes
are allowed. Once the password has been validated, the user is logged on and any further changes can be
made without re-entering the password. If no more changes are made within 1 hour then the user will
automatically be logged off, re-enabling the password feature.
The Settings Password prevents unauthorised changes to settings from the front fascia or over the data comms
channel(s). The Control Password prevents unauthorised operation of controls in the relay Control Menu from the
front fascia.
The password validation screen also displays a numerical code. If the password is lost or forgotten, this code
should be communicated to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. and the password can be retrieved.
7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage)

Overcurrent Relay

2008/11
First issue
2009/09
Second Issue. Updated to suit software modification
2010/04
Third Issue. Software version updated
2010/05
Fourth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand
2012/09
Fifth Issue. Software version updated
2012/12

2008/10
2435H80011R3d-2b
First issue with Loss Of Voltage Loop Automation
2009/09
2435H80011R4c-3b
Maintenance & minor LOV changes
2010/04
2435H80011R4d-4
Phase allocation and sequence, no change to this function
2012/09
2435H85010R7b-7a
IEC 61850 introduced, no change to the LOV function
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Document Release History ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Software Revision History........................................................................................................................................ 1
1.
Description Of Feature .................................................................................................................................... 4

1.1. Loss of Voltage (LOV) Automatic Restoration Element........................................................................ 4
1.2. Sequence Timing .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.
LOV Automation Menu .................................................................................................................................. 12
List Of Figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point.........................................................4

Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and
LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. ...........................................................................6
State Diagram for Line Recloser operation..........................................................................8
State Diagram for Normally Open Point ..............................................................................9
Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram .......................................................................10
LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV, Feeder
Recloser, Line Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations..........................................11

MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU
Setting:
Elem name -Setting
Setting value:
value
Alternatives:
[1st] [2nd] [3rd]
1.
Description Of Feature
1.1. Loss of Voltage (LOV) Automatic Restoration Element

This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. The
LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open
Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders, see
Figure 1, the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is
possible following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. The
resultant permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential
closure of the NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted
section. This sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly, restore the
power to healthy sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost
(CML) metric. LOV Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which, the normal
NOP having been closed, manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its
normal configuration. The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other
permanent fault(s) occurring, after the first-fault LOV automation sequence, depending on their location within the
system. However, if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be
considered.
Feeder 1
1A
Vabc
1B
Vabc
1C
Vabc
Vabc
NOP
(TIE)
Vxyz
Feeder 2
2A
Vabc
Figure 1
2B
Vabc
2C
Vabc
System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point
Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types:

Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state, the controller issues a trip then
subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points
along the feeder.
NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of
the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different, unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost.
Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV, followed by no further action to establish a new normally
open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence.
The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A, B & C on both Feeders will be closed as
shown in
Figure 1 and the NOP will be open. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream
sides and voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. It should be noted that Reclosers at
different points in the system are programmed to give the optimum, different, reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that
their response is not conditional on seeing fault current, only on detection of loss of voltage. An LOV sequence
starts to operate due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after
a persistent fault is isolated from the supply i.e. fault current no longer flows, following a complete but
unsuccessful autoreclose sequence. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source
side from the supply and from adjacent feeders by the NOP.
For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1- A section, the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a
sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that
1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.g. 1B to
1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is
initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. This is achieved as follows;- following the Lockout of the Source
Recloser/CB-1A, the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV), (this may also
have occurred temporarily, more than once during or for the whole, of the 1A recloser sequence).
1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in
each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay
e.g. 60 seconds, set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence, then their LOV Elements will each take
action and give a 3 pole Trip output, both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time.
The NOP, which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu, in example 1, will see LOV on its Feeder
1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side; if the NOPs LOV Element sees
permanent LOV on either side i.e. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 75 seconds to give a
grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at, for example, 60 seconds, then the NOP LOV
Element will take action and issue a NOP Close.
A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays
to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser.
For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip &
Lockout, thus, if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e.g. 5
seconds), on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the NOP close is
successful and no fault appears, the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode
must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the
Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1Cs LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. Note that the 1C
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if 1C closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C will Fast Protection
Trip and Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1C Line
Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to
Delayed for the Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1Bs LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. Note the 1B
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B will Fast Protection
Trip & Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1B
Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be
changed to Delayed for the Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check
Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections
backfed via the NOP.
As can be seen from the above, the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e.g. 5
seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line
Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast
Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout; this ensures that the Recloser
closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven, unfaulted,
sections energised. This mode of operation does impose a fault, which will be cleared by a single high-speed
Fast-Protection Trip, onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in as much of the System being
maintained in-service as possible.
If, following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation, a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on
one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed, then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i.e. the LOV
Automation time-allowed-to-live timer, the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout.
The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set
to a longer time, with grading margin > 5 secs, than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV
Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose, tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself
as necessary. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers, which will see fault current when the
last Recloser in the sequence closes, remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all
Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted.
Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they
must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy
sections. This co-ordinated grading, under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure, is achieved by
programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional, their settings in both directions can
be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or
NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed, Reverse directions.
LOV Element has two main outputs i.e. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to
the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs, it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix, all
other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes.
It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at
that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder, therefore, there must be a user-set
pecking order. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.g. 75 s - 80 s - 85 s,
ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply
is restored via a third path should the first or second, choice path not be available or fails, see Figure 2 .
LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds
S/STN 1
S/STN 2
85 s
1st
2nd
75 s
80 s
80 s
3rd
85 s
1st
2nd
75 s
85 s
75 s
80 s
3rd
85 s
1st
75 s
OFF
2nd
85 s
1st
2nd
Figure 2
75 s
80 s
Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay
timer grading margins.
Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting; Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ
selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting.
As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential first choice, a second choice and third
choice back-feed feeder, the user can set these independently to suit his system. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from
other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e.g. 85 second Action Delay time. NB the NOP LOV
Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that the User can select NOP LOV Close
so as to supply power in a single first required direction only, not a second.
The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder,
showing how the user can select the 1st, 2nd and 3rd choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. Other
arrangements can be set-up by User. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same
Action Delay time settings on both sides.
The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled, by the User setting and can be switched In/Out
dynamically via any Binary Inputs, LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General
Commands. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected.
For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence, only the
downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required.
Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the
downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. The controller monitors will
respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the A or
X side.
For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence, the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i.e. both
downstream and upstream voltages, must be monitored. Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary.
An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. The setting of the
Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing.
The LOV function is set to Out by default and must be switched In. The voltages and open/closed state of the
recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function In. A type Feeder or Recloser must be
Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides.
This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the primed staus is achieved. The device must
be in the primed state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed
Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. The
NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when
voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the
unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault.
The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of
voltage on any single phase. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole
tripping is permitted.
The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. When selected as Single mode, the
LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV
sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed
following a subsequent loss of voltage.
Figure 3
State Diagram for Line Recloser operation
Figure 4
LOV RECLAIM Time
LOV Fast Inhibit
LOV Reclaim Delay =

LOV Reclose Delay = 5s
mode Inst Line Check - after 5s
change to
Mode to Delayed Line Check
& Reclaim
If 3 LOV CLOSE Successful.

Mode = Delay Line Check
LOV RESET
LOV RESET
If 3 CLOSE
50 ms Check for
3 CB CLOSE
LOV Close
LOV Close Blocked Timer = 5 s
NOP close
initiation @
75 / 80s
3 Volts EXCLUSIVE OR i.e.

LLx & DLa OR DLx & LLa
LOV In-Progress
LOVa (DLa & LLx) Action Delay Time = 75 s
LOVx (LLa & DLx) Action Delay Time = 80 s
If Close NOT
Blocked or if Block
removed within 5
seconds proceed
BLOCK CLOSE
If Close Blocked NOT removed

within 5 seconds go to IDLE.
Alarm LOV Close Blocked
LOV RESET
LOV Reclose Delay = 5s

Reclose mode Fast Line Check.
Close only IF DLa & LLx
OR LLa & DLx is TRUE
If CB does not CLOSE go to IDLE.

Alarm LOV Close Failed
LOV RESET
If Exclusive OR 3 LOV i.e LLx & DLa OR DLx & Lla

3 LOV on one side only
If NOP OPEN and Exclusive OR does not remain True return.

i.e. If NOP OPEN and 3 Volts re-appear both sides i.e. LLa & LLx
OR DLa & DLx
NOP has been/is open AND 3

Phase Voltages have been present
on both sides, for more than 5s
DO Delay = 90s
50 ms Check for NOP OPEN

AND 3 Volts both sides
If NOP Trip and Lockout

go to IDLE.
Alarm LOV Failed
If NOP Open and 3 Volts

NOT present on one side i.e. if
either LLx & DLa OR DLx &
LLa NOT TRUE then return
after 90 Secs Drop-Off Delay
If NOP OPEN and 3 Volts present

on both sides for more than 5 secs
If LOV Reclaim Times out then Reset

the Line Check Trip i.e resume normal
operation & go to IDLE
ALARM _ LOV Successful
LOV RESET
IDLE
50 ms Check for NOP OPEN

AND 3 Volts on both sides
Normally Open Point LOV Automation State diagram
State Diagram for Normally Open Point
CB Closed
100%
LIVE LINE = 80%
Live Line / Dead Line

Hysteresis
DEAD LINE = 40%
0%
DEAD LINE
LIVE LINE
DEAD LINE
LIVE LINE
LIVE LINE (LL)
DEAD LINE (DL)
NOTE:- A Line is DEAD until it is LIVE and then LIVE until it is DEAD.
Figure 5
Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram
This state diagram shows how the Live Line / Dead Line states correctly mimic the response of a single electromechanical element with high Hysteresis. There can be no mythical third state, where a Line is neither Live nor
Dead, to cause confusion. The User settable limits allow a dead line with high levels of pick-up Voltage due to
mutual or capacitive coupling to remain correctly classified as a Dead Line i.e. one which can be reclosed without
requiring Check Synchronising. As can also be seen the state conditions are robust allowing for severe Voltage
dips caused by faults on a live line without losing the correct Live Line state indication.
1.2. Sequence Timing

T=0s
2Inst + 2Delayed DAR Sequence by Recloser which Clears Fault
LOV U/V Threshold setting
Possible Voltage patterns [offset slightly for clarity] as seen by Downstream

devices. Voltage level may be total 100% or pulsed Sags, as determined by
Fault Type, Location and Fault impedance
LOV Raised
Action Delay
Action Delay
Action Delay
Permanent LOV Raised

Action Delay
All LOV Reclosers + Feeder

Recloser open together
Feeder [new NOP(TIE)]
Recloser(s)
Feeder Recloser Trip&Lockout

to create new NOP
Restoration delay
= NOP Action Delay
+ 5*(NOP+N) s
Restoration of back-fed supply

to last healthy section
5s
Recloser N
(N-1)
x 5s
Nth Recloser LOV CLOSE.

Closes onto the fault and TRIPS &
LocksOut
Fast
LCT
Delayed
LCT
5s
5s
Normal Operation with

Directional settings
1st Recloser
LOV Close
Recloser 1
Fast
LCT
Recloser LOV Action Delay = 35 s

(for fault voltage < Live setting)
5s
Delayed LCT

5s
NOP [TIE]
Recloser LOV Action Delay =
35s
Closes
(for fault voltage > Live setting)
NOP LOV Action Delay = 40s
Normally Open Point (TIE)
Fast
LCT
Delayed LCT

5s
Assumed Maximum
Time for full sequence
= 30 secs
In Progress timer
Permanent LOV
Raised
Figure 6
LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV, Feeder Recloser, Line
Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations.
Examples of LOV Automation Sequence Timing.

In the worst case, the LOV timing will not start until after the full multi-shot autoreclose sequence has completed
due to restoration of full voltage during the recloses onto the fault. i.e. full 30 seconds sequence, a Recloser
Action Delay of 35 secs, a NOP action time setting of 40 seconds and two Reclosers to the fault position, each
with 5 seconds Reclose Delay, the total time from first Fault-current inception to restoration of supply to the final
healthy section = 30+35+5+5 =75 seconds.
In many cases the fault voltage may remain below the Dead setting due to the low fault impedance throughout the
auto sequence. The LOV timing will therefore execute during the autoreclose sequence and the LOV action will
be sooner.
If the permanent LOV occurs earlier due to a shorter AutoReclose sequence, say 2 Fast + 1 Delayed =15 s, and
with Recloser Action Delay of 35 seconds, a NOP action delay reduced to 36 seconds and Reclose Delay
reduced to 2 seconds, then the total time = 15+36+2 = 53 s this is well below 60 s and would not count as an
Interruption, therefore, the CML metric would not be increased. The majority of LOV Automation sequences could
thus not count as Interruptions.
2.
LOV Automation Menu
Gn LOV-A Live
Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live.
Gn LOV-A Dead
Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead.
Gn LOV-X Live
Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live.
Gn LOV-X Dead
Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead.
Gn LOV Automation
Selects whether the LOV Automation Element is enabled.
Gn LOV Plant Device Type
Selects the appropriate functionality for the type of device.
Gn LOV Start Option
Selects either 3P or Any pole dead for LOV starting.
Gn Primed Interlock
Allows the voltage check for correct Live voltage before allowing LOV to be
switched In, to be disabled.
Gn LOV Primed Time
Time that the primed condition of correct open/closed state and live voltage
has to be present for before the LOV Automation is classed as primed.
Gn LOV Recloser Opening
Select if a Recloser Type should open after LOV and reclose once voltage is
restored or stay closed whilst waiting for voltage to be restored.
Gn LOV Action Delay
After Loss of Voltage for this length of time with the device in a primed state,
the LOV Action starts. (Recloser & Feeder).
Gn LOV-A Action
Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the A Side.
Gn LOV-A Action Delay
After the Loss of Voltage on the A Side for this length of time with the device
in a primed state, the LOV action starts. (NOP).
Gn LOV-X Action
Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the X Side.
Gn LOV-X Action Delay
After the Loss of Voltage on the X Side for this length of time with the device
in a primed state, the LOV action starts. (NOP)
Gn LOV Sequence Time
Maximum time allowed after LOV Action Delay for a Recloser type to wait for
Voltage to reappear.
Gn LOV Reclose Delay
When Gn LOV Recloser Opening is Enabled, the voltage must be reestablished for this length of time before the Recloser will close.
Gn LOV SOTF Time
For this length of time after a recloser has been closed, due to an LOV
Automation operation, all Instantaneous protections will be allowed to operate.
Gn LOV Reclaim Time
For this length of time after the Gn LOV SOTF Time all Instantaneous
protections will be inhibited.
Gn LOV Memory Time
Length of time that NOP will remain primed for after losing voltage on both
sides.
Gn LOV Operation
Selects whether the element must be switched In again to allow another LOV
operation following a successful LOV Automation operation.
7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple)

Overcurrent Relay

2008/11
First draft
2009/09
First Issue. Software version updated
2010/04
Third Issue. Software version updated
2010/05
Fourth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand
2012/09
Software version updated
2012/12

2008/10
2435H80011-R4-3
First issue with Single/Triple Autoreclose function
2009/09
2435H80011-R4c-3b
Maintenance Release without change to this function
2010/04
2435H80011-R4d-4
Phase allocation and sequence, no change to this function
2012/09
2435H85010-R7b-7a
IEC 61850 introduced, no change to the LOV function
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
2012 Siemens Protection Devices Limited.
Contents
Document Release History.................................................................................................................................... 1
Software Revision History .................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 1: Description of Feature......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Single Triple Autoreclose ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.1
Mode A 3P Trip 3P LO ........................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2
Mode B 1P Trip 3P LO ........................................................................................................... 5
1.1.3
Mode C 1P Trip 1P LO........................................................................................................... 7
List of Tables
Table 1
Table 2
Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single / three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic...................................................................................... 6
Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic............................................................................... 8
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser.................................................................................. 4

MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU
Setting:
Elem name -Setting
Setting value:
value
Alternatives:
[1st] [2nd] [3rd]
Section 1: Description of Feature

1.1
Single Triple Autoreclose
This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements.
Three pole commands and controls available in the standard controller are replaced by pole segregated inputs.
Operations counters, Circuit Breaker Fail and I2T functions are available on a pole by pole basis, these replace
the standard functionality.
The capacitor test function which is used to test the condition of the capacitor network is duplicated in the
Single/Triple recloser to provide extended functionality for monitoring of the additional capacitor networks to suit
phase segregated Recloser mechanisms. The three capacitor networks are tested simultaneously.
In a system where the three phases of the supply are used independently to provide single phase to neutral
connected loads, the three phases of the Recloser can be tripped and reclosed separately to produce less
interruption to the unfaulted phases and to provide better co-ordination with single phase devices fitted
downstream. This function allows the asynchronous reclosing sequences in the three phases to be controlled by a
single controller device at the point where the three independent single phase reclosers are adjacent, i.e. before
the split point. The controller provides phase segregated protection elements as well as elements such as earth
fault for which the phase selection is not clearly defined. The controller provides logic and settings to allow trip
and reclose of different phase combinations to provide the fastest clearance of faults with minimum system
disruption. Standard 3 pole tripping elements such as voltage elements can be configured to start or lockout the
autoreclose function using quicklogic, virtual I/O and the external AR start input to suit operational requirements.
The practice of single phase HV distribution systems is commonly used in some countries, particularly in rural
areas where loading is light.
Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser
The Single/Triple controller has three modes of operation and operation mode can be changed by settings and
relay inputs. This means that the response to a fault can be variable to suit system requirements.
Mode A, 3P Trip 3P LO, allows only three pole tripping and 3 poles are tripped regardless of the fault type, Three
pole Autoreclose can be set to execute for any protection element. The Lockout state applies to all poles. This
allows the recloser to operate as a standard three pole device.
Mode B, 1P Trip 3P LO, allows 1P trips for faults diagnosed as affecting only 1 phase and generated from
elements which will start an autoreclose sequence. For faults detected by these protection elements which are
diagnosed as affecting more than one phase, three pole trips are issued and three pole autoreclose is executed.
Three pole trips are therefore issued for all fault detections for which single pole autoreclose will not return the
recloser to the three poles closed state. Lockout is a three pole condition and logic in the controller ensures that in
this Mode the recloser is never left in a single pole open condition for an extended period. A single pole reclose
sequence in progress will be converted to three pole reclose or terminated by Lockout by the generation of a
three pole trip if a simultaneous fault or fail to reclose occurs.
Mode C, 1P Trip 1P LO, allows the three poles of the recloser to operate independently for fault detections which
are diagnosed as affecting a single pole only. The Lockout condition on one phase, resulting from a non-reclosing
protection element operation or failure to reclose during a sequence, is independent of the other poles. Single or
two pole Lockout and the accompanying single or two pole open condition is allowed to exist indefinitely and does
not affect the autoreclose sequences subsequently applied to the other pole(s). Fault detections which are
diagnosed as affecting more than one pole will trip and reclose the affected two or three poles.
If Single pole Trip is allowable then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single
pole Circuit Breaker. In some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole
device. Each Recloser has its own Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed Auxiliary contacts. Each Recloser has
its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle. Each Recloser also has its own external push button switches to provide
local electrical Trip/Close input signals. The I/O matrices and the internal logic of the Single/Triple Controller is
extended, compared to the standard Controller, to include interfaces to suit this additional functionality. The
Controller provides logic and interlocking to ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes.
The controller provides three independent autoreclose elements whose operations are automatically internally
linked and sequences synchronized as applicable to suit the setting selections, type of fault applied and progress
of sequences. Each pole has independent shot counters which are used to select the required deadtime and
control the application of Instantaneous Element Blocks on a pole by pole basis to achieve co-ordination with
other single pole devices in the system.
1.1.1
Mode A 3P Trip 3P LO
Mode A allows the three single pole Reclosers to operate in three pole mode as a standard three pole Recloser.
Protection elements operations are issued to all of the pole segregated trip outputs simultaneously and all
autoreclose sequences are three pole. If any pole goes to Lockout for CB Fail to Close, a three pole trip and
lockout is issued
All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller
are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a Open CB A command will open only pole A when
the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is
set to Mode A.
Although the tripping logic and control functions operate in three pole mode, the operations counters are still
executed on a pole by pole basis. This allows the correct co-ordination with single pole reclose equipment
downstream. Separate counts are recorded for each phase for Phase fault High set and Delayed trips and
checked against the Number of Trips to Lockout settings. The Protection Trip counter which is used to inhibit
Instantaneous protection during Delayed shots is common for all phases and Earth Faults.
1.1.2
Mode B 1P Trip 3P LO
Mode B provides single pole tripping and reclose to minimize disruption to load connected on the unfaulted
phases in a three phase system. Mode B will only allow single pole trips to be issued if autoreclose follows, to
return the recloser to a normal 3 poles closed condition. This mode should be used on a 3 phase system where it
is undesirable to allow the system to have a single pole open for any extended period of time but where a
transient single pole open condition during autoreclose can minimize disruption to supply on the unfaulted
phases.
The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip.
Single pole tripping is not allowed if Autoreclose is disabled or switched out. Single Pole tripping is only allowed if
the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which are operated by residual current cannot
discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these elements must be used in conjunction with
phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole tripping.
Two phase tripping is never allowed in Mode B. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a
three pole trip. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead time,
the controller will force a three pole trip of the recloser which may be followed by a three pole reclose.
If a single pole autoreclose is not successful, when Lockout is reached, the controller will force a three pole trip of
the recloser.
The External Trip input is assumed to have caused a three pole trip and will start a three pole reclose sequence.
All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller
are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a Open CB-A command will open only pole A when
the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is
set to Mode B.
The Line Check & Hot Line working functions prevent autoreclose from executing and therefore these functions
also force any affected trip to be three pole only.
The table below shows the single/three pole tripping decision logic:
State
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
SEF|E/F|PF
Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
A79Prime
Lockout=True
B79Prime
Lockout=True
C79Prime
Lockout=True
External Trip
Non ARC
Table 1
Supplementary Starter State Data

No other Starters or Outputs raised
E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs
raised
Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised
Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output Raised
Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State i.e. Trip
due to second pole while first is in Dead time
SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised
Any other P/F starter or Output raised
Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout
Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout
Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole
Trip & Lockout
S/T ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
Three pole Trip & Lockout
Any pole Trip & Lockout Command
3PTrip & Lockout
The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE

X Dont Care
3P ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC as per
settings / mapping
3PTrip & Reclose
3PTrip & Lockout
3P Trip & Reclose Command

Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage /
Frequency [unless mapped to External ARC Start]
Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single / three
pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic.
1.1.3
Mode C 1P Trip 1P LO
Mode C provides phase segregated control of three independent single pole reclosers. Operation of the single
pole reclosers can be synchronized to suit the applied fault to provide the correct clearance sequence whilst
retaining the ability to provide independent single pole sequences running concurrently for separate coincident
faults on different poles.
Any pole can reach the Lockout state due to a persistent fault or a failure of plant. This results in a single pole
open condition which will remain until manual action is taken to restore. The operation of the controller for
subsequent faults on the other phases is not affected by the Open or Lockout state on the previously faulted
phase.
During coincident, independent autoreclose sequences on two or three phases, the issue of the independent
close pulses is aligned so that if the fault is actually multi-phase and persistent, Close Onto Fault and the start of
subsequent Deadtimes are aligned. This avoids the possible scenario where the fault duration is extended by
passing fault from one phase to another by re-energising a second phase with ionization still in the vicinity from
Close onto Fault of the first pole to reclose.
Independent sequence counters are incorporated for each pole. The number of shots to Lockout are counted
separately on each pole, for High set, Delayed and total number of shots. This means that if faults are detected
on two or more phases simultaneously, during an autoreclose sequence that was already In Progress on one
phase, the controller may be executing shot 1 for one pole whilst on shot 2 for another. One Pole may actually
count to Lockout before the other, which will continue with further shots and also whilst one pole blocks
instantaneous protection to go to Delayed protection only, the other phase will continue to operate with
Instantaneous protection unblocked. This is correct operation and allows the single pole reclosers to retain correct
co-ordination with other single pole devices in the system.
In Mode C the controller handles Manual Open and Close commands to the three single pole Reclosers on an
individual pole basis. For example Open CB-A and Close CB-A do not affect poles B or C. Similarly the Trip and
Lockout inputs are provided for each pole separately but Trip and Reclose is provided as a three pole function
only. The External Trip function is provided as a three pole function only.
The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip.
Single Pole tripping is only allowed if the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which
are operated by residual current cannot discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these
elements must be used in conjunction with phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole
tripping.
Two phase tripping is allowed in Mode C. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a trip of
the affected phases. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead
time, the controller will issue a single pole trip of the second pole of the recloser which will be followed by a single
pole reclose of this pole also. The Close Pulses to the two poles will be aligned
If a single pole autoreclose is not successful and Lockout is reached, this applies to the affected pole only. The
controller will not force a three pole trip of the recloser.
State
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
SEF Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op
Supplementary Starter State Data

E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs raised
Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised
Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
SEF Starter or Output Raised
Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised
AND one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State
State i.e. Trip due to second pole while first is in Dead time
AND one pole in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State AND Pole X
Starter or Output raised i.e. Trip due to second pole to Ground
fault while first pole is in Dead time
AND one pole X already in Lockout state
AND two poles X & Y already in Lockout state
SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised
One other Pole Y P/F starter or Output raised
AND 1|2 poles Y & Z already in Lockout state [dont care]
Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole A Trip &
Lockout
Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole B Trip &
Lockout
Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole C Trip
& Lockout
3PTrip & 3PARC

3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PXYTrip & 2PXYARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
Single pole A Trip
Lockout
Single pole B Trip
Lockout
Single pole C Trip
Lockout
Single Pole Trip & Lockout command
1PTrip & 1P Lockout
External Trip
The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE

X dont Care
Non
ARC
Config Protn
3P Trip & Reclose command

Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage / Frequency
[unless mapped to External ARC Start]
3P ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC as per
settings / mapping
3PTrip + 3PARC
3PTrip
SEF|E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op
SEF|E/F Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
Pole X Op
A79Prime
Lockout=True
B79Prime
Lockout=True
C79Prime
Lockout=True
Table 2
S/T ACTION
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
3PTrip & 3PARC
1PXTrip & 1PXARC
&
&
&
Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the
Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic.
7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Overcurrent Relay

This document is issue 2012/12 The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2008/03
First issue
2008/06
Second issue
2009/02
Third issue. Single Triple Autoreclose added.
2009/09
Fourth Issue. Software version R4c-3b added & optional RS485/RS232 comms.
2010/04
Fifth Issue. Software version updated
2010/05
Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand
2010/09
Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol.
2012/09
Eighth Issue. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol & minor description changes.
2012/12

2008/03
2435H80011R2d-1a
First Release
2008/11
2435H80011R3d-2b
Loss of Voltage
2008/11
2435H80011R4-3
Single /Triple Autoreclose Function
2009/09
2435H80011R4c-3b
First Release. Maintenance Release
2010/04
2435H80011R4d-4
Check Synchronising, Phase allocation and sequence
2010/09
2435H80011R4f-4b
2012/09
2435H85010R7b-7a
IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Relay Menus And Display ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Operation Guide...................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1
User Interface Operation........................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Settings Display ...................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Instruments Mode ................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Fault Data Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Control Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 8
Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution ............................................................................................. 9
2.1 Physical Connection................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.1
Front USB connection ............................................................................................................... 9
2.1.2
Rear RS485 connection .......................................................................................................... 10
2.1.3
Optional rear fibre optic connection ........................................................................................ 10
2.1.4
Optional Rear RS232 connection............................................................................................ 11
2.1.5
Configuring Relay Data Communication ................................................................................. 11
2.1.6
Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp ...................................................................................... 15
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Menu ....................................................................................................................................3
Figure 1.1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol .......................................................................................................3
Figure 1.1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from
illustration)............................................................................................................................4
Figure 1.2-4 Relay Identifier Screen ........................................................................................................5
Figure 1.2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version)............................6
Figure 2.1.1-1 USB connection to PC ......................................................................................................9
Figure 2.1.2-1 RS485 connection to PC ................................................................................................10
Figure 2.1.3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC .........................................................................................10
Figure 2.1.4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC .....................................................................................11
Figure 2.1.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection................................................................................................15
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R2d-1a

Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4-3
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R3d-2b
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4c-3b
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4d-4
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4f-4b
Relay Settings. Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a
APPENDIX
Relay Instrumentation. Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a
1.1
Relay Menus And Display
All relay fascias contain the same access keys although the fascias may differ in appearance from model to
model. The basic menu structure is also the same in all products and consists of four main menus, these being,
Settings Mode - allows the user to view and (if allowed via the settings mode password) change user settings in
the relay from the fascia.
Instruments Mode - allows the user to view the relay meters e.g. current, voltage etc. and configure favourite
instrument views which will cycle on the lcd automatically when the relay is unattended.
Fault Data Mode - allows the user to view the type and data of any protection operation of the relay.
Control Mode - allows the user to control external plant under the relays control for example the CB (if allowed
via the control mode password)
The menus can be viewed via the LCD by pressing the access keys as below,
Figure 1.1-1 Menu
Pressing CANCEL returns to the Identifier screen

LCD Contrast
To change the contrast on the LCD insert a flat nosed screwdriver into the screwhead below the contrast symbol,
turning the screwhead decreases or increases the contrast of the LCD.
Figure 1.1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol
Figure 1.1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from illustration)
1.2
Operation Guide
1.2.1 User Interface Operation

The basic menu structure flow diagram is shown in Figure 1.2-5. This diagram shows the main modes of display:
Settings Mode, Instrument Mode, Fault Data Mode and Control Mode.
When the relay leaves the factory all data storage areas are cleared and the settings set to default as specified in
settings document.
When the relay is first energised the user is presented with the following message: 7SR224
_______________________________
ENTER to CONTROL
Figure 1.2-4 Relay Identifier Screen
On the factory default setup the relay LCD should display the relay identifier, on each subsequent power-on the
screen that was showing before the last power-off will be displayed.
The push-buttons on the fascia are used to display and edit the relay settings via the LCD, to display and activate
the control segment of the relay, to display the relays instrumentation and Fault data and to reset the output
relays and LEDs.
The five push-buttons have the following functions:
READ DOWN
READ UP
Used to navigate the menu structure.
ENTER
The ENTER push-button is used to initiate and accept setting changes.
When a setting is displayed pressing the ENTER key will enter the edit mode, the setting will flash and can now
be changed using the READ UP or READ DOWN buttons. When the required value is displayed the
ENTER button is pressed again to accept the change.
When an instrument is displayed pressing ENTER will toggle the instruments favourite screen status.
CANCEL
This push-button is used to return the relay display to its initial status or one level up in the menu structure.
Pressed repeatedly will return to the Relay Identifier screen. It is also used to reject any alterations to a setting
while in the edit mode.
TEST/RESET
This push-button is used to reset the fault indication on the fascia. When on the Relay Identifier screen it also
acts as a lamp test button, when pressed all LEDs will momentarily light up to indicate their correct operation. It is
also moves the cursor right when navigating through menus and settings.
Figure 1.2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version)
1.3
Settings Display
The Settings Mode is reached by pressing the READ DOWN button from the relay identifier screen.
Once the Settings Mode title screen has been located pressing the READ DOWN button takes the user into
the Settings mode sub-menus.
Each sub-menu contains the programmable settings of the relay in separate logical groups. The sub menus are
accessed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Pressing the READ DOWN button will scroll through the
settings, after the last setting in each sub menu is reached the next sub menu will be displayed. If a particular sub
menu is not required to be viewed then pressing READ DOWN will move directly to the next one in the list.
While a setting is being displayed on the screen the ENTER button can be pressed to edit the setting value. If the
relay is setting password protected the user will be asked to enter the password. If an incorrect password is
entered editing will not be permitted. All screens can be viewed even if the password is not known.
While a setting is being edited flashing characters indicate the edit field. Pressing the READ UP or READ
DOWN buttons will display the valid field values. If these buttons are pressed and held, the rate of scrolling will
increase.
Once editing is complete pressing the ENTER button stores the new setting into the non-volatile memory. The
setting change is effective immediately unless any protection element is operating, in which case the change
becomes effective when no elements are operating.
Configuration and inspection of communications protocol data objects, text used for display in international
languages, graphical user logic and programming of user specific custom protection characteristics is not
possible from the fascia and pc based tools must be used if required.
NB: The Settings Display may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the
manual for relevant software version.
1.4
Instruments Mode
The Instrument Mode sub-menu displays key quantities and information to aid with commissioning. The following
meters are available and are navigated around by using the READ UP , READ DOWN and TEST/REST
buttons.
NB: The Instruments Mode may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the
manual for relevant software version.
1.5
Fault Data Mode
The Fault Data Mode sub menu lists the time and date of the previous ten protection operations. The stored data
about each fault can be viewed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Each record contains data on the
operated elements, analogue values and LED flag states at the time of the fault. The data is viewed by scrolling
down using the READ DOWN button.
1.6
Control Mode
This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items
listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The TEST/RESET button is used to
toggle between the available options. The user is prompted to confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER
key, before the command is executed. If the action is not confirmed within a short time the action is automatically
cancelled.
Control Mode commands can be password protected by using the Control Password function
Commands available in the Control Mode are:
CB: Open or CB: Close
AR: In Service or AR: Out of Service
AR: Trip and Reclose
AR: Trip & Lockout
Hotline Working: In or Hotline Working: Out
E/F Protection: In or E/F Protection: Out
SEF Protection: In or SEF Protection: Out
Inst Protection: In or Inst Protection: Out
Battery Test
Set Local Mode
Set Local or Remote Mode
Set Remote Mode
Set Service Mode
Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution

Reydisp Evolution software provides a pc tool which can be used for programming of protection configuration and
settings and the mapping of hardware input and outputs using a graphical interface. It is supplied with additional
tools for configuration of serial communication protocol data objects, configuration of text for international
language support and programming of user specific time current curves. To configure the relay using a serial
communication port the user will need the following:PC with Reydisp Evolution Installed. (This can be download from our website www.siemens.com/energy and
found under the submenu Software) This software requires windows 2000-service pack 4 or above, or windows
XP with service pack 2 or above.
Configuration and download of IEC 61850 data and programming of graphical user logic requires the use of the
Reydisp Manager software which is supplied with online instructions and help and is not documented here.
2.1
Physical Connection
The relay can be connected to Reydisp via any of the communication ports on the relay. Suitable communication
Interface cable and converters are required depending which port is being used.
2.1.1
Front USB connection
To connect your pc locally via the front USB port.
Figure 2.1.1-1 USB connection to PC
2.1.2
Rear RS485 connection
Figure 2.1.2-1 RS485 connection to PC
2.1.3
Optional rear fibre optic connection
Figure 2.1.3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC

Sigma devices have a 25 pin female D connector with the following pin out.
Pin
Description
Function
2
3
4
Transmit Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Transmit Data
Received Data
Loop to pin 5
5
6
Clear to Send
Data set ready
Loop to pin 4
+5 V (2)
7
8
Signal Ground
Received Line Signal Detector
Signal Ground
+5 V (2)
20
Data Terminal Ready
+5 V (2)
Shield
Signal Ground
Aux Power
+5 V
2.1.4
Optional Rear RS232 connection
Figure 2.1.4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC

The optional RS232 port is a 9 pin male D connector with the following pin out.
Pin
Description
Function
1
2
Received Line Signal Detector

Received Data
No Connection
Received Data
3
4
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Transmit Data
+5 V
5
6
Signal Ground
Data set ready
Signal Ground
+5 V
7
8
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Loop to pin 8
Loop to pin 7
Ring indicator
+5 V
2.1.5
Configuring Relay Data Communication
Using the keys on the relay fascia scroll down the settings menus into the communications menu and change
the settings for the communication port used on the relay. All of the below settings may not be available in all
relay types. Reydisp software uses IEC60870-5-103 protocol to communicate.
COM1-RS485 Port
COM2-USB Port
COM3 Optional Fibre Optic, RS485 or RS232
COM4 Optional Fibre Optic
Setting name
Range
COM1-RS485 Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
IEC60870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or
103
IEC60870-5-101
COM1-RS485 Station
Address
1 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101

0 247 for Modbus RTU
Default
0 65534 for DNP3.0
COM1-RS485 Baud
Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
38400
19200
COM1-RS485 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN
EVEN
COM1-RS485 Mode
Local,Remote, Local or
Remote
Remote
COM2-USB Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, ASCII,
DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5101
IEC60870-5103
COM1-RS485 Mode
Remote
Local
COM3 Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
IEC6-0870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or
103
IEC60870-5-101
1 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101
COM3- Station Address 0 247 for Modbus RTU
0 65534 for DNP3.0
COM3 Baud Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 57600 115200
57600
COM3 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN
EVEN
COM3 Line Idle
LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF
LIGHT OFF
COM3 Data echo
ON, OFF
OFF
COM3-RS485 Mode
Remote
Remote
COM4 Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or OFF
IEC60870-5-101
1 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101
COM4- Station Address 0 247 for Modbus RTU

0 65534 for DNP3.0
Units
Notes
COM1 is the rear mounted
RS485 port
Address given to relay to
identify that relay from
others which may be using
the same path for
communication as other
relays for example in a fibre
optic hub
COM2 is the front USB port.
COM3 This is an optional

rear mounted optional
connection
the same path for
optic hub
COM4 This is an optional

rear mounted optional
connection
the same path for
optic hub
Setting name
Range
Default
COM4 Baud Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
38400
19200
COM4 Parity
NONE, OFF, EVEN
EVEN
COM4 Line Idle
LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF
LIGHT OFF
COM4 Data echo
ON, OFF
OFF
COM1-RS485 Mode
Remote
Remote
Unsolicited Mode
DISABLED ENABLED
DISABLED
Setting is only visible when

a port Protocol is set to
DNP3
Destination Address
0 65534

DNP3
DNP3 Application
Timeout
5, 6 ... 299, 300
10s
I101 Link Mode
Balanced, Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Not Present, 1 Octet, 2

I101 Link Address Field Octets
1 Octet
I101 Common Address

of ASDU
1 Octet, 2 Octets
2 Octet
I101 Cause of Trans

(COT)
1 Octet, 2 Octets
1 Octet
Units
Seconds
Notes

DNP3
Balanced transmission is
used for point to point
connection to one device.
The controlled station
(slave) may send link
messages at any time.
Unbalanced transmission
is used for multi-drop
connection, e.g. RS485,
to one or more devices.
The controlling station
(master) send class 1
and 2 polls to each slave
station.
Size of link address in
octets.
Not Present Only used
with balanced
transmission.
1 octet address range 0
254
2 octets address range 0
- 65534
Size of common address
in octets.
254
- 65534
Size of cause of
transmission in octets.
1 octet COT code
2 octets COT code +
originator address or 0.
Setting name
Range
Default
Units
I101 Info Obj Add (IOA)
1 Octet, 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octet
I101 ASDU Address
0 .. 65535
I101 Cyclic Period
Off, 1 ..3600 seconds
60 Seconds
Seconds
I101 Background
Period
Off, 1 ..1500 minutes
Off
Minutes
Notes
Size of Info Object

address in octets.
255
65535
3 octets used to generate
structured address
format.
Address to use to identify
ASDU layer
Period device will
generate cyclic data. Set
to Off to disable
generating of cyclic data.
Only data points with the
cyclic flag set will be
generated cyclically.
Period device will
generate background
data. Set to Off to disable
generating of background
data. Only data points
with the background flag
set will be generated in
the background.
NB: The Data Communication Configuration may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to
this section of the manual for relevant software version.
2.1.6
Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp
When Reydisp Evolution software is running all available communication ports of the PC will automatically be
detected.
On the start page tool bar open up the sub-menu File > Connect.
The Communication Manager window will display all available communication ports. With the preferred port
highlighted, select the Properties option and ensure the baud rate and parity match that selected in the relay
Data Comms settings. Select Connect to initiate the relay-PC connection.
Figure 2.1.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection

Via the Relay > Set Address > Address set the relay address (1-254) or alternatively search for connected
devices using the Relay > Set Address > Device Map. The relay can now be configured using the Reydisp
software. Please refer to the Reydisp Evolution Manual for further guidance.
7SR224 Argus Instrumentation App. R7c-7a

Overcurrent Relay

2012/12
First issue

2012/12
2435H85010 R7c-7a
Page 1 of 16
Contents
Document Release History ......................................................................................................................................1
Software Revision History ........................................................................................................................................1
1. Relay Instrumentation ........................................................................................................................................3
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
1.10.
1.11.
1.12.
1.13.
1.14.
1.15.
1.16.
1.17.
1.18.
1.19.
1.20.
1.21.
1.22.
1.23.
1.24.
1.25.
Favourite Meters .....................................................................................................................................3

Current Meters ........................................................................................................................................3
Voltage Meters ........................................................................................................................................4
Frequency Meters ...................................................................................................................................4
Power Meters ..........................................................................................................................................6
Energy Meters.........................................................................................................................................6
Wattmetric Meters ...................................................................................................................................6
Directional Meters ...................................................................................................................................7
Thermal Meters .......................................................................................................................................7
Single-Triple Meters ................................................................................................................................7
Auto-Reclose Meters...............................................................................................................................8
Synchronising Meters..............................................................................................................................8
Loss of Voltage Meters ...........................................................................................................................8
Maintenance Meters................................................................................................................................9
General Alarm Meters ...........................................................................................................................11
Battery Condition Meters.......................................................................................................................11
Capacitor condition Meters ...................................................................................................................11
Power Quality Meters ............................................................................................................................12
Demand Meters.....................................................................................................................................12
Binary Input Meters ...............................................................................................................................14
Binary Output Meters ............................................................................................................................14
Virtual Meters ........................................................................................................................................14
Communication Meters .........................................................................................................................15
Miscellaneous Meters ...........................................................................................................................16
Quick Logic Meters ...............................................................................................................................16
Page 2 of 16
1. Relay Instrumentation
1.1. Favourite Meters
Instrument
Description
-------------------FAVOURITE METERS
> to view
This allows the user to view his previously constructed list of favourite
meters by pressing TEST/RESET button and the READ DOWN button to
scroll though the meters added to this sub-group
To construct a sub-group of favourite meters, first go to the desired meter
then press ENTER this will cause a message to appear on the LCD Add To
Favourites YES pressing ENTER again will add this to the FAVOURITE
METERS Sub-menu. To remove a meter from the FAVOURITE METERS
sub-menu go to that meter each in the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu or
at its Primary location press ENTER and the message Remove From
Favourites will appear press ENTER again and this meter will be removed
from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-group
1.2. Current Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------CURRENT METERS
> to view
--------------------
This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with
Current TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Primary Current
Ia
0.00A
Ib
0.00A
Ic
0.00A
Secondary Current
Ia
0.00A
Ib
0.00A
Ic
0.00A
Nom Current
Ia
0.00xIn ----o
Ib
0.00xIn ----o
Ic
0.00xIn ----o
Pri Earth Current
In
0.000A
Ig
0.000A
Isef
0.000A
Sec Earth Current
In
0.000A
Ig
0.000A
Isef
0.000A
Nom Earth Current
In
0.000xIn ----o
Ig
0.000xIn ----o
Isef
0.000xIn ----o
I Seq Components
Izps
0.00xIn ----o
Ipps
0.00xIn ----o
Inps
0.00xIn ----o
2nd Harmonic Current
Ia
0.00xIn
Displays the 3 phase currents Primary RMS values
Displays the 3 phase currents Secondary RMS values
Displays the 3 phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with
respect to PPS current.
Displays the 3 Earth currents Primary RMS values
Displays the 3 Earth currents Secondary RMS values
Displays the 3 Earth currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with
respect to PPS current.
Displays the Current Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase
angles with respect to PPS current.
nd
Displays the 3 phase currents 2 Harmonic components Nominal RMS

values.
Page 3 of 16
Instrument
Ib
0.00xIn
Ic
0.00xIn
Last Trip current
Ia
0.00 A
Ib
0.00 A
Ic
0.00 A
Last Trip current
Ig
0.00 A
Description
Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation for the 3
phase currents
Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation .for the
measured earth current
1.3. Voltage Meters

-------------------VOLTAGE METERS
> to view
-------------------Prim Ph-Ph Voltage
Vab
0.00V
Vbc
0.00V
Vca
0.00V
Sec Ph-Ph Voltage
Vab
0.00V
Vbc
0.00V
Vca
0.00V
Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage
Vab
0.00xVn ----o
Vbc
0.00xVn ----o
Vca
0.00xVn ----o
Prim Ph-N Voltage
Va
0.00V
Vb
0.00V
Vc
0.00V
Sec Ph-N Voltage
Va
0.00V
Vb
0.00V
Vc
0.00V
Nom Ph-N Voltage
Va
0.00xVn ----o
Vb
0.00xVn ----o
Vc
0.00xVn ----o
V Seq Components
Izps
0.00V ----o
Ipps
0.00V ----o
Inps
0.00V ----o
Calc Earth Voltage
Pri
0.00V
Sec
0.00V ----o
Prim Ph-Ph Voltage
Vxy
0.00V
Vyz
0.00V
Vzx
0.00V
Sec Ph-Ph Voltage
Vxy
0.00V
Voltage TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles
with respect to PPS voltage.
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles
with respect to PPS voltage.
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values
Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase
angles with respect to PPS voltage.
Displays the calculated Earth voltage both primary and secondary which
also shows the secondary angle
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side
voltage inputs on 6VT models only.
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles
Page 4 of 16
Vyz
0.00V
Vzx
0.00V
Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage
Vxy
0.00xVn ----o
Vyz
0.00xVn ----o
Vzx
0.00xVn ----o
Prim Ph-N Voltage
Va
0.00V
Vb
0.00V
Vc
0.00V
Sec Ph-N Voltage
Vx
0.00V
Vy
0.00V
Vz
0.00V
Nom Ph-N Voltage
Vx
0.00xVn ----o
Vy
0.00xVn ----o
Vz
0.00xVn ----o
XYZ V Seq Components
Izps
0.00V ----o
Ipps
0.00V ----o
Inps
0.00V ----o
Last Trip Voltage
Va
0.00V
Vb
0.00V
Vc
0.00V
CS/NVD Voltage (Vx)
Pri
0.00V
Sec
0.00V ----o
with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs
Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz side
voltage inputs on 6VT models only.
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side
voltage inputs
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles
with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models
only.
Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz
side voltage inputs on 6VT models only.
Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase
angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT
models only.
Displays the voltages recorded for the most recent trip operation
Displays the 4th voltage (Vx) for the 4x VT models, both primary and
secondary which also shows the phase angle. This voltage can be used for
NVD, Vx 27/59 or where available Checksync.
1.4. Frequency Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------FREQUENCY METERS
> to view
--------------------
Frequency TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Frequency
0.000Hz
Displays the power system frequency.
Page 5 of 16
1.5. Power Meters

Instrument
-------------------POWER METERS
> to view
-------------------Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
P (3P)
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Q (3P)
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
S (3P)
PF A
PF B
PF C
PF (3P)
Description
Power TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
0.0W
0.0W
0.0W
0.0W
0.0VAr
0.0VAr
0.0VAr
0.0VAr
0.0VA
0.0VA
0.0VA
0.0VA
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Displays Real Power
Displays Reactive Power
Displays Apparent Power
Displays Power factor
1.6. Energy Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------ENERGY METERS
> to view
-------------------Active Energy
Exp 000000x10kWh
Imp 000000x10kWh
Reactive Energy
Exp 000000x10kVArh
Imp 000000x10kVArh
Energy TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Displays both imported and exported Active Energy
Displays both imported and exported Reactive Energy
1.7. Wattmetric Meters

Instrument
-------------------WATTMETRIC
> to view
-------------------IresR
Pres
IresR Angle
Io-Vo Angle
Description
the Wattmetric function TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
0.000A
0.00W
0.0deg
0.0deg
Displays the values of the Real component of residual current, the residual
real power, the phase of the residual current.
Page 6 of 16
1.8. Directional Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------DIRECTIONAL METERS
> to view
-------------------P/F Dir (67)
-------------------No Dir
Calc E/F Dir (67N)
--------------------
Directional elements TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group.
The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed.

No Dir, PhA Fwd, PhA Rev, PhB Fwd, PhB Rev, PhC Fwd, PhC Rev
No Dir
Meas E/F Dir (67G)
--------------------
No Dir, E/F Fwd, E/F Rev

No Dir
SEF Dir (67SEF)
--------------------
No Dir, E/F Fwd, E/F Rev

No Dir
No Dir, SEF Fwd, SEF Rev
1.9. Thermal Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------THERMAL METERS
> to view
Thermal TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Thermal Status
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
Displays the thermal capacity
1.10. Single-Triple Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------SINGLE TRIPLE METERS

> to view
--------------------
This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the
Single Triple option TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Only
seen on models that have the Single-Triple option
Single Triple Mode

Mode A
3PTrip3PLO
Displays the Single triple mode which is in operation.
Page 7 of 16
1.11. Auto-Reclose Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------AUTORECLOSE METERS
> to view
--------------------
Autoreclose TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group.
Autoreclose Status
Out Of Service
Close Shot
0
Autoreclose Status
A=
Out Of Service
B=
Out Of Service
C=
Out Of Service
Close Shot A
0
Close Shot B
0
Close Shot C
0
Status of the autoreclose for the non single-triple models.
Status of the autoreclose for the single-triple models.
Status of the current autoreclose shot number for the single-triple models.
1.12. Synchronising Meters

This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated
with Synchronising TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
SYNC METERS
to view
Line Volts
Bus Volts
Line Freq
Bus Freq
Phase Diff
Slip Freq
Voltage Diff
0.00V
0.00V
0.000Hz
0.000Hz
0.0Deg
0.000Hz
0%
Displays the voltages used for synchronising in models that include

this function
Displays the calculated synchronising parameters in models that

include this function
1.13. Loss of Voltage Meters

LOSS OF VOLTS METERS
to view
Loss of Volts Status
Disabled
This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are
associated with SLoss of Voltage TEST/RESET allows
access to this sub-group
Displays the current status of the Loss of Volts logic in the LOV
models only.
Page 8 of 16
1.14. Maintenance Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------MAINTENANCE METERS
> to view
--------------------
Maintenance TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
CB Total Trips
Count
Target
0
100
CB A Total Trips
Count
Target
0
100
CB B Total Trips
Count
Target
0
100
CB C Total Trips
Count
Target
0
100
CB Ph A Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB Ph BTrips
Count
0
Target
100
CB Ph C Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB Ph E/F Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB Delta Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB A Delta Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB B Delta Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB C Delta Trips
Count
0
Target
100
CB Count To AR Block
Count
0
Target
100
CB A Count To AR Block
Count
0
Target
100
CB B Count To AR Block
Count
0
Target
100
CB C Count To AR Block
Count
0
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB for the non singletriple models
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the

Single Triple models only
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the

Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the

Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for
faults involving the A phase for the non single-triple models
faults involving the B phase for the non single-triple models
faults involving the C phase for the non single-triple models
Displays the number of CB trips which were issued for operation of-earth
fault elements for the non single-triple models
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the

Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB. When the target is
reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the non singletriple models.
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the A phase CB on the
Single-Triple models only. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1
Delayed Trip to Lockout on the A phase CB.
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the B phase CB on the
Delayed Trip to Lockout on the B phase CB.
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the C phase CB on the
Page 9 of 16
Instrument
Target
Description
100
CB Freq Ops Count

Count
0
Target
10
CB-A Freq Ops Count
Count
0
Target
10
CB-B Freq Ops Count
Count
0
Target
10
CB-C Freq Ops Count
Count
0
Target
10
CB LO Handle Ops
Count
0
Target
100
CB-A LO Handle Ops
Count
0
Target
100
CB-B LO Handle Ops
Count
0
Target
100
CB-C LO Handle Ops
Count
0
Target
100
CB Wear
Phase A
0.00MA^2s
Phase B
0.00MA^2s
Phase C
0.00MA^2s
CB Wear Remaining
Phase A
0%
Phase B
0%
Phase C
0%
CB Wear A
Count
0.00MA^2s
Target
100MA^2s
Remaining
100%
CB Wear B
Count
0.00MA^2s
Target
100MA^2s
Remaining
100%
CB Wear C
Count
0.00MA^2s
Target
100MA^2s
Remaining
100%
Delayed Trip to Lockout on the C phase CB.

Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1
hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to
Lockout for the non single-triple models.
Displays the number of phase A CB trips experienced by the CB over the last
rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1
Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models.
Displays the number of phase B CB trips experienced by the CB over the last
rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1
Displays the number of phase C CB trips experienced by the CB over the
last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1
Displays the number of operations of the Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for
the non single-triple models
Displays the number of operations of the phase A Circuit Breaker Lockout
handle for the single-triple models
Displays the number of operations of the phase B Circuit Breaker Lockout
Displays the number of operations of the phase C Circuit Breaker Lockout
Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear for the non single-triple
models.
Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear remaining as a

percentage of the alarm level setting for the non single-triple models.
Displays the current measure of Phase A circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models.
Displays the current measure of Phase B circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models.
Displays the current measure of Phase C circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models.
Page 10 of 16
1.15. General Alarm Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------GENERAL ALARM
METERS
> to view
--------------------
Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
General Alarms
-------------------ALARM 1
Cleared
Displays the state of G+eneral Alarm
General Alarms
-------------------ALARM 12 Cleared
1.16. Battery Condition Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------BATTERY CONDITION
> to view
--------------------
Battery Condition monitoring TEST/RESET allows access to this subgroup.
Battery Condition
-------------------Resistance
Aux dc
Status of the Battery Condition Test function
Disabled
0m Ohms
0V
Displays measurements from the most recent battery test.
1.17. Capacitor condition Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------CAPACITOR CONDITION
> to view
--------------------
Capacitor Condition TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group.
Capacitor Condition
-------------------Disabled
Cap-A Condition
-------------------Disabled
Cap-B Condition
-------------------Disabled
Cap-C Condition
-------------------Disabled
Status of the Capacitor Condition Test function on the non single triple
models
Status of the phase A Capacitor Condition Test function on the single triple
models
Status of the phase B Capacitor Condition Test function on the single triple
models
Status of the phase C Capacitor Condition Test function on the single triple
models
Page 11 of 16
1.18. Power Quality Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------POWER QUALITY METERS

> to view
--------------------
Power Quality TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group.
Pole 1 27sag SARFI

SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
Pole 2 27sag SARFI
SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
Pole 3 27sag SARFI
SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
System Interrupts
P1 interrupts
P2 interrupts
P3 interrupts
Pole 1 59 swell SARFI
SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
SIARFI
SMARFI
STARFI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset
Displays the number of voltage interruptions since last reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset
1.19. Demand Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------DEMAND METERS
> to view
--------------------
demand metering. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
V Phase A Demand
Max
Min
Mean
V Phase B Demand
Max
Min
Mean
V Phase C Demand
Max
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AB
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AC
Page 12 of 16
Instrument
Min
0.00V
Mean
0.00V
V Phase AB Demand
Max
0.00V
Min
0.00V
Mean
0.00V
V Phase BC Demand
Max
0.00V
Min
0.00V
Mean
0.00V
V Phase CA Demand
Max
0.00V
Min
0.00V
Mean
0.00V
I Phase A Demand
Max
0.00A
Min
0.00A
Mean
0.00A
I Phase B Demand
Max
0.00A
Min
0.00A
Mean
0.00A
I Phase C Demand
Max
0.00A
Min
0.00A
Mean
0.00A
Power P 3P Demand
Max
0.00W
Min
0.00W
Mean
0.00W
Power Q 3P Demand
Max
0.00VAr
Min
0.00VAr
Mean
0.00VAr
Power S 3P Demand
Max
0.00VA
Min
0.00VA
Mean
0.00VA
Frequency Demand
Max
0.000Hz
Min
0.000Hz
Mean
0.000Hz
Description
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A.B
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase BC
Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase CA.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase A.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase B.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase C.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power P 3P Demand.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power Q 3P Demand.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power S 3P Demand.
Shows the Max, Min and Mean for System Frequency Demand.
Page 13 of 16
1.20. Binary Input Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------BINARY INPUT METERS

> to view
--------------------
Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
BI 1-8
BI 9-16
---- ------- ----
Displays the state of DC binary inputs 1 to 16 (The number of binary inputs

may vary depending on model)
BI 17-24
BI 25-32
---- ------- ----
Displays the state of DC binary inputs 17 to 32 (The number of binary inputs

may vary depending on model)
BI 33-33
Displays the state of DC binary input 33 (The number of binary inputs may
vary depending on model)
1.21. Binary Output Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------BINARY OUTPUT
METERS
> to view
--------------------
Binary Outputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
BO 1-8
BO 9-16
---- ------- ----
Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 1 to 16. (The number of binary

outputs may vary depending on model)
BO 17-24
BO 25-30
---- ------- --
Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 17 to 30. (The number of binary

outputs may vary depending on model)
1.22. Virtual Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------VIRTUAL METERS
> to view
--------------------
This is the sub-group that shows the state of the virtual status inputs in the
relay TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
V 1-8
V 9-16
---- ------- ----
Displays the state of Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 (The number of virtual inputs will
vary depending on model)
Page 14 of 16
1.23. Communication Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------COMMUNICATION
METERS
> to view
--------------------
Communications ports TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM1 TRAFFIC
Tx1
0
Rx1
0
Rx1 Errors
0
COM2 TRAFFIC
Tx2
0
Rx2
0
Rx2 Errors
0
COM3 TRAFFIC
Tx3
0
Rx3
0
Rx3 Errors
0
COM4 TRAFFIC
Tx4
0
Rx4
0
Rx4 Errors
0
EN100 INFORMATION
Version 04.07.01
Part# BF1111111111
Network Config
Mac 00000000
IP 000.000.000.000
NM 255.255.255.000
Displays which com ports are currently active
Displays traffic on Com1
Displays EN100 information
Displays EN100 network information
Displays further EN100 61850 information
Page 15 of 16
1.24. Miscellaneous Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------MISCELLANEOUS
METERS
> to view
--------------------
This is the sub-group that includes indication such as the relays time and
date, the amount of fault and waveform records stored in the relay
TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
Date
01/01/2000
Time
22:41:44
Waveform Recs
0
Fault Recs
0
Event Recs
0
Data Log Recs
0
This meter displays the date and time and the number of Fault records and
Event records stored in the relay
1.25. Quick Logic Meters

Instrument
Description
-------------------QUICK LOGIC METERS

> to view
--------------------
QuickLogic. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group
E 1-8
E 9-16
E1 Equation
EQN
TMR
CNT
---- ------- ----
Shows the state of all the equations
0-0
0-1
=0
=0
=0
E16 Equation
EQN
TMR
0-0
CNT
0-1
=0
=0
=0
Shows the state of an individual equation. EQN shows the equation state.
TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation. CNT shows the
count progress and state for the equation.
Shows the state of an individual equation. EQN shows the equation state.
TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation. CNT shows the
count progress and state for the equation.
Page 16 of 16
7SR224 Argus Performance Specification

Overcurrent Relay

2008/03
First issue
2008/06
R1a Typographical revisions; Page 9
2009/09
LOV modified, 50/51G modified to suit calculated values.
2010/04
Check Synchronising added
2010/05
Document reformatted due to rebrand
2010.09
Data updated for EATS 48-4 compliance for binary inputs
2012/10
Minor defect corrections, 27/59 Vx was missing, 61850 added
2012/12

2008/03
2435H800011R2d-1a
First Release
2008/06
2435H800011R3d-2b
English-USA English. Loss of Voltage
2008/10
2435H800011R4-3
LOV and Single / Triple
2009/09
2435H800011R4c-3b
Software maintenance
2010/04
2435H80011R4d-4
2012/09
2435H85010R7b-7a
IEC 61850 and Ethernet added
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Section 1: Common Functions ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.1
CE Conformity........................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2
Reference ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1.3
Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.4
Weights ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Energising Quantities ...................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.5
Auxiliary Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 7
1.1.6
AC Current ................................................................................................................................ 7
1.1.7
AC Voltage................................................................................................................................ 8
1.1.8
Binary (Digital) Outputs ............................................................................................................. 8
1.1.9
Binary (Digital) Inputs................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 Functional Performance ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.2.1
Instrumentation ....................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.2
USB Data Communication Interface ....................................................................................... 11
1.2.3
Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface.................................................................... 11
1.2.4
RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port).................................................. 11
1.2.5
RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port).................................... 11
1.2.6
RS232 Data Communication Interface.................................................................................... 11
1.2.7
RS232 Data Communication Interface.................................................................................... 11
1.2.8
Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) ............................... 12
1.2.9
Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) .................................. 12
1.2.10 Real Time Clock...................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Environmental Performance.................................................................................................................. 13
1.3.1
General ................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.2
Emissions................................................................................................................................ 14
1.3.3
Immunity ................................................................................................................................. 15
1.3.4
Mechanical.............................................................................................................................. 16
Section 2: Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................. 17
2.1 27/59 Under/Over Voltage .................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.3
Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 17
2.1.4
Operate and Reset Time......................................................................................................... 17
2.2 27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3 37 Undercurrent .................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.2
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................... 20
2.4.1
Reference (46DT) ................................................................................................................... 20
2.4.2
Operate and Reset Level (46DT) ............................................................................................ 20
2.4.3
Operate and Reset Time (46DT)............................................................................................. 20
2.4.4
Reference (46IT)..................................................................................................................... 21
2.4.5
Operate and Reset Level (46IT).............................................................................................. 21
2.4.6
Operate and Reset Time (46IT) .............................................................................................. 21
2.5 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage.................................................................................................. 22
2.5.1
Reference (47) ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.5.2
Operate and Reset Level (47)................................................................................................. 22
2.5.3
Operate and Reset Time (47) ................................................................................................. 22
2.6 49 Thermal Overload ............................................................................................................................ 23
2.6.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 23
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.7 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent............................................................................................................... 25
2.7.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 25
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault ............................................................................................ 26

2.8.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 26
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.9 50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault.......................................................................................... 27
2.9.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 27
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ............................................................................................................... 28
2.10.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 28
2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 28
2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time......................................................................................................... 29
2.11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault............................................................................................. 30
2.11.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 30
2.12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault .......................................................................................... 35
2.12.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 35
2.13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ..................................................................................................... 37
2.13.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 37
2.14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ....................................................................................................... 38
2.14.1 Reference (59NDT)................................................................................................................. 38
2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) ......................................................................................... 38
2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) .......................................................................................... 38
2.14.4 Reference (59NIT) .................................................................................................................. 38
2.14.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) ........................................................................................... 38
2.14.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT)............................................................................................ 39
2.15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection................................................................................................... 40
2.15.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 40
2.16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault........................................................................... 41
2.16.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 41
2.16.2 Operate Angle......................................................................................................................... 41
2.16.3 Operate Threshold .................................................................................................................. 41
2.16.4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level .......................................................................................... 41
2.17 81Under/Over Frequency...................................................................................................................... 42
2.17.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 42
Section 3: Supervision Functions........................................................................................................................... 43
3.1 46BC Broken Conductor ....................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail ...................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3 60CTS Current Transformer Supervision.............................................................................................. 45
3.3.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 45
3.3.2
Current & Voltage Threshold................................................................................................... 45
3.3.3
3.4 60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision.............................................................................................. 46
3.4.1
Reference (60VTS) ................................................................................................................. 46
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.5 60VTF-Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision....................................................................................... 47
3.5.1
Reference (60VTF) ................................................................................................................. 47
3.5.2
3.6 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision............................................................................................................. 47
3.6.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 47
3.6.2
3.7 81HBL2 Inrush Detector........................................................................................................................ 48
3.7.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 48
3.7.2
3.7.3
Section 4: Control Functions .................................................................................................................................. 49
4.1 Check Synchronising ............................................................................................................................ 49
4.1.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 49
4.1.2
Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements .................................................................................. 49
4.1.3
Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements..................................................................................... 50
4.1.4
Voltage Difference .................................................................................................................. 50
4.1.5
General Autoreclose Timers ................................................................................................... 50
4.1.6
CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference ................................................................ 50
4.1.7
CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency.................................................................................................... 50
4.1.8
CS/SS Timer ........................................................................................................................... 50
4.1.9
Split Angle Detector ................................................................................................................ 51
4.1.10 Split Slip Frequency Detector.................................................................................................. 51
4.2 Live/Dead.............................................................................................................................................. 51
4.2.1
Reference ............................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.2
Live/Dead Detector Elements ................................................................................................. 51
4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ................................................................................ 51
4.3.1
Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live )............................................................................................ 51
4.3.2
4.3.3
Reference LOV Automation Timers ........................................................................................ 52
4.3.4
Operate Time LOV Automation Timers................................................................................... 52
List of Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes

ESI 1 and ESI 2 .................................................................................................................10
Thermal Overload Protection Curves ................................................................................24
IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1)..............................................................................32
ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) .............................................................33
ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1).............................................................................34
Section 1: Common Functions

1.1
General
1.1.1
CE Conformity
This product is CE compliant to relevant EU directives.
1.1.2
Reference
This product complies with IEC 60255-3, IEC 60255-6 and IEC 60255-12.
1.1.2.1
Accuracy Reference Conditions
This product has been tested under the following conditions, unless specifically stated otherwise.
Parameter
Value
Auxiliary supply
nominal
Frequency
nominal
Ambient temperature
20 C
1.1.3
Dimensions
Parameter
Width
Value
E10 case
260 mm
E12 case
312 mm
Height
177 mm
Depth behind panel

(including clearance for wiring and fibre)
287 mm
Projection (from front of panel)
31 mm
See appropriate case outline and panel drilling drawing, as specified in Diagrams and Parameters document, for
complete dimensional specifications.
1.1.4
Weights
Parameter
Value
7SR2242, E10 case
6 kg
7SR2243, E10 case
6 kg
(Including panel 7SR2244, E10 case

fixings &
terminal screws, 7SR2246, E12 case
excluding
7SR2247, E12 case
packaging)
6 kg
Net weight
7SR2248, E12 case
7.4 kg
7.8 kg
7.8 kg
When supplied with additional fibre optic, RS485 or RS232 communication interface the above weights are
increased by 0.165 kg.
When supplied with additional Ethernet communication interface the above weights are increased by 0.6 kg.
Energising Quantities
1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply
Nominal
VAUX
Operating Range
30, 48, 110, 220 VDC
1.1.5.1
Attribute
24 to 290 VDC
Burden
Value
30V DC
48V DC
110V DC
220V DC
1.1.5.2
Quiescent (typical)
6.0 W
Quiescent (back light)
7.0 W
Quiescent (typical)
5.5 W
6.5 W
Quiescent (typical)
6.5 W
7.5 W
Quiescent (typical)
7.5 W
8.5 W
Operational Features
Attribute
Value
0% Dip Withstand Period

Dip Immunity Acquisition Period
Comments
100 ms
Typical time after switch on to
5 minutes
attain claimed immunity to dips
NOTE: Dips in supply that fall below the minimum voltage for a period greater than the 0% Dip Withstand Period, will
invoke a relay reset.
During conditions of auxiliary input voltage variations which are not described (1) in section 1.4.3.1, the relay
may enter a safety protection mode where a power supply shutdown occurs. This condition is designed to
protect the power supply from damage as well as prevent internal relay faults from developing into dangerous
situations.
Once the relay has entered this safety mode, it may be necessary to reduce the auxiliary input voltage to zero
volts for up to 30 seconds before re-application of the auxiliary supply will cause the relay to power up and
operate normally.
(1) Using fuses as on/off switches or allowing batteries to run at very low cell voltages for extended periods
and then attempting to re-charge them are examples of such auxiliary supply conditions.
1.1.6 AC Current
Nominal
Measuring Range
In
1, 5 A Phase and earth
80 x In
fn
50, 60 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
Note. 1 A and 5 A nominal inputs are user selectable on each model.

1.1.6.1
Burden
Attribute
AC Burden
Value - Phase and Earth

1A
5A
0.1 VA
0.3 VA
1.1.6.2
Thermal Withstand
Overload Current
Overload Period
Phase and Earth

1A
5A
Continuous
3.0 xIn
10 minutes
3.5 xIn
5 minutes
4.0 xIn
3 minutes
5.0 xIn
2 minutes
6.0 xIn
3 seconds
57.7 A
202 A
2 seconds
70.7 A
247 A
1 second
100 A
350 A
1 cycle
700 A
2500 A
1.1.7 AC Voltage
Attribute
Nominal
Operating Range
4x VT models:
0-270 V RMS
Vn
6x VT models:
40-160 V RMS
0-270 V RMS V1,V2,V3.

0-132 V RMS for V4,V5,V6
fn
1.1.7.1
Attribute
50, 60 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
Burden
Value
AC Burden
1.1.7.2
Attribute
0.1 VA at 110 V
Thermal withstand
Value
Overvoltage withstand
300 V RMS
1.1.8 Binary (Digital) Outputs

Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2
Attribute
Value
Carry continuously
Make and carry
(L/R 40 ms and V 300 V)
Break
( 5 A and 300 V)
5 A AC or DC
for 0.5 s
20 A AC or DC
for 0.2 s
30 A AC or DC
AC resistive
1250 VA
AC inductive
250 VA at p.f. 0.4
DC resistive
75 W
DC inductive
30 W at L/R 40 ms
50 W at L/R 10 ms
Contact Operate / Release Time
7 ms / 3 ms
Minimum number of operations
1000 at maximum load
Minimum recommended load
0.5 W at minimum of 10 mA or 5 V
1.1.9 Binary (Digital) Inputs

Nominal
VBI
1.1.9.1
Attribute
Operating Range
19 VDC
17 to 290 VDC
88 VDC
74 to 290 VDC
Performance
Maximum DC current for

operation
Value
VBI = 19 V
1.5 mA
VBI = 88 V
1.5 mA
Reset/Operate voltage ratio
90 %
Typical response time
< 7 ms
Typical response time when programmed to

energise an output relay contact
< 20 ms
The binary inputs have a low minimum operate current and may be set for high speed operation. To achieve
immunity from AC interference, a BI pick-up delay of typically one-cycle can be applied. The default pick-up time
delay of 20 ms will provide this immunity.
The standard EATS 48-4 specifies additional performance requirements to provide greater security against
external disturbances. This standard can be applied to applications where a binary input is used to influence a
control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and the wiring is considered to be susceptible to capacitive
currents, but double pole switching is not applied. See Chapter 7 Applications Guide.
To comply with EATS 48-4, classes ESI 1 and ESI 2, external components / BI pick-up delays are required as
shown in fig. 1-1.
(24 37.5 V Operative)

IOP > 10 mA
470
(24 37.5 V Operative)

IOP > 20 mA
220
BI (19 V)
BI (19 V)
1K5
820
(37.5 60 V Operative)
IOP > 10 mA
1K6
(37.5 60 V Operative)
IOP > 20 mA
820
BI (19 V)
BI (19 V)
820
1K5
BI pickup DTL = 10 ms
(10F, 60 V Capacitance discharge)
(87.5 137.5 V Operative)

IOP > 25 mA
2K0

IOP > 50 mA
1K2
BI (19 V)
BI (19 V)
330
560
(10 F, 150 V Capacitance discharge)

IOP > 25 mA

IOP > 50 mA
BI (88 V)
BI (88 V)
1K3
2K7
(10 F, 150 V Capacitance discharge)
Resistor power ratings:
30 V DC Nominal
48 V DC Nominal
110 V DC Nominal
110 V DC Nominal
>3 W
>3 W
>10 W (ESI- 1)
>20 W (ESI-2)
Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot
Figure 1-1
Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2
1.2
Functional Performance
1.2.1 Instrumentation
Instrument Value
Reference
Typical accuracy
Current
I 0.1 xIn
1 % In
Voltage
V 0.8 xVn
1 % Vn
Power, real and apparent
V = Vn, I 0.1 xIn, pf 0.8
3 % Pn, where Pn = Vn x In
Power factor
V = Vn, I 0.1 xIn, pf 0.8
0.05
pf
1.2.2 USB Data Communication Interface

Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Electrical
Connectors
USB-Type B
1.2.3 Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface

Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Fibre-optic
Connectors
STTM (BFOC/2.5)
Recommended fibre
62.5/125 m glass fibre with ST connector
Optical Wavelength
820 nm
Launch power (into recommended fibre)
-16 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
-24 dBm
1.2.4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port)

Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Electrical
Connectors
4 mm Ring Crimp
1.2.5
RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port)
Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Electrical
Connectors
Screw retainer terminal to suit Flat Blade Crimps up to 2.5 mm
1.2.6 RS232 Data Communication Interface

Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Electrical
Connectors
9 way Male D connector
1.2.7 RS232 Data Communication Interface

Attribute
Value
Physical layer
Electrical
Connectors
9 way Male D connector
1.2.8 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option)
Attribute
Value
Physical Layer
Fibre Optic
Connectors
Duplex LC 100 BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3
Recommended Fibre
62.5/125 m glass fibre with Duplex-LC connector
Transmission Speed
100 MBit/s
Optical Wavelength
1300 nm
Bridgeable distance
2 km
1.2.9 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option)

Attribute
Value
Physical Layer
Electrical
Connectors
RJ45 100BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3
Transmission Speed
100 MBit/s
Test Voltage (with regard to socket)
500 VAC 50 Hz
Bridgeable distance
20 m
1.2.10 Real Time Clock

1.2.10.1
Internal Clock
The specification below applies only while no external synchronisation signal (e.g. IRIG-B, IEC 60870-5-103) is
being received.
Attribute
Value
Accuracy (- 10 C to + 55 C)
1.2.10.2
Attribute
3.5 ppm (No Aux supply connected)

100 ppm (Aux supply connected)
IRIG-B
Value
Connector
BNC
Signal Type
IRIG-B 120, 122 or 123
Applied signal level
minimum 3 V, maximum 6 V, peak-to-peak
Signal : carrier ratio
3:1
Input Impedance
4 k Ohms approx.
1.3
Environmental Performance
1.3.1 General
1.3.1.1
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Type
Level
Operating range
-10 C to +55 C
Storage range
-25 C to +70 C
1.3.1.2
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3
Type
Operational test
1.3.1.3
Level
Between all M4 terminals and earth, or

between any two independent circuits
5.0 kV, 1.2/50 s 0.5j
Insulation
IEC 60255-5
Type
Level
Between any M4 terminal and earth

Between independent circuits
Across normally open contacts
1.3.1.5
56 days at 40 C and 95 % relative humidity
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5
Type
1.3.1.4
Level
2.5 kV AC RMS for 1 min

1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
IP Ratings
IEC 60529
Type
Installed with cover on
Installed with cover removed
Level
Rear
IP 20
Front
IP 51
Rear
IP 20
Front
IP 20
1.3.2 Emissions
IEC 60255-25
1.3.2.1
Type
Radiated Radio Frequency

Limits at 10 m Open Area test site, Quasi-peak
30 to 230 MHz
40 dB(V/m)
230 to 10000 MHz
47 dB(V/m)
1.3.2.2
Conducted Radio Frequency
Type
Limits
Quasi-peak
Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz
79 dB(V)
66 dB(V)
0.5 to 30 MHz
73 dB(V)
60 dB(V)
1.3.3 Immunity
1.3.3.1
Auxiliary DC Supply Variation
IEC 60255-11
Quantity
Value
Allowable superimposed ac component
12% of DC voltage
Allowable breaks/dips in supply

(collapse to zero from nominal voltage)
20 ms
1.3.3.2
High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1 Class III

Type
Level
Variation
Common (longitudinal) mode
2.5 kV
Series (transverse) mode
1.0 kV
RS485 standard rear port
1 kV
No Data Loss
Level
Variation
8.0 kV
5%
Type
Level
Variation
80 MHz to 1000 MHz
10 V/m
5%
Level
Variation
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz repetitive
4 kV
10 %
RS485 standard rear port
2 kV
No Data Loss
Level
4.0 kV
Variation
2.0 kV
10 %
1.0 kV
No data loss
2.0 kV
10 %
1.0 kV*
10 %
1.3.3.3
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV

Type
Contact discharge
1.3.3.4
10 %
Radiated Immunity
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
1.3.3.5
Fast Transients
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002)

Type
1.3.3.6
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5; IEC 61000-4-5

Type
Analog Inputs.
Line to Earth
Case, Aux Power & I/O.
Line to Earth
RS485 Comms port
Line to Earth
Analog Inputs.
Line to Line
Case, Aux Power & I/O.
Line to Line
10 %
* Note: 45 ms pick-up delay applied to binary inputs

1.3.3.7
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-6
Type
Level
Variation
0.15 to 80 MHz
10 V
5%
1.3.4
Mechanical
1.3.4.1
Vibration (Sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I

Type
Level
Vibration response
0.5 gn
Vibration endurance
1.0 gn
1.3.4.2
Variation
5%
Shock and Bump

Type
Level
Variation
Shock response
5 gn,
Shock withstand
15 gn, 11 ms
Bump test
10 gn, 16 ms
1.3.4.3
5%
Seismic

Type
Seismic response
1.3.4.4
Type
Durability
11 ms
Level
Variation
1 gn
5%
Mechanical Classification
Level
> 106 operations

2.1
2.1.2
27/59 Under/Over Voltage

Reference
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting
5, 5.5200 V
hyst
Hysteresis setting
0, 0.1 80.0 %
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.1.3
Vop
Operate and Reset Level

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V
Reset level
Overvoltage
= (100 % - hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V
Undervoltage
= (100 % + hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V

1%
Repeatability
Variation
2.1.4
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
Operate and Reset Time

Attribute
tbasicE
top
Value
Element basic
operate time.
Overvoltage
Standard &
LOV models
Undervoltage
Element basic
operate time.
Overvoltage
Single-Triple
model only
Undervoltage
0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms 10 ms
0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms 10 ms
1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms 10 ms
0 to 1.1 x Vs: 81 ms 10 ms
0 to 2.0 xVs: 71 ms 10 ms
1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 64 ms 10 ms
Operate time following delay
tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Disengaging time
< 80 ms
2.2
27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage
2.2.1
Reference
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting for 4xVT models
5, 5.5199.5, 200 V
Vs
Setting for 6xVT models
5, 5.5119.5, 120 V
hyst
Hysteresis setting
0, 0.1 80.0 %
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.2.2
Vop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V
Reset level
Overvoltage
= (100 % - hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V
Undervoltage
= (100 % + hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V

1%
Repeatability
Variation
2.2.3
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
Overvoltage
0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms 10 ms
tbasicE
Element basic
operate time
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Disengaging time
< 80 ms
Undervoltage
0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms 10 ms
1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms 10 ms
2.3
2.3.2
37 Undercurrent
Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.05, 0.105.0 xIn
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.3.3
Iop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
105 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Variation
2.3.4
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
tbasic
Element basic operate time
1.1 to 0.5 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 60 ms
2.4
2.4.1
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent

Reference (46DT)
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.05, 0.06... 4.0 xIn
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.4.2
Iop
Operate and Reset Level (46DT)

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Transient overreach
(X/R 100)
-5 %
Variation
2.4.3
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
Operate and Reset Time (46DT)

Attribute
Value
0 to 2 xIs: 40 ms, 10 ms
tbasic
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Overshoot time
<40 ms
Disengaging time
< 60 ms
0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, 10 ms
2.4.4
Reference (46IT)
Parameter
Value
char
Characteristic setting
IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Tm
Time Multiplier setting
0.025, 0.05 1.6, 1.7 5, 6 100
Is
Setting
0.05, 0.06 2.5 xIn
Applied Current (for operate time)

IDMTL
2 to 20 x Is
td
Delay setting
0, 0.01 20 s
tres
Reset setting
ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1 60 s
2.4.5
Iop
Operate and Reset Level (46IT)

Attribute
Value
Operate level
105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Variation
2.4.6
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
Operate and Reset Time (46IT)

Attribute
Value
Starter operate time ( 2xIs)
35 ms, 10ms
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
top
Operate time
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
char = DTL
t op =
ANSI DECAYING
tres
[IsI ] 1
for char =
t op =
Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms,
IEC-NI :
IEC-VI :
IEC-EI :
IEC-LTI :
[IsI ]P
+ B Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms,
td, 1 % or 20 ms
[]
I 2
Is
Tm ,
5 % absolute or 50 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85

ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 60 ms
K = 0.14, = 0.02
K = 13.5, = 1.0
K = 80.0, = 2.0
K = 120.0, = 1.0
for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02

ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
tres =
Reset time
2.5
2.5.1
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage

Reference (47)
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting
1, 1.5 90 V
Hyst.
Hysteresis
0, 0.1 80 %
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010 10000,

10100 14400 s
2.5.2
Vop
Operate and Reset Level (47)

Attribute
Value
Operate level
(100%-hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V
Reset level
95 % Vop
Repeatability
1%
Variation
2.5.3
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
Operate and Reset Time (47)

Attribute
tbasic
top
Value
0V to 2 xVs, 80 ms, 20 ms
0V to 10 xVs, 55 ms, 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 60 ms
2.6
2.6.1
49 Thermal Overload
Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Overload setting
0.10, 0.11 3 xIn
Time constant setting
1, 1.5 1000 min
2.6.2
Iol

Attribute
Value
Overload level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iol
Repeatability
1%
Variation
2.6.3
top
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
Overload trip operate time
I 2 I 2P
t = ln 2
2
I (k I B )

(IS 0.3 xIN to 3 xIN)
where IP = prior current

Repeatability
100 ms
Figure 2-1 shows the thermal curves for various time constants.
100000
10000
= 1000 mins
1000
Time
(sec)
= 100 mins
100
= 10 mins
10
= 1 min
0.1
0
10
Current (multiple of setting)

Figure 2-1
Thermal Overload Protection Curves
2.7
2.7.1
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent
Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.05, 0.06 2, 2.05 25, 25.5 50 xIn
5 xIs
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.7.2
Iop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Transient overreach
(X/R 100)
-5 %
Variation
2.7.3
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms
tbasic
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms
2.8
2.8.1
50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault

Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.005, 0.006 0.1, 0.105 .. 2.5, 2.55 25 xIn
5 x Is
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
2.8.2
Iop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Transient overreach
(X/R 100)
-5 %
Variation
2.8.3
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms
tbasic
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms
2.9
50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault
2.9.1
Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.005, 0.006 0.1, 0.105 .. 5 xIn
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.01 20.0, 20.1 .. 100.0, 101.1000, 1010

10000 , 10100 14400
Applied current (for operate time)
5 xIs
2.9.2
Iop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop 5 % or 1% In
Repeatability
1%
Transient overreach
(X/R 100)
-5 %
-10 C to +55 C
Variation
fnom 5 %
harmonics to fcutoff
2.9.3
top
5%

Attribute
tbasic
5%
Value
0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms
Element basic
operate time
0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
Variation
fnom 5 %
5%
2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent

2.10.1 Reference
Is
Parameter
Value
Setting
0.05, 0.06 2.5 xIn

IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI;
char
ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Manufacturer specific curves

See Performance Specification Appendix 1
Tm
I

Applied current
0.025, 0.05 1.6, 1.7 5, 6 100

IDMTL
(for operate time)
DTL
2 to 20 xIs
5 xIs
td
Delay setting
0, 0.01 20 s
tres
Reset setting
2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level
Iop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time

Attribute
Value
20 ms, 20ms
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
top
Operate time
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
char = DTL
t op =
ANSI DECAYING
tres
[]
for char =
t op =
IEC-NI :
IEC-VI :
IEC-EI :
IEC-LTI :
[IsI ]P
K = 0.14, = 0.02
K = 13.5, = 1.0
K = 80.0, = 2.0
K = 120.0, = 1.0

ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
td, 1 % or 20ms
tres =
Reset time
I
Is
[]
I 2
Is
Tm ,

ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.
Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset
Curves (Time Multiplier = 1). These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional
control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating
time.
2.11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault

2.11.1 Reference
Is
Parameter
Value
Setting
0.005, 0.006 0.100, 0.105 1.0 xIn

Char

Tm
0.025, 0.05 1.6, 1.7 5, 6 100
td
Delay setting (DTL)
0, 0.01 20 s
tres
Reset setting
Applied current (for

operate time)
IDMTL
2 to 20 xIs
DTL
5 xIs

Iop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
20 ms, 20ms
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
top
Operate time
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
char = DTL
t op =
ANSI DECAYING
tres
[IsI ] 1
for char =
t op =
IEC-NI :
IEC-VI :
IEC-EI :
IEC-LTI :
[IsI ]P
K = 0.14, = 0.02
K = 13.5, = 1.0
K = 80.0, = 2.0
K = 120.0, = 1.0

ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
td, 1 % or 20ms
tres =
Reset time
[]
I 2
Is
Tm ,

ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.
Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset
Curves (Time Multiplier = 1). These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional
control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating
time.
1000
100
Time
(sec)
10
Long Time Inverse
Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
0.1
1
10
20
30
40
50 60
80
100
Current (multiples of setting)

Figure 2-2
IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
1000
100
Time
(sec)
10
Moderately Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
0.1
1
10
20
30
40
50 60
80
100

Figure 2-3
ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
1000
500
100
50
Extremely Inverse
Very Inverse
Time
(sec)
10
Moderately Inverse
1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Figure 2-4
ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
2.12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault

2.12.1 Reference
Is
Parameter
Value
Setting
0.005, 0.006 0.100, 0.105 1.0 xIn

char

Tm
Time multiplier
0.025, 0.05 1.6, 1.7 5, 6 100
td
Delay setting
0.0020.00 s
tres
Reset setting
DECAYING, 0, 160 s
Applied current (for

operate time)
IDMTL
2 to 20 xIs
DTL
5 xIs

Iop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In
Reset level
95 % Iop 4 % or 1% In
Repeatability
1%
-10 C to +55 C
Variation
fnom 5 %
5%
5%

Attribute
Value
Starter operate time
20 ms, 20 ms
t op =
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
top
Operate time
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI,
char = DTL
Reset time
tres DECAYING
[IsI ] 1
for char =
t op =
IEC-NI :
IEC-VI :
IEC-EI :
IEC-LTI :
[IsI ]P
td, 1 % or tcycle
[]
I 2
Is
Tm ,
tres, 1 % or 20 ms
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
fnom 5 %

ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
Repeatability
Variation
K = 0.14, = 0.02
K = 13.5, = 1.0
K = 80.0, = 2.0
K = 120.0, = 1.0

ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
tres =
char = ANSI and
tres
= DECAYING
5%
2.13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent

2.13.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting
60 V
multiplier
0.5
Is
Setting
1 xIn

Vop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V
Reset level
105 % Vop
Repeatability
1%
-10 C to +55 C
Variation
fnom 5 %
5%
5%

As per Phase Fault Shaped Characteristic Element (ANSI 51).
Where
Pickup Level = Is for Voltage > Vs

Pickup Level = (Is x m) for Voltage < Vs
2.14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement

2.14.1 Reference (59NDT)
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting
1, 1.5 100 V
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010 10000,

10100 14400 s
2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT)

Vop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V
Reset level
95 % Vop or Vop 0.25 V
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT)

Attribute
Value
0V to 1.5 xVs, 76 ms, 20 ms
tbasic
top
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
0V to 10 xVs, 63 ms, 20 ms
2.14.4 Reference (59NIT)

Parameter
Value
Multiplier setting
0.1, 0.2 10, 10.5 140
Vs
Setting
1, 1.5 100 V
td
Delay setting
0, 0.01 20 s
tres
Reset setting
0, 160 s
2.14.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT)

Vop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
105 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V
Reset level
95 % Vop or Vop 0.25 V
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
2.14.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT)

tbasic
top
Attribute
Value
Starter operate time ( 2 xVs)
65 ms, 20 ms
Operate
time
Reset Time
char = IDMTL
t op =
[ ]1
3V0
Vs
, 5 % or 65 ms
char = DTL
td, 1 % or 40 ms
char = IDMTL
tres, 5 % or 65 ms
char = DTL
tres, 1 % or 40 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
2.15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection

2.15.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.005, 0.006 ..0.100, 0.105 0.95 xIn
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.01 20.0, 20.1 100.0, 101.1000, 1010

10000 , 10100 14400 s

Iop
Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% xIn
Reset level
95 % Iop, 5 % or 0.1% xIn
Repeatability
1%
Transient overreach
(X/R 100)
-5 %
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
0 to 2 xIs, 40 ms, 10 ms
tbasic
top
tbasic + td, 1% or 10 ms
Repeatability
1% or 10 ms
Overshoot time
< 40 ms
Disengaging time
< 50 ms
0 to 5 xIs, 30 ms, 10 ms
2.16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault

2.16.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Angle setting
-95+95
Applied current
In
Applied voltage
110 V phase-phase (63.5 V phase-earth)
Vs
Setting (V0)
0.33, 0.5, 1.0 67 V
2.16.2 Operate Angle
CA
Attribute
Value
Characteristic angle (I with respect

to V)
s, 5
forward
CA - 85 5 to CA + 85 5
reverse
(CA - 180) - 85 5 to (CA - 180) + 85 5
Operating angle
Operating angle forward
for SEF
elements with
Compensated
reverse
Networks
Enabled
Variation in
characteristic
angle
CA 87.5 2.5 to CA + 87.5 2.5
(CA - 180) 87.5 2.5 to (CA - 180) + 87.5 2.5
10C to +55C
fnom 5 %
2.16.3 Operate Threshold

Attribute
Minimum levels for

operation
Value
I (p/f)
> 5 % In
I (e/f)
> 0.5 % In
V (p/f)
>1V
V (e/f)
>1V
2.16.4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level

Vs
Parameter
Value
Setting (V0)
100 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V

Attribute
Value
Operate time
typically 32 < 40 ms at characteristic angle
Reset time
typically < 65 ms at characteristic angle
2.17 81Under/Over Frequency

2.17.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Fs
Setting
40, 40.01 69.99 Hz
Hyst
Hysteresis setting
0, 0.1 80 %
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.01 20.0, 20.5 100.0, 101.1000, 1010 10000 ,

10100 14400 s

Attribute
Fop
Value
100 % Fs, 10 mHz
Operate level
Reset level
overfrequency
(100 % - hyst) xFop, 10 mHz
underfrequency
(100 % + hyst) xFop, 10 mHz

1%
Repeatability
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%

Attribute
Element basic
operate time
Value
overfrequency
Typically < 110 ms

Maximum < 150 ms
tbasic
(for ROCOF
between 0.1
underfrequency
and 5.0 Hz/sec)
Maximum < 150 ms
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Disengaging time
< 100 ms
Typically < 110 ms

3.1
46BC Broken Conductor
3.1.1
Reference
Parameter
tf
3.1.2
Value
NPS to PPS ratio
20100 %
Delay setting
0.021000 s

Attribute
Icurr
Operate level
100 % Iset 5 %
Reset level
90 % Icurr , 5 %
Repeatability
1%
-10 C to +55 C
Variation
fnom 5 %
3.1.3
Value
5%
5%

Attribute
tbasic
Value
Basic operate time 1x In to 0 A
40 ms
Operate time
tf + tbasic, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Variation
fnom 5 %
5%
3.2
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
3.2.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Is
Setting
0.005, 0.010 2.0 xIn
tCBF1
Stage 1 Delay setting
0, 2, 0.205 60000 ms
tCBF2
Stage 2 Delay setting
0, 2, 0.205 60000 ms

Attribute
Value
Iop
Operate level
100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In
Ireset
Reset level
<100 % Iop, 5 % or 1% In
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

tbasic
top
Attribute
Value
< 20ms
Stage 1
tCBF1, 1 % or 20 ms
Stage 2
tCBF2, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
Overshoot
< 2 x 20 ms
Disengaging time
< 20 ms
3.3
60CTS Current Transformer Supervision
3.3.1
Reference
Parameter
Value
Ithresh
Current Threshold
0.05, 0.1 1 xIn
Vthresh
Voltage Threshold
7, 8 110 V
td
Delay setting
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010

10000, 10100 14400 s
3.3.2
Iop
Vop
Current & Voltage Threshold

Attribute
Value
CT failed current level
100 % Ithresh, 5% or 1% In
Reset level
90 % Iop, 5% or 1% In
CT failed voltage level
100 % Vthresh, 2% or 0.5 V
Reset level
110 % Vop, 2 % or 0.5 V
Repeatability
1%
-10 C to +55 C
Variation
fnom 5 %
3.3.3
tbasic
5%
5%

Attribute
Value
Basic operate time
30 ms 20 ms
Operate time
tbasic, 1 % or 20 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 20 ms
3.4
60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision
3.4.1
Reference (60VTS)
Parameter
Value
Vnps
Vnps Level
7, 8 110 V
Inps
Inps Level
0.05, 0.1 1 x In
Ipps
Ipps Load Level
0.05, 0.1 1 x In
IFpps
Ipps Fault Level
0.05, 0.1 20 x In
Vpps
Vpps Level
1, 2 110V
td
60VTS Delay
0.00, 0.0120.00, 20.50 100, 101 1000, 1010 10000,

10100 14400 s
3.4.2
VNPSop
VPPSop
INPSblk
IPPSblk
IPPSload

Attribute
Value
Voltage NPS operate level
100 % Vnps, 5 % Vn
Voltage NPS reset level
90 % VNPSop, 5 % Vn
Voltage PPS operate level
100 % Vpps, 5 % Vn
Voltage PPS reset level
110 % VPPSop, 5 % Vn
Current NPS operate level
100 % Inps, 5 % xIn
Current NPS reset level
90 % INPSblk, 5 % xIn
Current PPS operate level
100 % IFpps, 5 % xIn
Current PPS reset level
90 % IPPSblk, 5 % xIn
Current PPS operate level
100 % Ipps, 5 % xIn
Current PPS reset level
90 % IPPSload, 5 % xIn
Repeatability
1%
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
Variation
3.4.3
tbasic

Attribute
Value
Basic operate time 0V to 2 x Vs
32 ms 10 ms
Operate time
tbasic, 1 % or 10 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
3.5
60VTF-BUS Voltage Transformer Supervision
3.5.1
Reference (60VTF)
td
3.5.2
tbasic
Parameter
Value
Operate time
0.1, 0.2 100 s

Attribute
Value
Basic operate time
30 ms 20 ms
Operate time
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
3.6
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
3.6.1
Reference
td
3.6.2
Parameter
Value
Delay setting
0, 0.0260 s

Attribute
Value
tbasic
25ms 20 ms
top
Repeatability
1 % or 10 ms
Variation
- 10 C to + 55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
3.7
81HBL2 Inrush Detector
3.7.1
Reference
Parameter
Value
Setting
I
(Ratio of 2nd Harmonic current to
0.10, 0.11... 0.5
Fundamental component current)
3.7.2
Iop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % I, 4 % or 1% In
Reset level
100 % Iop, 4 % or 1% In
Repeatability
1%
Variation
3.7.3
tbasic
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%

Attribute
Value
Will pick-up before operation of any protection element due

to magnetic inrush
Reset Time
Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due

to magnetic inrush
Section 4: Control Functions

4.1
Check Synchronising
4.1.1
Reference
Parameter
Value
Vnom
Nominal Voltage
40-160 V 1)
fn
Nominal Frequency
50/60 Hz
Vlive
Live Setting
10 % - 150 %
Vdead
Dead Setting
10 % - 150 %
Vsl
Line Voltage Setting
10 % - 150 %
Vsb
Bus Voltage Setting
10 % - 150 %
Vdiff
Voltage Differential Setting
5 % - 95 %
cs
CS Angle
1 90
ss
SS Angle
1 90
fcoz
COZ Slip
30 mHz 250 mHz
fcs
CS Slip Freq
20 mHz 250 mHz
fss
SS Slip Freq
10 mHz 250 mHz
tcs
CS Timer
0-100 s
tss
SS Timer
0-1 s
fsps
Split Slip
20 mHz 250 mHz
tdlc/tdbc
DLC/DBC Delays
0-60 s
tcw
Sync Close Window
1 s 1200 s
1)
Vz input of 6 VT devices has reduced operating range which is less than this setting and this
hardware input should not be used for Check Synchronising if nominal voltage greater than 120 V is
required.
4.1.2
Vlive,act
Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements

Attribute
Value
Live operate level
100 % Vlive, 1 % Vn
Live reset level
Vdead,act, 1 % Vn
Vdead,act Dead operate level
100 % Vdead, 1 % Vn
Dead reset level
Vlive,act, 1 % Vn
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
1%
4.1.3
Vline
Vbus
Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vsl, 1 % Vn
Reset level
Vline + 4 %
Operate level
100 % Vsb, 1 % Vn
Reset level
Vbus + 4 %
Repeatability
1%
Variation
4.1.4
Vop
4.1.5
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
1%
Voltage Difference
Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % Vdiff, 1 % Vn
Reset level
Vop 4 %
Repeatability
2%
General Autoreclose Timers

Attribute
Value
tbasic
20ms 20 ms
top
tdlc/tdbc/tcw
top + tbasic 1%
Repeatability
20 ms
4.1.6
op
4.1.7
fop
4.1.8
CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference

Attribute
Value
Operate angle
diff, 1
Reset angle
op, 1
Repeatability
CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency

Attribute
Value
Operate frequency
fslip, 10 mHz
Reset frequency
fop, - 10 mHz
Repeatability
10 mHz
CS/SS Timer
Attribute
Value
Operate time
1 , +20 ms
top
Note: minimum synchronising time following restoration of voltage from a dead condition is 320ms.
4.1.9
op
Split Angle Detector

Attribute
Value
Operate angle
split, 1
4.1.10 Split Slip Frequency Detector

fop
4.2
4.2.1
Attribute
Value
Operate frequency
fslip, 10 mHz
Reset frequency
fop, - 10 mHz
Repeatability
10 mHz
Live/Dead
Reference
Parameter
Value
Vs
Setting (ABC side)
5, 5.5200 V
Vs
Setting (XYZ side)
5, 5.5120 V
4.2.2
Vlive,act
Live/Dead Detector Elements

Attribute
Value
Live operate level
100 % Vlive, 1 % Vn
Live reset level
Vdead,act, 1 % Vn
Vdead,act Dead operate level
100 % Vdead, 1 % Vn
Dead reset level
Vlive,act, 1 % Vn
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
1%
4.3
Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function
4.3.1
Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live )

Parameter
Value
Setting
5, 5.5 80 V
Dead Vs Setting
5, 5.5 80 V
Live Vs
4.3.2
Vop

Attribute
Value
Operate level
100 % LiveVs, 2 % or 0.5 V
Reset level
100 % DeadVs, 2 % or 0.5 V
Repeatability
1%
Variation
-10 C to +55 C
5%
fnom 5 %
5%
4.3.3
Reference LOV Automation Timers

Attribute
Value
top
LOV Primed Time
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV Action Delay
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV-A Action Delay
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV-X Action Delay
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV Sequence Time
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV Reclose Delay
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV SOTF Time
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV Reclaim Time
0, 1 600 s
top
LOV Memory Time
0, 1 600 s
4.3.4
top
Operate Time LOV Automation Timers

Attribute
Value
Accuracy
top, 1 % or 50 ms
Repeatability
1 % or 50 ms
7SR224 Argus Data Comms

Overcurrent Relay

2008/03
First Issue
2008/11
Second Issue
2009/09
Third Issue
2010/04
Fourth Issue
2010/05
Fifth Issue. Document reformatted due to rebrand.
2010/09
Sixth issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol.
2012/09
IEC 61850 added
2012/12

2008/03
2435H80011R2d-1a
First Release
2008/06
2435H80011R3d-2b
Demand Records, DNP3.0 data comms Loss of Voltage Loop

Automation
2008/10
2435H80011R4-3
Single/triple ARC
2009/09
2435H80011R4c-3b
Maintenance Release
2010/04
2435H80011R4d-4
Check Sync
2010/09
2435H80011R4f-4b
2012/09
2435H85010R7b-7a
IEC61850 added
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Section 2: Physical Connection................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Communication Ports.............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1
DNP 3.0 Settings ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.2
IEC60870-5-101 Settings.......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3
USB Interface............................................................................................................................ 6
2.1.4
RS485 Interface ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.1.5
Serial Fibre Optic Interface ....................................................................................................... 8
2.1.6
Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................................... 11
Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions ................................................................................................................. 12
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 12
Section 4: Modbus Definitions ............................................................................................................................... 29
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 29
Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions................................................................................................................................ 45
5.1 Device Profile........................................................................................................................................ 45
5.2 Implementation Table............................................................................................................................ 48
5.3 Point List ............................................................................................................................................... 58
5.3.1
Binary Input Points .................................................................................................................. 58
5.3.2
Double Bit Binary Input Points ................................................................................................ 67
5.3.3
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks ............................................... 68
5.3.4
Binary Counters ...................................................................................................................... 71
5.3.5
Frozen Counters ..................................................................................................................... 72
5.3.6
Analogue Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 74
Section 6: IEC60870-5-101.................................................................................................................................... 77
6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Section 7: IEC 61850 ............................................................................................................................................. 97
7.1 IEC 61850 Points .................................................................................................................................. 97
Section 8: Modems ................................................................................................................................................ 98
8.1.1
Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s)...................................................................................... 98
8.1.2
Setting the Remote Modem .................................................................................................... 98
8.1.3
Connecting to the Remote Modem ......................................................................................... 98
Section 9: Configuration......................................................................................................................................... 99
Section 10: Glossary............................................................................................................................................ 100
List of Figures
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Communication to Front USB Port ......................................................................................6

Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485.............................7
Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network......................10
Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop
using Fibre-optic Star Network ..........................................................................................11
The relay data communication facility is compatible with control and automation systems using Modbus RTU,
DNP3. IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 protocols. PCs running Reydisp software, can be
connected to provide operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities.
This section describes how to use the Communication Interface with a control system or interrogating computer.
Appropriate software within the control system or on the interrogating computer (e.g. Reydisp Evolution or
Reydisp Manager) is required to access data over the interface.
This section specifies connection details and lists the events, commands and measurands available in the
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3.0 and optional IEC60870-5-101 and IEC61850 protocols.
When IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected the relay can communicate with PCs running Reydisp software which
provides operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities etc. Reydisp
software can be downloaded from our website www.energy.siemens.com.
Section 2: Physical Connection

The relay range provides one Front USB communication interface (Com2) located on the fascia and one RS485
(Com1) located on the Rear as standard. Optional serial fibre optic, RS232 and additional RS485 ports are
available as ordering options and are also located on the rear. Optional Ethernet ports for IEC 61850 protocol are
also fitted at the rear and replace the optional COM3/COM4 serial ports.
1.
Com2-USB: this port is used for IEC60870-5-103 (default setting) communication with the Reydisp
software. An ASCII protocol is also available through this port, the main use of this protocol is to allow
firmware to be updated from the front connection.
Access to the communication settings for the Com2-USB port is only available from the relay front fascia
via the key pad setting menu COMMUNICATIONS MENU.
2.
Com1-RS485: this port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, DNP-3, MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101
communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access. This
port can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition.
3.
Com3: Optional RS232 or additional RS485 ports, and Com3/Com4: optional dual fibre optic serial
ports. These are located on the rear of the relay can be used for IEC60870-5-103, DNP3, MODBUS RTU
or IEC60870-5-101 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer
remote access point. These ports can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition.
Any or all serial ports can be mapped to the IEC60870-5-103, DNP3, MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 protocol
at any one time, protocols available will depend upon relay model. The optional ethernet port uses IEC 61850
protocol and can also provide an IEC 60870-5-103 protocol connection to Reydisp.
Siemens Protection Devices Limited can provide a range of interface devices, please refer to product catalogue.
Full details of the interface devices can be found by referring to the website www.siemens.com/energy.
2.1
Communication Ports
2.1.1
DNP 3.0 Settings
The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the DNP 3.0 implementation when available and are
common to all ports using this protocol.
Setting name
Range
Default
Setting
Unsolicited Mode
DISABLED ENABLED
DISABLED

As Required a port Protocol is set to
DNP3
Destination Address
0 65534

DNP3
DNP3 Application
Timeout
5, 6 ... 299, 300
10s

DNP3
Notes
2.1.2
IEC60870-5-101 Settings
The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the IEC60870-5-101 implementation when available
and are common to all ports using this protocol.
Setting name
Range
Default
Setting
I101 Link Mode
Balanced, Unbalanced
Unbalanced
As Required
I101 Link Address

Field
Not Present, 1 Octet, 2

Octets
1 Octet
As Required
I101 Common Address 1 Octet, 2 Octets

of ASDU
2 Octet
As Required
I101 Cause of Trans

(COT)
1 Octet
As Required
2 Octet
As Required
1 Octet, 2 Octets
1 Octet, 2 Octets, 3
I101 Info Obj Add (IOA) Octets
I101 ASDU Address
0 .. 65535
As Required
I101 Cyclic Period
Off, 1 ..3600 seconds
60 Seconds
As Required
Notes
Balanced transmission is
used for point to point
connection to one device.
The controlled station
(slave) may send link
messages at any time.
Unbalanced transmission
is used for multi-drop
connection, e.g. RS485,
to one or more devices.
The controlling station
(master) send class 1
and 2 polls to each slave
station.
Size of link address in
octets.
Not Present Only used
with balanced
transmission.
254
- 65534
Size of common address
in octets.
254
- 65534
Size of cause of
transmission in octets.
1 octet COT code
2 octets COT code +
originator address or 0.
Size of Info Object
address in octets.
255
65535
3 octets used to generate
structured address
format.
Address to use to identify
ASDU layer
Period device will
generate cyclic data. Set
to Off to disable
generating of cyclic data.
Only data points with the
cyclic flag set will be
generated cyclically.
Setting name
Range
I101 Background
Period
2.1.3
Off, 1 ..1500 minutes
Default
Setting
Notes
Off
Period device will

generate background
data. Set to Off to disable
generating of background
As Required
data. Only data points
with the background flag
set will be generated in
the background.
USB Interface
The USB communication port is connected using a standard USB cable with a type B connection to the relay and
type A to the PC.
The PC will require a suitable USB driver to be installed, this will be carried out automatically when the Reydisp
software is installed. When the Reydisp software is running with the USB cable connected to a device an
additional connection is shown. Connections to these devices are not shown when they are not connected.
The USB communication interface on the relay is labelled Com 2 and its associated settings are located in the
Data communications menu. When connecting to Reydisp using this connection the default settings can be used
without the need to first change any settings, otherwise the Com 2 port must be set to IEC60870-5-103 (the relay
address and baud rate do not need to be set).
Setting name
Range
Default
Setting
Notes
Station Address
1 254
1-254
An address between 1 and

254 must be given to identify
the relay
COM2-USB Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5101, MODBUS-RTU,
ASCII
IEC60870-5103
IEC608705-103
Reydisp software uses

IEC60870-5-103 to
communicate.
COM2 Mode
Local, Remote, Local Or

Remote
Local
Local
Selects port mode
USB Type A
socket on PC
USB Data Cable
Local
Engineer
Access
USB Type B
USB Type A
Figure 2-1
Communication to Front USB Port
2.1.4
RS485 Interface
An RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485
120 ohm screened twisted pair cable.
The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must
support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated
correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. This can be done via the internal 120 ohm
terminating resistor, which can be connected between 14 (A) and 18 (B) by fitting an external wire loop between
terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module.
The maximum number of relays that can be connected to the bus is 64.
The RS485 data comms link will be broken for that particular relay element if it is withdrawn from the case but the
chain of communication to the other relays is maintained.
An additional RS485 port is available as an ordering option. This port is wired to a dedicated terminal block at the
relay rear.
The following settings must be configured via the relay fascia or Reydisp when using the RS485 interface. The
shaded settings are only visible when DNP3.0 is selected.
Setting name
Station Address
Range
Default
Setting
1 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101
An address within the range

of the relevant protocol must
As Required be given to identify the relay.
Each relay must have a
unique address.
Sets the protocol used to
As Required communicate on the RS485
connection.
0 65534 for DNP3.0

OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
COM1-RS485 Protocol MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0
or IEC60870-5-101
IEC60870-5103
Notes
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
19200
38400
The baud rate set on all of

the relays connected to the
As Required same RS485 bus must be
the same as the one set on
the master device.
COM1-RS485 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN
EVEN
The parity set on all of the

relays connected to the
As Required same RS485 bus must be
the same and in accordance
with the master device.
COM1 Mode

Remote
Remote
Remote
COM1-RS485 Baud
Rate
Selects port mode
Rear terminals
Rear terminals
To Control
System
14
16
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
14
16
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
14
16
18
20
Ext Wire loop

(terminating
resistance) added
where permanent
drive from master
station available
To Control
System
Figure 2-2
20
18
Term.
16
14
+ve
-ve
20
RS485
GND
18
Term.
14
+ve
16
20
-ve
18
Term.
RS485
GND
16
-ve
14
+ve
GND
RS 485 Twisted pair Cable
RS485
Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485
2.1.5
Serial Fibre Optic Interface
When connecting via the optional fibre optic interface the selection of fibre-optic cable is important. Fibres must
TM
be terminated with ST (BFOC/2.5) connectors.
The recommended type is 62.5/125m glass fibre. Communication distances over 1 km are achievable using this
type of fibre.
A budget loss calculation should be made for all installations. The following table gives the Launch power and
receiver sensitivity of each of the fibre optic communication ports on the Argus relay when used with specific fibre
optic types.
Tx Launch Power (dB)
RX Receive Sensitivity (dB)
Min
Max
Min
Max
62.5/125m
-11.7
-15.7
-24
-9.2
1mm Polymer
-6.4
-10.4
-24
-9.2
200m PCS
-2.8
-6.8
-24
-9.2
Fibre Type
The main factors limiting transmission distances with fibre-optics are: Transmitter launch power.
Attenuation, based on light frequency, fibre material and fibre diameter. (Consult fibre manufacturers
data for actual values of fibre attenuation).
Number of intermediate connectors and splices. Fibre cables are supplied on reels of finite length which
may necessitate additional jointing. Typical losses at connectors are 0.5-1.0dB each. This allows for
normal age related deterioration. Typical losses at splices are <0.3dB. (Consult fibre manufacturers data
for actual values).
Receiver sensitivity. The light power at the receiver must be above the sensitivity of the receiver in order
that effective communication can occur.
A 3dB safety margin is usually allowed after the budget calculation is performed.
Following installation the actual losses should be measured for each fibre using a calibrated light source and
meter and the measured values compared to the calculated estimate before the relay is applied.
The following table can be used to record budget calculations:
A
Launch power
dB
Fibre Type
Loss (dB/km)
dB/km
Length
km
Total fibre loss (CxD)

dB
No. of Splices
Loss at each splice

dB
Total loss at splices (FxG)

dB
No. of connectors
Loss per connector

dB
Total loss at connectors (IxJ)

dB
Total losses (E+H+K)

dB
Receive power budget (A-L)

dB
Safety Margin
dB
Device Receive Sensitivity

dB
There are two optional fibre optic ports, com3 and com4, and when fitted the associated settings are available in
the Data Communication menu. To allow communication using either or both of these ports the relay settings
must be changed, via the fascia, in accordance with the method of connection and master device.
Setting name
Station Address
Range
Default
Setting
1 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101
An address within the range

of the relevant protocol must
As Required be given to identify the relay.
Each relay must have a
unique address.
As Required communicate on the fibre
optic connection Com3

0 65520 for DNP3.0
0
0
Notes
COM3 Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0
or IEC60870-5-101
COM3 Baud Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
57600
38400 57600

As Required same system must be the
same as the one set on the
master device.
COM3 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN
EVEN

same fibre optic system
As Required
must be the same and in
accordance with the master
device.
COM3 Line Idle
LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF
LIGHT OFF
Sets the idle state of the line

As Required in accordance with master
device
COM3 Data Echo
ON,OFF
OFF
Set to ON when relays are

As Required connected in a ring
configuration.
COM3 Mode

Remote
Remote
Remote
COM4 Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0
or IEC60870-5-101
IEC60870-5103

As Required communicate on the fibre
optic connection Com4.
COM4 Baud Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200

2400 4800 9600 19200
57600
38400
IEC60870-5103
Selects port mode

As Required same system must be the
same as the one set on the
master device.
Setting name
Range
Default
Setting
Notes
COM4 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN
EVEN

same fibre optic system
As Required
must be the same and in
accordance with the master
device.
COM4 Line Idle
LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF
LIGHT OFF
Sets the idle state of the line

As Required in accordance with master
device
COM4 Data Echo
ON,OFF
OFF
Set to ON when relays are

As Required connected in a ring
configuration.
COM4 Mode

Remote
Remote
Remote
Selects port mode
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
RS232 to Fibre
Optic Converter
RS232 straight
through cable
Computer or
Control System
USB or 9 pin male

D connector
Figure 2-3
25 pin male
D connector
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
62.5/125m fibre optic with ST
connectors
Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network
Figure 2-4
2.1.6
Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star
Network
Ethernet Interface
The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. Support for IEC
870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp
Manager software for interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data. Ordering
options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors.
Setting name
Range
Default
LAN Protocol
OFF, IEC60870-5-103
IEC60870-5-103
Setting
Notes
If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager
software via the Ethernet interface is not available.
Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions

3.1
Introduction
This section describes the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in the relays. This protocol is used for the
communication with Reydisp software and can also be used for communication with a suitable control system.
The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to
the masters commands. The implementation provides event information, time synchronising, commands and
measurands and also supports the transfer of disturbance records.
This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic RS232 and RS485)
and is the standard protocol used by the USB port. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports
regardless of protocol used.
Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication
Interface:Relay Address. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate.
Cause of Transmission
The cause of transmission (COT) column of the Information Number and Function table lists possible causes of
transmission for these frames. The following abbreviations are used:
Abbreviation
Description
SE
spontaneous event
test mode
GI
general interrogation
Loc
local operation
Rem
remote operation
Ack
command acknowledge
Nak
Negative command acknowledge
Note: Events listing a GI cause of transmission can be raised and cleared; other events are raised only.
ASDU Type
Abbreviation
1
Description
Time tagged message (monitor direction)
Time tagged message (relative time) (monitor direction)
3.1
Measurands I
Time-tagged measurands with relative time
Identification message
Time synchronisation
General Interrogation Initialization
Measurands II
20
General command
Information Number and Function

The following table lists information number and function definitions together with a description of the message
and function type and cause of transmission that can result in that message. Definitions with shaded area are not
available on all relay models.
Function
60
60
60
60
Information
Description
Number
4
5
6
7
Remote Mode
Out of Service Mode
Local Mode
Local & Remote Mode
ASDU
Type
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60
12
Control Received
SE
60
13
Command Received
SE
60
128
Cold Start
SE
60
129
Warm Start
SE
60
130
Re-start
SE
60
135
Trigger Storage
SE
60
136
Clear Waveform Records
SE
60
137
Clear Fault Records
SE
60
138
Clear Event Records
SE
60
140
Reset Demand metering
60
141
27 Sag SARFI
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
60
142
59Swell SARFI
SE, GI,
60
143
Reset SagSwell Count
SE
60
150
Battery Test Pass
SE
60
151
Battery Test Fail
SE
60
152
Battery Ohms High
SE
60
153
Battery Volts Low
SE, GI,
60
154
Battery Volts High
SE, GI,
60
155
Battery Healthy
SE, GI,
60
156
Battery Recovery Fail
SE
60
157
Battery Test
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60
160
Capacitor Ready
SE, GI,
60
161
Capacitor Test Pass
SE
60
162
Capacitor Test Fail
SE
60
163
Capacitor Recovery Fail
SE
60
164
Capacitor Test
60
170
60
171
SE
20
Ack, Nak
General Alarm 1
SE, GI,
General Alarm 2
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
172
General Alarm 3
60
173
General Alarm 4
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
60
174
General Alarm 5
SE, GI,
60
175
General Alarm 6
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
176
General Alarm 7
60
177
General Alarm 8
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
178
General Alarm 9
60
179
General Alarm 10
SE, GI,
60
180
General Alarm 11
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
181
General Alarm 12
60
182
Quick Logic E1
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
183
Quick Logic E2
60
184
Quick Logic E3
SE, GI,
60
185
Quick Logic E4
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
186
Quick Logic E5
60
187
Quick Logic E6
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
188
Quick Logic E7
60
189
Quick Logic E8
SE, GI,
60
190
Quick Logic E9
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
191
Quick Logic E10
60
192
Quick Logic E11
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
193
Quick Logic E12
60
194
Quick Logic E13
SE, GI,
60
195
Quick Logic E14
SE, GI,
SE, GI,
60
196
Quick Logic E15
60
197
Quick Logic E16
SE, GI,
SE
60
214
Function Key 1
60
215
Function Key 2
SE
60
216
Function Key 3
SE
SE
60
217
Function Key 4
60
218
Function Key 5
SE
SE
60
219
Function Key 6
60
220
Function Key 7
SE
60
221
Function Key 8
SE
SE
60
222
Function Key 9
60
223
Function Key 10
SE
SE
60
224
Function Key 11
60
225
5
Function Key 12
Binary Input 5
SE
70
SE, GI,
70
Binary Input 6
SE, GI,
70
Binary Input 7
SE, GI,
70
Binary Input 8
SE, GI,
70
Binary Input 9
SE, GI,
70
10
Binary Input 10
SE, GI,
70
11
Binary Input 11
SE, GI,
70
12
Binary Input 12
SE, GI,
70
13
Binary Input 13
SE, GI,
70
14
Binary Input 14
SE, GI,
70
15
Binary Input 15
SE, GI,
70
16
Binary Input 16
SE, GI,
70
17
Binary Input 17
SE, GI,
70
18
Binary Input 18
SE, GI,
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
70
19
Binary Input 19
SE, GI,
70
20
Binary Input 20
SE, GI,
70
21
Binary Input 21
SE, GI,
70
22
Binary Input 22
SE, GI,
70
23
Binary Input 23
SE, GI,
70
24
Binary Input 24
SE, GI,
70
25
Binary Input 25
SE, GI,
70
26
Binary Input 26
SE, GI,
70
27
Binary Input 27
SE, GI,
70
28
Binary Input 28
SE, GI,
70
29
Binary Input 29
SE, GI,
70
30
Binary Input 30
SE, GI,
70
31
Binary Input 31
SE, GI,
70
32
Binary Input 32
SE, GI,
70
33
Binary Input 33
SE, GI,
75
Virtual Input 1
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 2
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 3
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 4
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 5
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 6
SE, GI
75
Virtual Input 7
SE, GI
75
75
SE, GI
Virtual Input 8
Virtual Input 9
SE, GI
75
10
Virtual Input 10
SE, GI
75
11
Virtual Input 11
SE, GI
75
12
Virtual Input 12
SE, GI
75
13
Virtual Input 13
SE, GI
75
14
Virtual Input 14
SE, GI
75
15
Virtual Input 15
SE, GI
75
16
Virtual Input 16
SE, GI
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80
Binary Output 1
80
Binary Output 2
80
Binary Output 3
80
80
4
5
Binary Output 4
Binary Output 5
80
Binary Output 6
80
Binary Output 7
80
Binary Output 8
80
Binary Output 9
80
10
Binary Output 10
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
Function
Information
Description
Number
80
11
Binary Output 11
80
12
Binary Output 12
80
13
Binary Output 13
80
80
14
15
Binary Output 14
Binary Output 15
80
16
Binary Output 16
80
17
Binary Output 17
80
18
Binary Output 18
80
80
19
20
Binary Output 19
Binary Output 20
80
21
Binary Output 21
80
22
Binary Output 22
80
23
Binary Output 23
80
80
24
25
Binary Output 24
Binary Output 25
80
26
Binary Output 26
80
27
Binary Output 27
80
28
Binary Output 28
80
29
Binary Output 29
ASDU
Type
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI,
80
30
Binary Output 30
20
Ack, Nak
90
Led 1
SE, GI
90
Led 2
SE, GI
90
Led 3
SE, GI
90
Led 4
SE, GI
90
Led 5
SE, GI
90
Led 6
SE, GI
90
Led 7
SE, GI
90
Led 8
SE, GI
90
Led 9
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
90
10
Led 10
SE, GI
90
11
Led 11
SE, GI
90
12
Led 12
SE, GI
90
13
Led 13
SE, GI
90
14
Led 14
SE, GI
90
15
Led 15
SE, GI
90
16
Led 16
SE, GI
90
17
Led 17
SE, GI
90
18
Led 18
SE, GI
90
19
Led 19
SE, GI
90
20
Led 20
SE, GI
90
21
Led 21
SE, GI
90
22
Led 22
SE, GI
90
23
Led 23
SE, GI
90
24
Led 24
SE, GI
90
25
Led 25
SE, GI
90
26
Led 26
SE, GI
90
27
Led 27
SE, GI
90
28
Led 28
SE, GI
91
Led PU 1
SE, GI
91
Led PU 2
SE, GI
91
Led PU 3
SE, GI
91
Led PU 4
SE, GI
91
Led PU 5
SE, GI
91
Led PU 6
SE, GI
91
Led PU 7
SE, GI
91
Led PU 8
SE, GI
91
Led PU 9
SE, GI
91
10
Led PU 10
SE, GI
91
11
Led PU 11
SE, GI
91
12
Led PU 12
SE, GI
91
13
Led PU 13
SE, GI
91
14
Led PU 14
SE, GI
91
15
Led PU 15
SE, GI
91
16
Led PU 16
SE, GI
91
17
Led PU 17
SE, GI
91
18
Led PU 18
SE, GI
91
19
Led PU19
SE, GI
91
20
Led PU 20
SE, GI
91
21
Led PU 21
SE, GI
91
22
Led PU 22
SE, GI
91
23
Led PU 23
SE, GI
91
24
Led PU 24
SE, GI
91
25
Led PU 25
SE, GI
91
26
Led PU 26
SE, GI
91
27
Led PU 27
SE, GI
91
28
Led PU 28
SE, GI
160
Reset FCB
Reset FCB
160
Reset CU
Reset CU
160
Start/Restart
Start/Restart
Function
160
Information
Description
Number
5
Power On
160
16
Auto-reclose active (In/Out)
160
19
LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs)
160
22
Settings changed
160
23
Settings Group 1 Select
160
24
160
25
ASDU
Type
SE
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
160
26
20
Ack, Nak
160
27
Binary Input 1
SE, GI
160
28
Binary Input 2
SE, GI
160
29
Binary Input 3
SE, GI
160
30
Binary Input 4
SE, GI
160
36
Trip circuit fail
SE, GI
160
38
VT Fuse Failure
SE, GI
160
51
Earth Fault Forward/Line
SE, GI
160
52
Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar
SE, GI
160
64
Starter/Pick Up L1
SE, GI
160
65
Starter/Pick Up L2
SE, GI
160
66
Starter/Pick Up L3
SE, GI
160
67
Starter/Pick Up N
SE, GI
160
68
General Trip
SE
160
69
Trip L1
SE
160
70
Trip L2
SE
160
71
Trip L3
SE
160
73
Fault Impedance (Secondary Ohms)
SE
160
74
Fault Forward/Line
SE, GI
160
75
Fault Reverse/Busbar
SE, GI
160
84
General Starter/Pick Up
SE, GI
160
85
SE
160
90
Trip I>
SE
160
91
Trip I>>
SE
160
92
Trip In>
SE
160
93
Trip In>>
SE
160
128
CB on by auto reclose
SE, GI
160
130
Reclose Blocked
SE,GI
183
Data Lost
SE
183
10
51-1
SE, GI
183
11
50-1
SE, GI
183
14
51G-1
SE, GI
183
15
50G-1
SE, GI
183
16
51-2
SE, GI
183
17
50-2
SE, GI
183
20
51G-2
SE, GI
183
21
50G-2
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
183
22
51-3
183
23
50-3
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
26
51G-3
SE, GI
183
27
50G-3
SE, GI
183
28
51-4
SE, GI
183
29
50-4
SE, GI
183
32
51G-4
SE, GI
183
33
50G-4
SE, GI
183
34
50BF Stage 2
SE, GI
183
35
49 Alarm
SE, GI
183
36
49 Trip
SE, GI
183
40
CT Supervision
SE, GI
183
41
51SEF-1
SE, GI
183
42
50SEF-1
SE, GI
183
43
51SEF-2
SE, GI
183
44
50SEF-2
SE, GI
183
45
51SEF-3
SE, GI
183
46
50SEF-3
SE, GI
183
47
51SEF-4
SE, GI
183
48
50SEF-4
SE, GI
183
49
SEF Out/In
183
50
46IT
183
51
46DT
SE, GI
183
52
64H
SE, GI
183
53
EF Out/In
183
54
SEF Forward/Line
SE.GI
20
Ack,Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
20
Ack,Nak
SE, GI
183
55
SEF Reverse/Busbar
SE, GI
183
56
50BF Stage 1
SE, GI
183
60
47-1
SE, GI
183
61
47-2
SE, GI
183
62
37-1
SE, GI
183
63
37-2
SE, GI
183
64
37G-1
SE, GI
183
65
37G-2
SE, GI
183
66
37SEF-1
SE, GI
183
67
37SEF-2
SE, GI
183
70
46BC
SE, GI
183
81
27/59-1
SE, GI
183
82
27/59-2
SE, GI
183
83
27/59-3
SE, GI
183
84
27/59-4
SE, GI
183
85
59NIT
SE, GI
183
86
59NDT
SE, GI
183
87
Vx27/59
SE, GI
183
90
81-1
SE, GI
183
91
81-2
SE, GI
183
92
81-3
SE, GI
183
93
81-4
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
183
96
81HBL2
SE, GI
183
101
Trip Circuit Fail 1
SE, GI
183
102
Trip Circuit Fail 2
SE, GI
183
103
Trip Circuit Fail 3
183
110
Settings Group 5 Selected
183
111
183
112
183
113
183
114
SE, GI
SE, GI
20
1
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
Close CB Failed
SE
183
115
Open CB Failed
SE
183
183
116
Reclaim
SE, GI
117
Lockout
SE, GI
183
119
Successful DAR Close
SE
183
120
Successful Man Close
SE
183
121
Hotline Working
122
Inst Protection Out
183
123
183
183
183
SE,GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE,GI
20
Ack, Nak
CB Total Trip Count
SE, GI
124
CB Delta Trip Count
SE, GI
125
CB Count to AR Block
SE, GI
183
126
Reset CB Trip Count Maint
183
127
Reset CB Trip Count Delta
183
128
Reset CB Trip Count AR Block
183
129
I^2t CB Wear
183
130
Reset I^2t CB Wear
183
131
79 AR In Progress
183
132
183
133
Reset CB Frequent Ops Count
183
134
CB LO Handle Ops Count
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
1
1
SE, GI
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE,
SE
183
135
Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count
20
Ack, Nak
183
136
CB On by Manual Close
SE,G!
183
140
Cold Load Active
SE,GI
183
141
P/F Inst Protection Inhibited
SE, GI
183
142
E/F Inst Protection Inhibited
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
143
SEF Inst Protection Inhibited
183
144
Ext Inst Protection Inhibited
SE, GI
183
150
LOV Primed
SE, GI
183
151
LOV Trip
SE, GI
183
152
LOV Close
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
183
153
LOV Inhibit Fast Protection
SE, GI
183
154
LOV Force Fast Protection
SE, GI
183
155
LOV In Progress
SE, GI
183
156
LOV Backfeed Fail
SE
183
157
LOV Successful
SE
183
158
LOV 1x Trip and Lockout
SE, GI
183
159
LOV Fail
SE
183
160
LOV-A Live
SE, GI
183
161
LOV-X Live
SE, GI
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
183
162
LOV Out
183
163
Trip Time Alarm
SE, GI
SE
183
164
Close Circuit Fail 1
183
165
SE
SE
183
166
183
167
Close Circuit Fail
SE
183
168
Distance To Fault
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
169
Distance To Fault %
183
183
170
Fault Reactance
SE, GI
172
Act Energy Exp
SE
183
173
Act Energy Imp
SE
183
174
React Energy Exp
SE
SE
183
175
React Energy Imp
183
176
Reset Energy Meters
183
177
183
178
SE
20
Ack, Nak
Active Exp Meter Reset
SE
Active Imp Meter Reset
SE
SE
183
179
Reactive Exp Meter Reset
183
180
Reactive Imp Meter Reset
SE
SE
183
181
CB Total Trip Count
183
182
CB Delta Trip Count
SE
183
183
SE
SE
183
184
CB Freq Ops Count
183
185
LOV A Live
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
186
LOV B Live
183
183
187
LOV C Live
SE, GI
188
LOV X Live
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
189
LOV Y Live
183
190
LOV Z Live
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
191
LOV A
183
192
LOV B
SE, GI
183
193
LOV C
SE, GI
SE, GI
183
194
LOV X
183
195
LOV Y
SE, GI
LOV Z
SE, GI
183
196
183
197
SE
183
198
25 Check Sync
SE, GI
183
199
25 System Sync
SE, GI
183
200
25 Close On Zero
SE, GI
183
201
25 System Split
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
183
202
25 Live Line
SE, GI
183
203
25 Live Bus
SE, GI
183
204
25 Line U/V
SE, GI
183
205
25 Bus U/V
SE, GI
183
206
25 Voltage Dif >
SE, GI
183
207
25 CS Slip Freq >
SE, GI
183
208
25 SS Slip Freq >
SE, GI
183
209
25 COZ Slip Freq >
SE, GI
183
210
25 In Sync
SE, GI
183
211
25 CS In Progress
SE, GI
183
212
25 SS In Progress
SE, GI
183
213
25 COZ In Progress
SE, GI
183
214
25 System Split LO
SE, GI
183
215
60VTF-Bus
SE, GI
183
217
Man Override Sync
1
20
SE, GI
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
183
218
79 Override Sync
1
20
183
219
Dead Line Close
SE, GI
183
183
220
221
Dead Bus Close

Wattmetric Po>
1
1
SE, GI
183
222
37-PhA
SE, GI
183
223
37-PhB
SE, GI
183
224
37-PhC
SE, GI
183
231
50BF-PhA
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
183
232
50BF-PhB
SE, GI
183
233
50BF-PhC
SE, GI
183
234
50BF-EF
SE, GI
183
183
183
183
183
183
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
235
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

In Fault Current
Ia Fault Current
Ib Fault Current
Ic Fault Current
Ig Fault Current
Isef Fault Current
Va Fault Voltage
Vb Fault Voltage
Vc Fault Voltage
Close CB-A Failed
Open CB-A Failed
CB-A Reclaim
CB-A Lockout
CB-A Successful Close
CB-A Successful DAR Close
CB-A Successful Man Close
CB-A Total Trip Count
CB-A Delta Trip Count
CB-A Count To AR Block
184
11
Reset CB-A Total Trip Count
184
12
Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count
184
13
Reset CB-A Count to AR Block
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
20
1
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Function
Information
Description
Number
184
14
CB-A I^2t Wear
184
15
Reset CB-A I^2t Wear
184
184
16
17
CB-A 79 AR In progress
CB-A Frequent Ops Count
184
18
Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count
184
19
CB-A LO Handle Ops Count
184
20
Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count
184
184
184
184
184
184
21
22
23
24
25
26
PhA Inst Protection Inhibited

CB-A Blocked By Interlocking
CB-A on by auto reclose
CB-A Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole A
50BF-2 Pole A
184
27
CB-A Trip & Lockout
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
28
29
30
31
32
33
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Cap-A Ready
Cap-A Test Pass
Cap-A Test Fail
Cap-A Recovery Fail
Cap-A Test
CB-A Deadtime Running
Close CB-B Failed
Open CB-B Failed
CB-B Reclaim
CB-B Lockout
CB-B Successful Close
CB-B Successful DAR Close
CB-B Successful Man Close
CB-B Total Trip Count
CB-B Delta Trip Count
CB-B Count To AR Block
184
61
Reset CB-B Total Trip Count
184
62
Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count
184
63
Reset CB-B Count to AR Block
184
64
CB-B I^2t Wear
184
65
Reset CB-B I^2t Wear
184
184
66
67
CB-B 79 AR In progress
CB-B Frequent Ops Count
184
68
Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count
184
69
CB-B LO Handle Ops Count
184
70
Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count
184
184
184
184
184
184
71
72
73
74
75
76
PhB Inst Protection Inhibited

CB-B Blocked By Interlocking
CB-B on by auto reclose
CB-B Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole B
50BF-2 Pole B
ASDU
Type
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
Cap-C Ready
Cap-C Test Pass
Cap-C Test Fail
Cap-C Recovery Fail
Cap-C Test
Pole Discrepancy
CB-C Deadtime Running
Three Pole Trip Select
Force 3Pole Trip
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
20
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
SE
SE
SE
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
SE, GI
CB Phase A Trip Count

CB Phase B Trip Count
CB Phase C Trip Count
CB E/F Trip Count
Reset CB Phase A Trip Count
1
1
1
1
1
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE
184
77
CB-B Trip & Lockout
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
78
79
80
81
82
83
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Cap-B Ready
Cap-B Test Pass
Cap-B Test Fail
Cap-B Recovery Fail
Cap-B Test
CB-B Deadtime Running
Close CB-C Failed
Open CB-C Failed
CB-C Reclaim
CB-C Lockout
CB-C Successful Close
CB-C Successful DAR Close
CB-C Successful Man Close
CB-C Total Trip Count
CB-C Delta Trip Count
CB-C Count To AR Block
184
111
Reset CB-C Total Trip Count
184
112
Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count
184
113
Reset CB-C Count to AR Block
184
114
CB-C I^2t Wear
184
115
Reset CB-C I^2t Wear
184
184
116
117
CB-C 79 AR In progress
CB-C Frequent Ops Count
184
118
Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count
184
119
CB-C LO Handle Ops Count
184
120
Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count
184
184
184
184
184
184
121
122
123
124
125
126
PhC Inst Protection Inhibited

CB-C Blocked By Interlocking
CB-C on by auto reclose
CB-C Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole C
50BF-2 Pole C
184
127
CB-C Trip & Lockout
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
150
151
185
185
185
185
185
1
2
3
4
5
Function
Information
Description
Number
185
Reset CB Phase B Trip Count
185
Reset CB Phase C Trip Count
185
Reset CB E/F Trip Count
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

CB E/F Trip Count
ABC Live
A Live
B Live
C Live
XYZ Live
X Live
Y Live
Z Live
ABC Dead
A Dead
B Dead
C Dead
XYZ Dead
X Dead
Y Dead
Z Dead
+ve P (3P)
-ve P (3P)
+ve Q (3P)
-ve Q (3P)
Vx 27/59-1
Vx 27/59-2
Vx 27/59-3
Vx 27/59-4
27/59 PhA
27/59 PhB
27/59 PhC
Vx 27/59 PhA
Vx 27/59 PhB
Vx 27/59 PhC
200
CB 1
200
CB 1 Open
200
CB 1 Closed
200
11
CB-A
200
12
CB-B
200
13
CB-C
200
14
CB-A Open
ASDU
Type
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
Ack, Nak
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE,GI
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Function
Information
Description
Number
200
15
CB-A Closed
200
16
CB-B Open
200
17
CB-B Closed
200
18
CB-C Open
200
19
CB-C Closed
200
150
User SP Command 1
200
151
User SP Command 2
200
152
User SP Command 3
200
153
User SP Command 4
200
154
User SP Command 5
200
155
User SP Command 6
200
156
User SP Command 7
200
157
User SP Command 8
200
158
User DP Command 1
200
159
User DP Command 2
200
160
User SP Command 3
200
161
User SP Command 4
200
162
User SP Command5
200
163
User SP Command 6
200
164
User DP Command 7
200
165
User DP Command 8
200
200
CB 1 Trip & Reclose
200
201
CB 1 Trip & Lockout
200
252
Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO
200
253
Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO
200
254
Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO
ASDU
Type
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE
20
Ack, Nak
SE
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
SE, GI
Ack, Nak
Function
Information
Description
Number
ASDU
Type
200
255
Blocked by Interlocking
SE,GI
255
Time Synchronisation
Time Synchronisation
255
GI Initiation
End of GI
255
End of GI
End of GI
Description
Function
Type
Measurand
Information
Function
Number
Measurand IL1,2,3, V L1,2,3, P, Q, F, VL1-2,L2-3,L3-1
183
183
148
216
IL1 (2.4 x)
IL2 (2.4 x)
IL3 (2.4 x)
VL1 (1.2 x)
VL2 (1.2 x)
VL3 (1.2 x)
P (2.4 x)
Q (2.4 x)
F (1.2 x)
VL1 -2(1.2 x)
VL2 -3(1.2 x)
VL3 -1(1.2 x)
Measurand Vx, Bus Freq, Phase Diff, Diff
Volts and Slip Freq (1.2 x)
Note Phase difference is stored as -1 to +1
as a multiple of 180deg nominal
Cyclic Refresh rate 5

seconds or value change
greater than 1%
Cyclic Refresh rate 5

seconds or value change
greater than 1%
Disturbance Recorder Actual Channel (ACC) Numbers

Function
182
182
ACC Number
0
Description
Global
V1
182
V2
182
V3
182
Vx
182
Ia
182
Ib
182
Ic
182
Ig1
182
Not Used
182
10
Vy
182
11
Vz
V1, V2 and V3 are dependent on Phase Voltage Config setting and represent Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab, Vbc, V0 or
Va, Vb, Vc
Section 4: Modbus Definitions

4.1
Introduction
This section describes the MODBUS-RTU protocol implementation in the relays.

communication with a suitable control system.
This protocol is used for
This protocol can be set to use the Fibre Optic, RS232 and RS485 ports. The relay can communicate
simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used.
Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication
Interface:Relay Address. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate.
Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models.
Coils (Read Write Binary values)

Address
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
Description
Binary Output 1
Binary Output 2
Binary Output 3
Binary Output 4
Binary Output 5
Binary Output 6
Binary Output 7
Binary Output 8
Binary Output 9
Binary Output 10
Binary Output 11
Binary Output 12
Binary Output 13
Binary Output 14
Binary Output 15
Binary Output 16
Binary Output 17
Binary Output 18
Binary Output 19
Binary Output 20
Binary Output 21
Binary Output 22
Binary Output 23
Binary Output 24
Binary Output 25
Binary Output 26
Binary Output 27
Binary Output 28
Binary Output 29
Binary Output 30
Binary Output 31
Binary Output 32
LED Reset (Write only location)
Settings Group 1
Settings Group 2
Settings Group 3
Settings Group 4
Settings Group 5
Settings Group 6
Settings Group 7
Settings Group 8
Circuit Breaker 1
Address
00110
00111
00112
00113
00114
00115
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
00124
00125
00126
00127
00128
00129
00130
00131
00132
00133
00134
00135
00136
00137
00138
00139
00140
00141
00142
00143
00144
00145
00146
00147
00148
00149
00150
00151
00152
00153
00154
00155
00156
00157
00158
00159
00160
00161
00162
00163
00164
00200
00201
00202
00203
00204
00205
00206
Description
CB 1 Trip & Reclose (Write only location)
CB 1 Trip & Lockout (Write only location)
Auto-reclose on/off
Hot Line Working on/off
E/F off/on
SEF off/on
Inst Protection off/on
LOV off/on
Reset CB Total Trip Count (write only location)
Reset CB Delta Trip Count (write only location)
Reset CB Count To AR Block (write only location)
Reset CB Frequent Ops Count (write only location)
Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count (write only location)
Reset I^2t CB Wear (write only location)
Battery Test (write only location)
Capacitor Test (write only location)
Reset Demand Metering (write only location)
CB-A
CB-B
CB-C
CB-A Trip & Lockout
CB-B Trip & Lockout
CB-C Trip & Lockout
Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO
Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO
Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO
Reset CB-A Count To AR Block
Reset CB-B Count To AR Block
Reset CB-C Count To AR Block
Reset Energy Metering (write only location)
Remote Mode
Service Mode
Local Mode
Local & Remote
Manual Override Synchronising On/Off
79 Override Synchronising On/Off
Reset CB Phase A Trip Count, write only location
Reset CB Phase B Trip Count, write only location
Reset CB Phase C Trip Count, write only location
Reset E/F Trip Count, write only location
User SP Command 1
User SP Command 2
User SP Command 3
User SP Command 4
User SP Command 5
User SP Command 6
User SP Command 7
Address
00207
00208
00209
00210
00211
00212
00213
00214
00215
Description
User SP Command 8
User DP Command 1
User DP Command 2
User DP Command 3
User DP Command 4
User DP Command 5
User DP Command 6
User DP Command 7
User DP Command 8
Inputs (Read Only Binary values)

Address
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
10021
10022
10023
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
10031
10032
10033
10034
10035
10036
10037
10038
10039
10040
10041
10042
10043
10044
10045
10046
10047
10048
10049
Description
Binary Input 1
Binary Input 2
Binary Input 3
Binary Input 4
Binary Input 5
Binary Input 6
Binary Input 7
Binary Input 8
Binary Input 9
Binary Input 10
Binary Input 11
Binary Input 12
Binary Input 13
Binary Input 14
Binary Input 15
Binary Input 16
Binary Input 17
Binary Input 18
Binary Input 19
Binary Input 20
Binary Input 21
Binary Input 22
Binary Input 23
Binary Input 24
Binary Input 25
Binary Input 26
Binary Input 27
Binary Input 28
Binary Input 29
Binary Input 30
Binary Input 31
Binary Input 32
Binary Input 33
Binary Input 34
Binary Input 35
Binary Input 36
Binary Input 37
Binary Input 38
Binary Input 39
Binary Input 40
Binary Input 41
Binary Input 42
Binary Input 43
Binary Input 44
Binary Input 45
Binary Input 46
Binary Input 47
Binary Input 48
Binary Input 49
Address
10050
10102
10103
10104
10105
10111
10112
10113
10114
10115
10116
10117
10118
10119
10120
10121
10122
10123
10126
10127
10128
10129
10132
10133
10134
10135
10138
10139
10140
10141
10144
10145
10146
10147
10148
10149
10150
10151
10152
10153
10154
10155
10156
10157
10158
10159
10160
10161
10162
10163
10164
10167
10168
10169
10170
10171
10172
10173
10174
10175
10176
10177
10178
Description
Binary Input 50
Remote mode
Service mode
Local mode
Local & Remote mode
Trip Circuit Fail
A-Starter
B-Starter
C-Starter
General Starter
VTS Alarm
Start/Pick Up N
Fault Forward/Line
51-1
50-1
51G-1
50G-1
51-2
50-2
51G-2
50G-2
51-3
50-3
51G-3
50G-3
51-4
50-4
51G-4
50G-4
50BF Stage 2
49 Alarm
49 Trip
60 CTS
46IT
46DT
47-1
47-2
46BC
27/59-1
27/59-2
27/59-3
27/59-4
59NIT
59NDT
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-4
64H
37-1
37-2
Vx27/59
AR Active
CB on by AR
Reclaim
Lockout
Hot Line Working
Inst Protection Out
CB Trip Count Maint
CB Trip Count Delta
Address
10179
10180
10181
10182
10183
10184
10185
10186
10187
10189
10190
10191
10192
10193
10194
10195
10196
10197
10198
10199
10200
10201
10202
10203
10204
10205
10206
10207
10208
10209
10210
10211
10212
10213
10214
10215
10216
10217
10218
10219
10220
10221
10222
10223
10224
10225
10226
10227
10228
10229
10230
10231
10232
10233
10234
10235
10236
10237
10238
Description
CB Trip Count Lockout
I^2t CB Wear
79 AR In Progress
Cold Load Active
E/F Protection Out
Battery Test Pass
Battery Test Fail
Battery Ohms High
Battery Volts Low
Battery Volts High
Battery Healthy
Battery Test
Capacitor Ready
Capacitor Test Pass
Capacitor Test Fail
Capacitor Test
51SEF-1
50SEF-1
51SEF-2
50SEF-2
51SEF-3
50SEF-3
51SEF-4
50SEF-4
SEF Out
Trip Circuit Fail 1
Trip Circuit Fail 2
Trip Circuit Fail 3
CB Total Trip Count
CB Delta Trip Count
CB Count to AR Block
I^2t CB Wear
CB Open
CB Closed
CB-A Reclaim
CB-A Lockout
CB-A I^2t Wear
50BF-1 Pole A
50BF-2 Pole A
Cap-A Ready
Cap-A Test Pass
Cap-A Test Fail
Cap-A Recovery Fail
Cap-A Test
CB-A Open
Address
10239
10240
10241
10242
10243
10244
10245
10246
10247
10248
10249
10250
10251
10252
10253
10254
10255
10256
10257
10258
10259
10260
10261
10262
10263
10264
10265
10266
10267
10268
10269
10270
10271
10272
10273
10274
10275
10276
10277
10278
10279
10280
10281
10282
10288
10289
10290
10291
10292
10293
10294
10295
10296
10297
10298
10299
10300
10301
10302
10303
10304
10305
10306
Description
CB-A Closed
CB-B Reclaim
CB-B Lockout
CB-B I^2t Wear
50BF-1 Pole B
50BF-2 Pole B
Cap-B Ready
Cap-B Test Pass
Cap-B Test Fail
Cap-B Recovery Fail
Cap-B Test
CB-B Open
CB-B Closed
CB-C Reclaim
CB-C Lockout
CB-C I^2t Wear
50BF-1 Pole C
50BF-2 Pole C
Cap-C Ready
Cap-C Test Pass
Cap-C Test Fail
Cap-C Recovery Fail
Cap-C Test
CB-C Open
CB-C Closed
Pole Discrepancy
LOV Primed
LOV Trip
LOV Close
LOV In Progress
SEF Forward/Line
SEF Reverse/Busbar
General Alarm 1
General Alarm 2
General Alarm 3
General Alarm 4
General Alarm 5
General Alarm 6
General Alarm 7
General Alarm 8
General Alarm 9
General Alarm 10
General Alarm 11
General Alarm 12
Quick Logic E1
Quick Logic E2
Quick Logic E3
Quick Logic E4
Quick Logic E5
Address
10307
10308
10309
10310
10311
10312
10313
10314
10315
10316
10317
Description
Quick Logic E6
Quick Logic E7
Quick Logic E8
Quick Logic E9
Quick Logic E10
Quick Logic E11
Quick Logic E12
Quick Logic E13
Quick Logic E14
Quick Logic E15
Quick Logic E16
10335
10336
10337
10338
10339
81HBL2
37G-1
37G-2
37SEF-1
37SEF-2
10340
10341
10342
10343
10344
10345
10346
10347
10348
10349
10350
10351
10352
10353
10354
10355
10356
10357
10358
10359
10360
10361
10362
10363
10364
10365
10366
LOV A Live
LOV B Live
LOV C Live
LOV X Live
LOV Y Live
LOV Z Live
LOV A
LOV B
LOV C
LOV X
LOV Y
LOV Z
25 System Split
25 Live Line
25 Live Bus
25 Line U/V
25 Bus U/V
25 Voltage Dif >
25 CS Slip Freq >
25 SS Slip Freq >
25 COZ Slip Freq >
25 In Sync
25 CS In Progress
25 SS In Progress
25 COZ In Progress
25 System Split LO
60VTF-Bus
10367
10368
10369
10370
10371
50BF-1
Wattmetric Po>
37-PhA
37-PhB
37-PhC
10382
Last Trip Lockout
10386
10387
10388
10389
10390
10391
10392
10393
10394

CB Phase CTrip Count
CB E/F Trip Count
Trip PhA
Trip PhB
Trip PhC
+ve P (3P)
-ve P (3P)
Address
10395
10396
10397
10398
10399
10400
10401
10402
10403
10404
10405
10406
10407
10408
10409
Description
+ve Q (3P)
-ve Q (3P)
Vx 27/59-1
Vx 27/59-2
Vx 27/59-3
Vx 27/59-4
27/59 PhA
27/59 PhB
27/59 PhC
Vx 27/59 PhA
Vx 27/59 PhB
Vx 27/59 PhC
79 Last Trip Lockout A
79 Last Trip Lockout B
79 Last Trip Lockout C
10501
10502
10503
10504
10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510
10511
10512
10513
10514
10515
10516
Virtual Input 1
Virtual Input 2
Virtual Input 3
Virtual Input 4
Virtual Input 5
Virtual Input 6
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
Virtual Input 9
Virtual Input 10
Virtual Input 11
Virtual Input 12
Virtual Input 13
Virtual Input 14
Virtual Input 15
Virtual Input 16
10601
10602
10603
10604
10605
10606
10607
10608
10609
10610
10611
10612
10613
10614
10615
10616
10617
10618
10619
10620
10621
10622
10623
10624
10625
10626
10627
10628
Led 1
Led 2
Led 3
Led 4
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
Led 9
Led 10
Led 11
Led 12
Led 13
Led 14
Led 15
Led 16
Led 17
Led 18
Led 19
Led 20
Led 21
Led 22
Led 23
Led 24
Led 25
Led 26
Led 27
Led 28
10701
Led PU 1
Address
10702
10703
10704
10705
10706
10707
10708
10709
10710
10711
10712
10713
10714
10715
10716
10717
10718
10719
10720
10721
10722
10723
10724
10725
10726
10727
10728
10800
10801
10802
10803
10804
10805
10806
Description
Led PU 2
Led PU 3
Led PU 4
Led PU 5
Led PU 6
Led PU 7
Led PU 8
Led PU 9
Led PU 10
Led PU 11
Led PU 12
Led PU 13
Led PU 14
Led PU 15
Led PU 16
Led PU 17
Led PU 18
Led PU 19
Led PU 20
Led PU 21
Led PU 22
Led PU 23
Led PU 24
Led PU 25
Led PU 26
Led PU 27
Led PU 28
Cold Start
Warm Start
Re-Start
Power On
SW Forced Restart
Unexpected Restart
Reset Start Count
Input Registers
Address
Name
30001
No.of Events In Store
30002
Event Record
30010
Vab Primary
30012
Vbc Primary
30014
Vca Primary
30016
Phase A Primary Volt
30018
Phase B Primary Volt
30020
Phase C Primary Volt
30022
Phase a Secondary Volt
30024
Phase b Secondary Volt
30026
Phase c Secondary Volt
30034
Phase ab Nominal Volt
30036
Phase bc Nominal Volt
30038
Phase ca Nominal Volt
30040
Phase a Nominal Volt
30042
Phase b Nominal Volt
30044
Phase c Nominal Volt
30048
Vzps
30050
Vpps
30052
Vnps
30054
Vzps
30056
Vpps
30058
Vnps
30060
Frequency
30064
Phase A Primary Curr
Format
1 Register
8 Registers3
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Multiplier
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Vab kV
Vbc kV
Vca kV
Va kV
Vb kV
Vc kV
Va V
Vb V
Vc V
Vab Degrees
Vbc Degrees
Vca Degrees
Va Degrees
Vb Degrees
Vc Degrees
Vzps xVnom
Vpps xVnom
Vnps xVnom
Vzps Degrees
Vpps Degrees
Vnps Degrees
Hz
Ia kA
Address
30066
30068
30070
30072
30074
30076
30078
30080
30082
30084
30086
30088
30090
30092
30094
30096
30098
30100
30102
30104
30106
30108
30110
30112
30114
30116
30118
30120
30122
30124
30126
30128
30130
30132
30134
30136
30138
30140
30142
30144
30146
30148
30150
30152
30153
30154
30167
30168
30169
30170
30172
30174
30176
30178
30180
30182
30184
30186
30193
30195
30197
30199
30201
Name
Phase B Primary Curr
Phase C Primary Curr
Phase a Secondary Curr
Phase b Secondary Curr
Phase c Secondary Curr
Phase A Nominal
Phase B Nominal
Phase C Nominal
Phase A Nominal
Phase B Nominal
Phase C Nominal
In Primary
In Secondary
In Nominal
Ig Primary
Ig Secondary
Ig Nominal
Izps Nominal
Ipps Nominal
Inps Nominal
Izps Nominal
Ipps Nominal
Inps Nominal
Active Power A
Active Power B
Active Power C
3P Power
Reactive Power A
Reactive Power B
Reactive Power C
3P Reactive Power Q
Apparent Power A
Apparent Power B
Apparent Power C
3P Apparent Power
Power Factor A
Power Factor B
Power Factor C
3P Power Factor
Active Energy Export
Active Energy Import
Reactive Energy Export
Reactive Energy Import
Thermal Status Ph A
Thermal Status Ph B
Thermal Status Ph C
Fault Records
Event Records
Waveform Records
Vab Secondary Volt
Vbc Secondary Volt
Vca Secondary Volt
VN Primary
VN Secondary
VN Secondary
Vx Primary
Vx Secondary
Vx Secondary
Ia Max Demand
Ib Max Demand
Ic Max Demand
P 3P Max
Q 3P Max
Format
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
1
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Multiplier
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.000001
0.000001
Description
Ib kA
Ic kA
Ia A
Ib A
Ic A
Ia x Inom
Ib x Inom
Ic x Inom
Ia Degrees
Ib Degrees
Ic Degrees
IN kA
IN A
IN xInom
IG kA
IG A
IG xInom
Izps xIn
Ipps xIn
Inps xIn
Izps Degrees
Ipps Degrees
Inps Degrees
A Phase MW
B Phase MW
C Phase MW
3 Phase MW
A Phase MVAr
B Phase MVAr
C Phase MVAr
3 Phase MVAr
A Phase MVA
B Phase MVA
C Phase MVA
3 Phase MVA
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
3 Phase
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
%
%
%
No. of Fault Records
No. of Event Records
No. of Waveform Recs
Vab V
Vbc V
Vca V
VN kV
VN V
VN Degrees
Vx kV
Vx V
Vx Degrees
Ia kA
Ib kA
Ic kA
Power Max Demand
VARs Max Demand
Address
30203
30205
30207
30209
30211
Name
Ig Max
I sef Max
Isef Primary
Isef Secondary
Isef Nominal
Format
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Multiplier
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Ig Max Demand
Isef Max Demand
Isef A
Isef A
Isef xIn
30213
30215
30217
30219
30223
30225
30229
30231
30233
30235
30237
30239
Fault Distance Percent

Fault Reactance
Vy Primary
Vy Secondary
Vz Primary
Vz Secondary
Vxy Primary
Vyz Primary
Vzx Primary
Vxy Nominal
Vyz Nominal
Vzx Nominal
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Fault Reactance
Vy kV
Vy V
Vz kV
Vz V
Vxy kV
Vyz kV
Vzx kV
Vxy Degrees
Vyz Degrees
Vzx Degrees
30241
30243
30245
30247
30249
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB LO Handle Ops
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB Freq Ops Count
CB LO Handle Ops
30251
30253
30255
30257
30259
30261
30263
30265
30267
30269
30271
30273
30275
30277
30279
30281
30283
30285
30287
30289
30291
Sag SIARFI Pole1

Sag SMARFI Pole1
Sag STARFI Pole1
Sag SIARFI Pole2
Sag SMARFI Pole2
Sag STARFI Pole2
Sag SIARFI Pole3
Sag SMARFI Pole3
Sag STARFI Pole3
Interrupt Pole1
Interrupt Pole2
Interrupt Pole3
Swell SIARFI Pole1
Swell SMARFI Pole1
Swell STARFI Pole1
Swell SIARFI Pole2
Swell SMARFI Pole2
Swell STARFI Pole2
Swell SIARFI Pole3
Swell SMARFI Pole3
Swell STARFI Pole3
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
30293
30295
30297
30299
Bus Freq
Phase Diff
Slip Freq
Voltage Diff
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
1
1
1
1
Vx Frequency
25 Phase Diff
25 Slip Freq
25 Voltage Diff
30301
30303
30305
30307
30309
30311
30313
30317
30319
30321
30323
Ia Last Trip
Ib Last Trip
Ic Last Trip
Va Last Trip
Vb Last Trip
Vc Last Trip
In Last Trip
Isef Last Trip
V Phase A Max
V Phase B Max
V Phase C Max
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ia Fault
Ib Fault
Ic Fault
Va Fault
Vb Fault
Vc Fault
In Fault
Isef Fault
Va Max Demand
Vb Max Demand
Vc Max Demand
Sag SIARFI Pole1

Sag SMARFI Pole1
Sag STARFI Pole1
Sag SIARFI Pole2
Sag SMARFI Pole2
Sag STARFI Pole2
Sag SIARFI Pole3
Sag SMARFI Pole3
Sag STARFI Pole3
P1 Interrupts
P2 Interrupts
P3 Interrupts
Swell SIARFI Pole1
Swell SMARFI Pole1
Swell STARFI Pole1
Swell SIARFI Pole2
Swell SMARFI Pole2
Swell STARFI Pole2
Swell SIARFI Pole3
Swell SMARFI Pole3
Swell STARFI Pole3
Address
30325
30327
30329
30331
30333
30335
30337
Name
V Phase AB Max
V Phase BC Max
V Phase CA Max
CB Ph A Trip Count
CB Ph BTrip Count
CB Ph CTrip Count
CB E/F Trip Count
Format
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
Multiplier
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Vab Max Demand
Vbc Max Demand
Vca Max Demand
CB EF Trip Count
30341
30342
30343
30344
30345
30346
30347
30348
30349
30350
30352
LED1-n
LED1-n
INP1-n
INP1-n
OUT1-n
OUT1-n
VRT1-n
VRT1-n
EQN1-n
EQN1-n
Fault Distance PerUnit
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
30354
30356
30358
30360
30362
30364
30366
30380
30382
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A Remaining
CB Wear B Remaining
CB Wear C Remaining
CB Wear Minimum
StartCount
Start Count Target
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
1
1
1
1
1
1
Led 1-16 status

Led 17-32 status
Input 1-16 status
Input 17-32 status
Output 1-16 status
Output 17-32 status
Virtual 1-16 status
Virtual 17-32 status
Equation 1-16 status
Units defined in relay
setting
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A Remaining
CB Wear B Remaining
CB Wear C Remaining
CB Wear Minimum
Start Count
Start Count Target
Format
Time Meter
Multiplier
0
Description
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Vab kV
Vbc kV
Vca kV
Va kV
Vb kV
Vc kV
Va V
Vb V
Vc V
Vab Degrees
Vbc Degrees
Vca Degrees
Va Degrees
Vb Degrees
Vc Degrees
Vzps xVnom
Vpps xVnom
Vnps xVnom
Vzps Degrees
Vpps Degrees
Vnps Degrees
Hz
Ia kA
Ib kA
Ic kA
Ia A
Ib A
Ic A
Ia x Inom
Holding Registers
Address
Name
40001
Time Meter
40010
40012
40014
40016
40018
40020
40022
40024
40026
40034
40036
40038
40040
40042
40044
40048
40050
40052
40054
40056
40058
40060
40064
40066
40068
40070
40072
40074
40076
Vab Primary
Vbc Primary
Vca Primary
Phase A Primary Volt
Phase B Primary Volt
Phase C Primary Volt
Phase a Secondary Volt
Phase b Secondary Volt
Phase c Secondary Volt
Phase ab Nominal Volt
Phase bc Nominal Volt
Phase ca Nominal Volt
Phase a Nominal Volt
Phase b Nominal Volt
Phase c Nominal Volt
Vzps
Vpps
Vnps
Vzps
Vpps
Vnps
Frequency
Phase A Primary Curr
Phase B Primary Curr
Phase C Primary Curr
Phase a Secondary Curr
Phase b Secondary Curr
Phase c Secondary Curr
Phase A Nominal
Address
40078
40080
40082
40084
40086
40088
40090
40092
40094
40096
40098
40100
40102
40104
40106
40108
40110
40112
40114
40116
40118
40120
40122
40124
40126
40128
40130
40132
40134
40136
40138
40140
40142
40144
40146
40148
40150
40152
40153
40154
40167
40168
40169
40170
40172
40174
40176
40178
40180
40182
40184
40186
40193
40195
40197
40199
40201
40203
40205
40207
40209
40211
Name
Phase B Nominal
Phase C Nominal
Phase A Nominal
Phase B Nominal
Phase C Nominal
In Primary
In Secondary
In Nominal
Ig Primary
Ig Secondary
Ig Nominal
Izps Nominal
Ipps Nominal
Inps Nominal
Izps Nominal
Ipps Nominal
Inps Nominal
Active Power A
Active Power B
Active Power C
3P Power
Reactive Power A
Reactive Power B
Reactive Power C
3P Reactive Power Q
Apparent Power A
Apparent Power B
Apparent Power C
3P Apparent Power
Power Factor A
Power Factor B
Power Factor C
3P Power Factor
Active Energy Export
Active Energy Import
Reactive Energy Export
Reactive Energy Import
Thermal Status Ph A
Thermal Status Ph B
Thermal Status Ph C
Fault Records
Event Records
Waveform Records
Vab Secondary Volt
Vbc Secondary Volt
Vca Secondary Volt
VN Primary
VN Secondary
VN Secondary
Vx Primary
Vx Secondary
Vx Secondary
Ia Max Demand
Ib Max Demand
Ic Max Demand
P 3P Max
Q 3P Max
Ig Max
I sef Max
Isef Primary
Isef Secondary
Isef Nominal
Format
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
UINT162
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
1
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Multiplier
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.000001
0.000001
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Ib x Inom
Ic x Inom
Ia Degrees
Ib Degrees
Ic Degrees
IN kA
IN A
IN xInom
IG kA
IG A
IG xInom
Izps xIn
Ipps xIn
Inps xIn
Izps Degrees
Ipps Degrees
Inps Degrees
A Phase MW
B Phase MW
C Phase MW
3 Phase MW
A Phase MVAr
B Phase MVAr
C Phase MVAr
3 Phase MVAr
A Phase MVA
B Phase MVA
C Phase MVA
3 Phase MVA
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
3 Phase
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
3 Phase MWh
%
%
%
No. of Fault Records
No. of Event Records
No. of Waveform Recs
Vab V
Vbc V
Vca V
VN kV
VN V
VN Degrees
Vx kV
Vx V
Vx Degrees
Ia kA
Ib kA
Ic kA
Power Max Demand
VARs Max Demand
Ig Max Demand
Isef Max Demand
Isef A
Isef A
Isef xIn
Address
40213
40215
40217
40219
40223
40225
40229
40231
40233
40235
40237
40239
Name
Fault Reactance
Vy Primary
Vy Secondary
Vz Primary
Vz Secondary
Vxy Primary
Vyz Primary
Vzx Primary
Vxy Nominal
Vyz Nominal
Vzx Nominal
Format
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
Multiplier
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Fault Reactance
Vy kV
Vy V
Vz kV
Vz V
Vxy kV
Vyz kV
Vzx kV
Vxy Degrees
Vyz Degrees
Vzx Degrees
40241
40243
40245
40247
40249
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB LO Handle Ops
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB Freq Ops Count
CB LO Handle Ops
40251
40253
40255
40257
40259
40261
40263
40265
40267
40269
40271
40273
40275
40277
40279
40281
40283
40285
40287
40289
40291
Sag SIARFI Pole1

Sag SMARFI Pole1
Sag STARFI Pole1
Sag SIARFI Pole2
Sag SMARFI Pole2
Sag STARFI Pole2
Sag SIARFI Pole3
Sag SMARFI Pole3
Sag STARFI Pole3
Interrupt Pole1
Interrupt Pole2
Interrupt Pole3
Swell SIARFI Pole1
Swell SMARFI Pole1
Swell STARFI Pole1
Swell SIARFI Pole2
Swell SMARFI Pole2
Swell STARFI Pole2
Swell SIARFI Pole3
Swell SMARFI Pole3
Swell STARFI Pole3
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
40293
40295
40297
40299
Bus Freq
Phase Diff
Slip Freq
Voltage Diff
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP
1
1
1
1
Vx Frequency
25 Phase Diff
25 Slip Freq
25 Voltage Diff
40301
40303
40305
40307
40309
40311
40313
40317
40319
40321
40323
40325
40327
40329
40331
40333
40335
Ia Last Trip
Ib Last Trip
Ic Last Trip
Va Last Trip
Vb Last Trip
Vc Last Trip
In Last Trip
Isef Last Trip
V Phase A Max
V Phase B Max
V Phase C Max
V Phase AB Max
V Phase BC Max
V Phase CA Max
CB Ph A Trip Count
CB Ph BTrip Count
CB Ph CTrip Count
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
1
FP_32BITS_3DP
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ia Fault
Ib Fault
Ic Fault
Va Fault
Vb Fault
Vc Fault
In Fault
Isef Fault
Va Max Demand
Vb Max Demand
Vc Max Demand
Vab Max Demand
Vbc Max Demand
Vca Max Demand
Sag SIARFI Pole1

Sag SMARFI Pole1
Sag STARFI Pole1
Sag SIARFI Pole2
Sag SMARFI Pole2
Sag STARFI Pole2
Sag SIARFI Pole3
Sag SMARFI Pole3
Sag STARFI Pole3
P1 Interrupts
P2 Interrupts
P3 Interrupts
Swell SIARFI Pole1
Swell SMARFI Pole1
Swell STARFI Pole1
Swell SIARFI Pole2
Swell SMARFI Pole2
Swell STARFI Pole2
Swell SIARFI Pole3
Swell SMARFI Pole3
Swell STARFI Pole3
Address
40337
Name
CB E/F Trip Count
Format
UINT32
Multiplier
1
Description
CB EF Trip Count
40341
40342
40343
40344
40345
40346
40347
40348
40349
40350
40352
LED1-n
LED1-n
INP1-n
INP1-n
OUT1-n
OUT1-n
VRT1-n
VRT1-n
EQN1-n
EQN1-n
Fault Distance PerUnit
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
BITSTRING5
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
40354
40356
40358
40360
40362
40364
40366
40380
40382
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A Remaining
CB Wear B Remaining
CB Wear C Remaining
CB Wear Minimum
StartCount
Start Count Target
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
0.000001
0.000001
1
1
1
1
1
1
Led 1-16 status

Led 17-32 status
Input 1-16 status
Input 17-32 status
Output 1-16 status
Output 17-32 status
Virtual 1-16 status
Virtual 17-32 status
Units defined in relay
setting
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A Remaining
CB Wear B Remaining
CB Wear C Remaining
CB Wear Minimum
Start Count
Start Count Target
40401
40402
No.of Events In Store

Event Record
1 Register
8 Registers3
0
0
1) FP_32BITS_3DP: 2 registers - 32 bit fixed point, a 32 bit integer containing a value to 3 decimal places e.g. 50000 sent = 50.000
2) UINT16: 1 register - standard 16 bit unsigned integer
3) Sequence of 8 registers containing an event record. Read address 30002 for 8 registers (16 bytes), each read returns the earliest event record and removes it from the
internal store. Repeat this process for the number of events in the register 30001 or 40401, or until no more events are returned. (the error condition exception code 2)
Event Format
The format of the event record is defined by the zero byte. It signifies the type of record which is used to decode
the event information. The zero byte can be one of the following.
Type
1
2
4
Description
Event
Event with Relative Time
Measurand Event with Relative Time
Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions

5.1
Device Profile
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a Document, it is in fact a
table, and only a component of a total interoperability guide. The table, in combination with the Implementation
Table provided and the Point List Tables provided should provide a complete configuration/interoperability guide
for communicating with a device implementing the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library.
DNP V3.0
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table Section 5.2.)
Vendor Name:
Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.
Device Name: 7SR224 , using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP3 Slave Source Code Library, Version
3.
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests:
Level 3
Master
For Responses:
Level 3
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the
complete list is described in the attached table):
For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and
28 (index) are supported. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers
00 or 01.
16-bit, 32-bit and Floating Point Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
Analog Input Deadbands, Object 34, variations 1 through 3, are supported.
Output Event Objects 11, 13, are supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 256
Received
256
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Transmitted:
2048
Received
2048
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Fixed (3)
Configurable from 0 to 65535
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
None
Configurable
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable as: Never, Only for multi-frame messages, or Always
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Sometimes
Configurable as: Only when reporting event data, or When reporting event data or multi-fragment
messages.
DNP V3.0
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:
Complete Appl. Fragment:

Application Confirm:
Complete Appl. Response:
None
None
None
None
Fixed at 2sec
Fixed at ____
Fixed at 10sec
Fixed at ____
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Configurable.
Configurable
Configurable.
Configurable
Others: Transmission Delay, (0 sec)

Select/Operate Arm Timeout, (5 sec)
Need Time Interval, (30 minutes)
Application File Timeout, (60 sec)
Unsolicited Notification Delay, (5 seconds)
Unsolicited Response Retry Delay, (between 3 9 seconds)
Unsolicited Offline Interval, (30 seconds)
Binary Change Event Scan Period, (Polled, Not Applicable)
Double Bit Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Analog Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
String Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Virtual Terminal Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Queue
Clear Queue
Never
Never
Always
Always
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation.

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
specific variation requested:
when no specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable to send one or the
other
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
No Counters Reported
Configurable
Default Object
Default Variation:
Point-by-point list attached
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.

Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits
32 Bits
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
DNP V3.0
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No
Configurable
Sequential File Transfer Support:
File Transfer Support
Append File Mode
Custom Status Code Strings
Permissions Field
File Events Assigned to Class
File Events Send Immediately
Multiple Blocks in a Fragment
Max Number of Files Open
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
5.2
Implementation Table
The following table identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc.
DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library supports in both request messages and in response messages. For static
(non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00
or 01. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
In the table below, text shaded as 00, 01 (start stop) indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level
2).
In the table below, text shaded as 07, 08 (limited qty) indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
1
Description
Binary Input Any Variation
REQUEST
RESPONSE
(Library will parse)
(Library will respond with)
Function
Codes
(dec)
1
22
(read)
(assign
class)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07,08(limited qty)
17,27,28
Binary Input
(read)
06
(default
see note
1)
1
00, 01
(index)
(start-stop)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
see note 2)
07,08(limited qty)
17,27,28
Binary Input with Status
(read)
00, 01
06
(index)
(start-stop)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(no range, or all)
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
07,08(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
2
2
2
0
1
2
Binary Input Change Any

Variation
Binary Input Change without

Time
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(read)
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
Binary Input Change with Time 1
(read)
06
07, 08
3
(default
see note 1)
Binary Input Change with

Relative Time
Double Bit Input Any

Variation
1
22
(read)
(read)
(assign
class)
06
(limited qty)
07, 08
(limited qty)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06
17, 28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
Double Bit Input
(default
see note 1)
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 28
(index
see note 1)
17, 27, 28 (index)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
3
Description
Double Bit Input with Status
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
1
(read)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
see note 1)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
4
4
4
0
1
2
3
(default
see note 1)
10
Double Bit Input Change Any 1

Variation
(read)
Double Bit Input Change

without Time
(read)
Double Bit Input Change with

Time
Double Bit Input Change with

Relative Time
Binary Output Any Variation
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(read)
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
129
(response)
07, 08
22
(read)
(read)
(assign
class)
06
(limited qty)
07, 08
(limited qty)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06
17, 28
(index )
17, 28
(index )
17, 28
(index )
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
10
Binary Output
1 (read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
see note 1)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
10
Binary Output Status
1 (write)
00, 01
(start-stop)
1(read)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06
(default
see note
1)
11
11
0
1
(default
see note
1)
11
Binary Output Change without

Time
1(read)
06
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(index)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
06
00, 01
17, 28
(limited qty)
17,27,28
1(read)
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
Binary Output Change Any

Variation
129
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
129
(limited qty) (response)
17, 28
(index )
130
(unsol. resp)
Binary Output Change with

Time
1(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
129
17, 28
(index )
130
(unsol. resp)
12
Control Relay Output Block
22
00, 01
(assign class)
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
12
Description
Control Relay Output Block
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
3 (select)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
17, 28
(index)
echo of request
129
(response)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6
12
Pattern Control Block
(dir. op, noack)
3 (select)
(limited quantity)
echo of request
129
(response)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6
(dir.
noack)
12
Pattern Mask
op,
3 (select)
00, 01
129
(response)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
129
(response)
(start-stop)
echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6
(dir.
noack)
13
13
13
20
op,
Binary Output Command Event 1

Any Variation
(read)

without Time
(read)

with Time
(read)
(read)
Binary Input Any Variation
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
22
(assign
class)
06
(limited qty)
07, 08
(limited qty)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06
17, 28
(index )
17, 28
(index )
00, 01
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty
17, 27, 28 (index)

7
(freeze)
(freeze noack)
(freeze clear)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
00, 01
(start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20
32-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag)
(read)
06
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20
16-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag)
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20
32-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
Description
20
16-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag)
20
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
(read)
00, 01
06
(default
see note
1)
20
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)

16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
20
32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
20
16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
21
Frozen Counter Any Variation
1
22
(read)
(assign class)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
32-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag)
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
16-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag)
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter

(with Flag)
21

(with Flag)
21
32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1

Freeze
(read) 00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
07, 08
00, 01(start-stop
17, 28
(no range, or all)
(index
see note 1)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1

Freeze
(read) 00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)

07, 08
(limited qty)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-stop
17, 28
(index
see note 1)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with

Time Of Freeze
21
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with

Time Of Freeze
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
21
Description
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1
(read)
(default
see note 1)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21
11

without Flag
21
12

without Flag
22
Counter Change Event Any

Variation
32-Bit Counter Change Event

without Time
16-Bit Counter Change Event

without Time
22
1
(default
see note 1)
22
(read)
(read)
(read)
22
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event

without Time
22
32-Bit Counter Change Event with 1

Time
(read)
16-Bit Counter Change Event with 1

Time
(read)

with Time
22

with Time
23
Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 1

is used to request default variation)
(read)
(read)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
06
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
06
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
06
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
07, 08
23
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event
23
23
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with

Time
(read)
06
(index)
17, 28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
(limited qty)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(default
see note 1)
23
(response)
07, 08
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
129
07, 08
22
06
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
07, 08

without Time
23
06
07, 08
(no range, or all)
07, 08
22
22
06
07, 08
(limited qty)
17,28
(index)
17,28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
23
Description
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with
Time
23

with Time
23

with Time
30
Analog Input - Any Variation
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
1
1
22
(read)
(read)
(assign class)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30
32-Bit Analog Input
(read) 00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)

07, 08
17, 28 (index
(limited qty)
see note 2)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30
16-Bit Analog Input
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129 (response)
(start-stop)
17, 28 (index
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30
3
(default
see note
1)
30
32-Bit Analog Input without

Flag
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129 (response)
(start-stop)
17, 28 (index
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
16-Bit Analog Input without

Flag
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129 (response)
(start-stop)
17, 28 (index
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30
short floating point
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129 (response)
(start-stop)
17, 28 (index
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
30
long floating point
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
129 (response)
00, 01
(start-stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 1)
17, 27, 28 (index)

31
Frozen Analog Input Any

Variation
31
32-Bit Frozen Analog input
31
16-Bit Frozen Analog input
31
32-Bit Frozen Analog input with

Time of freeze
31
16-Bit Frozen Analog input with

Time of freeze
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
Description
32-Bit Frozen Analog input without

Flag
31
16-Bit Frozen Analog input without

Flag
32
Analog Change Event Any

Variation
32-Bit Analog Change Event

without Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event

without Time
32-Bit Analog Change Event with

Time
1
(default
see note 1)
32
32
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
31
32
REQUEST
(read)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(read)
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(read)
06
07, 08
(read)
06
(limited qty)
07, 08
17, 28
(index)
17, 28
(index)
17, 28 (index)
130
(unsol. resp)
32
16-Bit Analog Change Event with

Time
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
129
17, 28 (index)
130
(unsol. resp)
32
short floating point Analog Change

Event without Time
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
129
17, 28 (index)
130
(unsol. resp)
32
long floating point Analog Change

Event without Time
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
129
17, 28 (index)
130
(unsol. resp)
32
32
short floating point Analog Change

Event with Time
long floating point Analog Change

Event with Time
33
Frozen Analog Event Any

Variation
33
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without

Time
33
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without

Time
33
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with

Time
33
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with

Time
33
Short Floating Point Frozen Analog

Event
33
Long Floating Point Frozen Analog

Event
(read)
06
129
(response)
(limited qty)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(read)
06
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
Description
33
Extended Floating Point Frozen

Analog Event
34
Analog Input Deadband

(Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
(read)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34
16 bit Analog Input Deadband
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)

2
(write)
00, 01
(start-stop)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34
32 bit Analog Input Deadband
(read)
00, 01
06
(default
see note 1)
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)

2
(write)
00, 01
(start-stop)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34
Short Floating Point Analog

Input Deadband
(read)
00, 01
06
(start-stop)
129
(response)
17, 28
(no range, or all)
07, 08
00, 01
(start-stop)
(index
see note 2)
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)

2
(write)
00, 01
(start-stop)
07, 08
(limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)

50
Time and Date
50
Time and Date
1(read)
07,
(limited qty = 1)
2(write)
07
(limited qty = 1)
2 (write)
07
(limited qty)
129
(response)
07
(limited qty = 1)
(default
see note 1)
50
Time and Date Last Recorded

Time
51
Time and Date CTO
129
(response)
07
(limited
qty = 1)
130 (unsol.
Resp)
51
Unsychronised Time and Date

CTO
129
(response)
07
(limited
qty = 1)
130 (unsol.
Resp)
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
Description
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
52
Time Delay Coarse
129
(response)
07
(limited
qty = 1)
52
Time Delay Fine
129
(response)
07
(limited
qty = 1)
60
Not Defined
60
Class 0 Data
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
60
Class 1 Data
(read)
06
(no range, or all)
07, 08
20
(enbl.
(limited qty)
06
(no range, or all)
06
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
21 (dab. unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
60
Class 2 Data
(read)
07, 08
20
(enbl.
(limited qty)
06
(no range, or all)
06
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
21 (dab. unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
60
Class 3 Data
(read)
07, 08
20
(enbl.
06
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
21(dab. unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
70
File Transfer
80
Internal Indications
81
Storage Object
82
Device Profile
83
Private Registration Object
83
Private Registration Object

Descriptor
90
Application Identifier
100
Short Floating Point
100
Long Floating Point
100
Extended Floating Point
1(read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
00
(write)
(see note 3)
129
(response)
00, 01
(start-stop)
(start-stop)
index = 7
OBJECT
Object Variation
Number Number
Description
101
Small Packed Binary-Coded

Decimal
101
Medium Packed Binary-Coded

Decimal
101
Large Packed Binary-Coded

Decimal
REQUEST
RESPONSE
Function
Codes
(dec)
No Object (function code only)
13
14
Qualifier
Function
Qualifier
(cold restart)
(warm
restart)
23
24(record current
(delay meas.)
Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2,
or 3 scans. Default variations are configurable; however, default settings for the configuration parameters are
indicated in the table above.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for index 7 (Restart IIN1-7)
5.3
Point List
The tables below identify all the default data points provided by the implementation of the Triangle MicroWorks,
Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library.
Note, not all points listed here apply to all builds of devices.
5.3.1
Binary Input Points
The default binary input event buffer size is set to allow 100 events.
Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation.
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time)
Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
1
Binary Input 1
2
2
Binary Input 2
2
3
Binary Input 3
2
4
Binary Input 4
2
5
Binary Input 5
2
6
Binary Input 6
2
7
Binary Input 7
2
8
Binary Input 8
2
9
Binary Input 9
2
10
Binary Input 10
2
11
Binary Input 11
2
12
Binary Input 12
2
13
Binary Input 13
2
14
Binary Input 14
2
15
Binary Input 15
2
16
Binary Input 16
2
17
Binary Input 17
2
18
Binary Input 18
2
19
Binary Input 19
2
20
Binary Input 20
2
21
Binary Input 21
2
22
Binary Input 22
2
23
Binary Input 23
2
24
Binary Input 24
2
25
Binary Input 25
2
26
Binary Input 26
2
27
Binary Input 27
2
28
Binary Input 28
2
29
Binary Input 29
2
30
Binary Input 30
2
31
Binary Input 31
2
32
Binary Input 32
2
33
Binary Input 33
2
35
36
Remote mode
Service mode
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
37
Local mode
2
38
Local & Remote
2
41
Trip Circuit Fail
2
42
A-Starter
2
43
B-Starter
2
44
C-Starter
2
45
General Starter
2
46
VTS Alarm
2
47
2
48
2
49
Start/Pick-up N
2
50
Fault Forward/Line
2
51
2
52
51-1
2
53
50-1
2
56
57
58
59
51G-1
50G-1
51-2
50-2
2
2
2
2
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
51G-2
50G-2
CTS Alarm
46IT
46DT
47-1
47-2
46BC
27/59-1
27/59-2
27/59-3
27/59-4
59NIT
59NDT
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-4
Auto-reclose active
Reclaim
Lockout
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
86
87
90
91
51-3
50-3
51G-3
50G-3
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
92
51-4
2
93
50-4
2
2
96
51G-4
2
97
50G-4
2
98
Cold Load Active
2
99
E/F Protection Out
2
100
2
101
2
102
2
103
2
105
106
107
Battery Test Pass

Battery Test Fail
Battery Ohms High
2
2
2
108
109
110
Battery Volts Low

Battery Volts High
Battery Healthy
2
2
2
112
Capacitor Ready
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
51SEF-1
50SEF-1
51SEF-2
50SEF-2
51SEF-3
50SEF-3
51SEF-4
50SEF-4
SEF Out
Trip Circuit Fail 1
Trip Circuit Fail 2
Trip Circuit Fail 3
CB Total Trip Count
CB Delta Trip Count
I^2t CB Wear
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
CB-A Reclaim
CB-A Lockout
CB-A I^2t Wear
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
2
143
2
144
50BF-1 Pole A
2
145
50BF-2 Pole A
2
146
Cap-A Ready
2
147
Cap-A Test Pass
2
148
Cap-A Test Fail
2
149
Cap-A Recovery Fail
2
150
Cap-A Test
2
151
CB-B Reclaim
2
152
CB-B Lockout
2
153
2
154
2
155
2
156
CB-B I^2t Wear
2
157
2
158
2
159
2
160
2
161
50BF-1 Pole B
2
162
50BF-2 Pole B
2
163
Cap-B Ready
2
164
Cap-B Test Pass
2
165
Cap-B Test Fail
2
166
Cap-B Recovery Fail
2
167
Cap-B Test
2
168
CB-C Reclaim
2
169
CB-C Lockout
2
170
2
171
2
172
2
173
CB-C I^2t Wear
2
174
2
175
2
176
2
177
2
178
50BF-1 Pole C
2
179
50BF-2 Pole C
2
180
Cap-C Ready
2
181
Cap-C Test Pass
2
182
Cap-C Test Fail
2
183
Cap-C Recovery Fail
2
184
Cap-C Test
2
185
Pole Discrepancy
2
186
LOV Primed
2
187
LOV Trip
2
188
LOV Close
2
189
LOV In Progress
190
BI 34
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
191
BI 35
2
192
BI 36
2
193
BI 37
2
194
BI 38
2
195
BI 39
2
196
BI 40
2
197
BI 41
2
198
BI 42
2
199
BI 43
2
207
2
208
2
209
2
210
Close Circuit Fail
2
211
50BF-1
2
212
50BF-2
2
213
49-Alarm
2
214
49-Trip
2
215
64H
2
216
Vx27/59
2
217
37-1
2
218
37-2
2
219
Cold Load Active
2
220
2
221
2
222
Trip Time Alarm
2
223
SEF Forward/Line
2
224
SEF Reverse/Busbar
2
225
General Alarm 1
2
226
General Alarm 2
2
227
General Alarm 3
2
228
General Alarm 4
2
229
General Alarm 5
2
230
General Alarm 6
2
231
General Alarm 7
2
232
General Alarm 8
2
233
General Alarm 9
2
234
General Alarm 10
2
235
General Alarm 11
2
236
General Alarm 12
2
237
Quick Logic E1
2
238
Quick Logic E2
2
239
Quick Logic E3
2
240
Quick Logic E4
2
241
Quick Logic E5
2
242
Quick Logic E6
2
243
Quick Logic E7
2
244
Quick Logic E8
2
245
Quick Logic E9
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
246
Quick Logic E10
2
247
Quick Logic E11
2
248
Quick Logic E12
2
249
Quick Logic E13
2
250
Quick Logic E14
2
251
Quick Logic E15
2
252
Quick Logic E16
2
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
283
284
285
286
287
81HBL2
37G-1
37G-2
Wattmetric Po>
37-PhA
37-PhB
37-PhC
50BF-PhA
50BF-PhB
50BF-PhC
50BF-EF
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
Trip-PhA
Trip-PhB
Trip-PhC
+ve P (3P)
-ve P (3P)
+ve Q (3P)
-ve Q (3P)
Vx 27/59-1
Vx 27/59-2
Vx 27/59-3
Vx 27/59-4
27/59 PhA
27/59 PhB
27/59 PhC
Vx 27/59 PhA
Vx 27/59 PhB
Vx 27/59 PhC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
LOV A Live
LOV B Live
LOV C Live
LOV X Live
LOV Y Live
LOV Z Live
LOV A
LOV B
LOV C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
384
LOV X
2
385
LOV Y
2
386
LOV Z
2
387
25 System Split
2
388
25 Live Line
2
389
25 Live Bus
2
390
25 Line U/V
2
391
25 Bus U/V
2
392
25 Voltage Dif >
2
393
25 CS Slip Freq >
2
394
25 SS Slip Freq >
2
395
25 COZ Slip Freq >
2
396
25 In Sync
2
397
25 CS In Progress
2
398
25 SS In Progress
2
399
25 COZ In Progress
2
400
25 System Split LO
2
401
60VTF-Bus
2
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
Settings Group 1
Settings Group 2
Settings Group 3
Settings Group 4
Settings Group 5
Settings Group 6
Settings Group 7
Settings Group 8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
422
425
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
Hot Line Working On/Off

Inst Protection Off/On
CB 1
CB-A
CB-B
CB-C
Mode A 3PTrip3PLO
Mode B 1PTrip3PLO
Mode C 1PTrip1PLO
Man Override Synch on/off
79 Override Synch on/off
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
Virtual Input 1
Virtual Input 2
Virtual Input 3
Virtual Input 4
Virtual Input 5
Virtual Input 6
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
509
Virtual Input 9
2
510
Virtual Input 10
2
511
Virtual Input 11
2
512
Virtual Input 12
2
513
Virtual Input 13
2
514
Virtual Input 14
2
515
Virtual Input 15
2
516
Virtual Input 16
2
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
Led 1
Led 2
Led 3
Led 4
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
Led 9
Led 10
Led 11
Led 12
Led 13
Led 14
Led 15
Led 16
Led 17
Led 18
Led 19
Led 20
Led 21
Led 22
Led 23
Led 24
Led 25
Led 26
Led 27
Led 28
Led PU1
Led PU 2
Led PU 3
Led PU 4
Led PU 5
Led PU 6
Led PU 7
Led PU 8
Led PU 9
Led PU 10
Led PU 11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
712
Led PU 12
2
713
Led PU 13
2
714
Led PU 14
2
715
Led PU 15
2
716
Led PU 16
2
717
Led PU 17
2
718
Led PU 18
2
719
Led PU 19
2
720
Led PU 20
2
721
Led PU 21
2
722
Led PU 22
2
723
Led PU 23
2
724
Led PU 24
2
725
Led PU 25
2
726
Led PU 26
2
727
Led PU 27
2
728
Led PU 28
2
733
734
735
736
737
738
739

CB EF Trip Count
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
Binary Output 1
Binary Output 2
Binary Output 3
Binary Output 4
Binary Output 5
Binary Output 6
Binary Output 7
Binary Output 8
Binary Output 9
Binary Output 10
Binary Output 11
Binary Output 12
Binary Output 13
Binary Output 14
Binary Output 15
Binary Output 16
Binary Output 17
Binary Output 18
Binary Output 19
Binary Output 20
Binary Output 21
Binary Output 22
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Binary Input Points

Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
823
Binary Output 23
2
824
Binary Output 24
2
825
Binary Output 25
2
826
Binary Output 26
2
827
Binary Output 27
2
828
Binary Output 28
2
829
Binary Output 29
2
830
Binary Output 30
2
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
5.3.2
Cold start
Warm Start
Re-Start
Power On
SW Forced Restart
Unexpected Restart
Reset Start Count
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Double Bit Binary Input Points
Double Bit Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation.
Double Bit Input Points
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Double Bit Binary Input packed format)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Double Bit Binary Input Event with
relative time)
Default
Point
Change Event
Name/Description
Index
Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)
0
CB 1
CB-A
CB-B
CB-C
5.3.3
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks
(Object 12).
While Binary Output Status Points are included here for completeness, they are not often polled by DNP 3.0
Masters. It is recommended that Binary Output Status points represent the most recent DNP commanded value
for the corresponding Control Relay Output Block point. Because many, if not most, Control Relay Output Block
points are controlled through pulse mechanisms, the value of the output status may in fact be meaningless.
Binary Output Status points are not recommended to be included in class 0 polls.
As an alternative, it is recommended that actual status values of Control Relay Output Block points be looped
around and mapped as Binary Inputs. (The actual status value, as opposed to the commanded status value, is
the value of the actuated control. For example, a DNP control command may be blocked through hardware or
software mechanisms; in this case, the actual status value would indicate the control failed because of the
blocking. Looping Control Relay Output Block actual status values as Binary Inputs has several advantages:
it allows actual statuses to be included in class 0 polls,
it allows change event reporting of the actual statuses, which is a more efficient and time-accurate
method of communicating control values,
and it allows reporting of time-based information associated with controls, including any delays before
controls are actuated, and any durations if the controls are pulsed.
The default select/control buffer size is large enough to hold 10 of the largest select requests possible.
Binary Outputs are by default set to be returned in a class zero interrogation.
Binary Output Status Points
Static Object Number: 10
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags)
Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
All objects are default class 0
Point
Index
Name/Description
Supported Control Relay Output Block

Fields
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Binary Output 1
Binary Output 2
Binary Output 3
Binary Output 4
Binary Output 5
Binary Output 6
Binary Output 7
Binary Output 8
Binary Output 9
Binary Output 10
Binary Output 11
Binary Output 12
Binary Output 13
Binary Output 14
Binary Output 15
Binary Output 16
Binary Output 17
Binary Output 18
Binary Output 19
Binary Output 20
Binary Output 21
Binary Output 22
Binary Output 23
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On

Object Number: 12
Point
Index
Name/Description

Fields
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Binary Output 24
Binary Output 25
Binary Output 26
Binary Output 27
Binary Output 28
Binary Output 29
Binary Output 30
Binary Output 31
Binary Output 32
LED reset
Settings Group 1
Settings Group 2
Settings Group 3
Settings Group 4
Settings Group 5
Settings Group 6
Settings Group 7
Settings Group 8
Auto-reclose on/off
Hot Line Working on/off
E/F off/on
SEF off/on
Inst Protection off/on
LOV off/on
Reset CB Total Trip Count
Reset CB Delta Trip Count
Reset CB Count To AR Block
Reset CB Frequent Ops Count
Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count
Reset I^2t CB Wear
CB 1
CB 1 Trip & Reclose
CB 1 Trip & Lockout
Battery Test
Capacitor Test
Demand metering reset
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
CB-A
CB-B
CB-C
CB-A Trip & Lockout
CB-B Trip & Lockout
CB-C Trip & Lockout
Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO
Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO
Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO

Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On

Object Number: 12
Point
Index
Name/Description

Fields
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113

Reset CB-A Count To AR Block
Reset CB-B Count To AR Block
Reset CB-C Count To AR Block
Reset Energy Meters
Remote Mode
Service Mode
Local Mode
Local & Remote
Man Override Sync on/off
79 Override Sync on/off
Reset CB Phase B Trip Count
Reset CB Phase C Trip Count
Reset CB EF Trip Count
User SP Command 1
User SP Command 2
User SP Command 3
User SP Command 4
User SP Command 5
User SP Command 6
User SP Command 7
User SP Command 8
User DP Command 1
User DP Command 2
User DP Command 3
User DP Command 4
User DP Command 5
User DP Command 6
User DP Command 7
User DP Command 8
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
Pulse On/Latch On
5.3.4
Binary Counters
The following table lists both the Counters (Object 20) and Counter change events (Onbject 22).
The Default Deadband, and the Default Change Event Assigned Class columns are used to represent the
absolute amount by which the point must change before a Counter change event will be generated, and once
generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported.
Counters are by default returned in a class zero interrogation.
Counters
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag)
Default Default
Default
Point #
Static
Event
Name
Deadband
Class
Variant Variant
0
Waveform Records
Fault Records
Event Records
Data Log Records
Number User Files
Start Count
Start Count Target
Active Setting Group
11
CB Total Trip Count
12
CB Ph A Trip Count
13
CB Ph B Trip Count
14
CB Ph C Trip Count
15
CB EF Trip Count
16
CB Delta Trip Count
17
18
19
CB LO Handle Ops
21
E1 Counter
22
E2 Counter
23
E3 Counter
24
E4 Counter
25
E5 Counter
26
E6 Counter
27
E7 Counter
28
E8 Counter
29
E9 Counter
30
E10 Counter
31
E11 Counter
32
E12 Counter
33
E13 Counter
Counters
Default Default
Default
Point #
Static
Event
Name
Deadband
Class
Variant Variant
34
E14 Counter
35
E15 Counter
36
E16 Counter
5.3.5
Frozen Counters
The following table lists both the Frozen Counters (Object 21) and Frozen Counter Change Events (Object 23).
The Default Change Event Assigned Class column is used to define which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) the
change event will be reported.
Note the point number of the Frozen Counter must match that of the corresponding Counter.
Frozen Counters are by default not returned in a class zero interrogation.
Frozen Counters
Default Default
Default
Point #
Name
Resettable
Static
Event
Class
Variant Variant
0
Waveform Records
Fault Records
Event Records
Data Log Records
Number User Files
Start Count
Start Count Target
Active Setting Group
11
CB Total Trip Count
12
CB Ph A Trip Count
13
CB Ph B Trip Count
14
CB Ph C Trip Count
15
CB EF Trip Count
16
CB Delta Trip Count
17
18
21
E1 Counter
22
E2 Counter
23
E3 Counter
24
E4 Counter
25
E5 Counter
Frozen Counters
Default Default
Default
Point #
Static
Event
Name
Resettable
Class
Variant Variant
26
E6 Counter
27
E7 Counter
28
E8 Counter
29
E9 Counter
30
E10 Counter
31
E11 Counter
32
E12 Counter
33
E13 Counter
34
E14 Counter
35
E15 Counter
36
E16 Counter
5.3.6
Analogue Inputs
The following table lists Analogue Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of
Analogue Inputs, Analogue Output Control Blocks, and Analogue Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP
as signed numbers.
The Default Deadband, and the Default Change Event Assigned Class columns are used to represent the
absolute amount by which the point must change before an analogue change event will be generated, and once
generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported.
The default analogue input event buffer size is set 30.
Analog Inputs
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with
Time)
Def.
Def.
Def/
Point
Scaling
Name/Description
Deadband
Class
Static
Event
Index
Factor
Object
Object
0
Frequency (Hz)
100.0
1
3
2
4
1
Vab Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
2
Vbc Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
3
Vca Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
4
Va Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
5
Vb Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
6
Vc Primary (V)
0.01
100
3
2
4
7
Va Secondary (V)
10.0
1
3
2
4
8
Vb Secondary (V)
10.0
1
3
2
4
9
Vc Secondary (V)
10.0
1
3
2
4
21
22
23
Vzps Magnitude (V)

Vpps Magnitude (V)
Vnps Magnitude (V)
10.0
10.0
10.0
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
4
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Ia Primary (A)
Ib Primary (A)
Ic Primary (A)
Ia Secondary (A)
Ib Secondary (A)
Ic Secondary (A)
Ia Nominal Magnitude (xIn)
Ib Nominal Magnitude (xIn)
Ic Nominal Magnitude (xIn)
0.001
0.001
0.001
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
43
44
45
46
47
48
In Primary (A)
In Secondary (A)
In Nominal (xIn)
Ig Primary (A)
Ig Secondary (A)
Ig Nominal (xIn)
1
100.0
100.0
1
100.0
100.0
100
1
1
100
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
51
52
53
57
58
59
Izps Nominal Magnitude (xIn)

Ipps Nominal Magnitude (xIn)
Inps Nominal Magnitude (xIn)
Active Power A Phase W
Active Power B Phase W
Active Power C Phase W
100.0
100.0
100.0
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
1
1
1
1000000
1000000
1000000
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
60
61
62
63
3 Phase Real Power (P) (W)

Reactive Power A Phase VAr
Reactive Power B Phase VAr
Reactive Power C Phase VAr
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
1000000
1000000
1000000
1000000
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
Analog Inputs
Time)
Def.
Def.
Def/
Point
Scaling
Name/Description
Deadband
Class
Static
Event
Index
Factor
Object
Object
64
3 Phase Reactive Power (Q) (VAr)
0.00001
1000000
3
2
4
65
Apparent Power A Phase VA
0.00001
1000000
3
2
4
66
Apparent Power B Phase VA
0.00001
1000000
3
2
4
67
Apparent Power C Phase VA
0.00001
1000000
3
2
4
68
3 Phase Apparent Power (S) (VA)
0.00001
1000000
3
2
4
71
Power Factor(PhA) (Cos )
1000
0.1
3
2
4
72
Power Factor(PhB) (Cos )
1000
0.1
3
2
4
73
Power Factor(PhC) (Cos )
1000
0.1
3
2
4
74
Power Factor(3P) (Cos )
1000
0.1
3
2
4
75
Act Energy Exp (MWh)
1
-1
3
2
4
76
Act Energy Imp (MWh)
1
-1
3
2
4
77
React Energy Exp (MWh)
1
-1
3
2
4
78
React Energy Imp (MWh)
1
-1
3
2
4
81
82
83
Thermal Status Ph A (%)

Thermal Status Ph B (%)
Thermal Status Ph C (%)
100.0
100.0
100.0
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
4
99
100
101
102
103
Vab Secondary (V)

Vbc Secondary (V)
Vca Secondary (V)
Vn Primary (V)
Vn Secondary (V)
100.0
100.0
100.0
0.01
10.0
1
1
1
100
1
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
105
106
Vx Primary (kV)
Vx Secondary Magnitude (V)
0.01
10.0
100
1
3
3
2
2
4
4
108
109
110
111
112
111
118
119
Ia Max Demand (kA)

Ib Max Demand (kA)
Ic Max Demand (kA)
Power Max Demand (W)
VARs Max Demand (VAr)
Power Max Demand (W)
Fault Distance Percentage
Fault Reactance (Seconsary Ohms)
1
1
1
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
100
1000
100
100
100
1000000
1000000
1000000
-1
-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
120
121
Vy Primary (V)
Vy Secondary (V)
0.01
10.0
100
1
3
3
2
2
4
4
123
124
Vz Primary (V)
Vz Secondary (V)
0.01
10.0
100
1
3
3
2
2
4
4
126
127
128
129
130
131
Vxy Primary (V)

Vyz Primary (V)
Vzx Primary (V)
Vxy Secondary (V)
Vyz Secondary (V)
Vzx Secondary (V)
0.01
0.01
0.01
10.0
10.0
10.0
100
100
100
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
135
136
137
138
139
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB LO Handle Ops
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
Analog Inputs
Time)
Def.
Def.
Def/
Point
Scaling
Name/Description
Deadband
Class
Static
Event
Index
Factor
Object
Object
140
Sag SIARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
141
Sag SMARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
142
Sag STARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
143
Sag SIARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
144
Sag SMARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
145
Sag STARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
146
Sag SIARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
147
Sag SMARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
148
Sag STARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
149
Interrupt Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
150
Interrupt Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
151
Interrupt Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
152
Swell SIARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
153
Swell SMARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
154
Swell STARFI Pole1
1
1
3
2
4
155
Swell SIARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
156
Swell SMARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
157
Swell STARFI Pole2
1
1
3
2
4
158
Swell SIARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
159
Swell SMARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
160
Swell STARFI Pole3
1
1
3
2
4
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
Phase Diff (deg)

Slip Freq (Hz)
Voltage Diff (V)
Ia Fault Last Trip (A)
Ib Fault Last Trip (A)
Ic Fault Last Trip (A)
Va Fault Last Trip (V)
Vb Fault Last Trip (V)
Vc Fault Last Trip (V)
In Fault Last Trip (A)
Ig Fault Last Trip (A)
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Va Max Demand (V)

Vb Max Demand (V)
Vc Max Demand (V)
Vab Max Demand (V)
Vbc Max Demand (V)
Vca Max Demand (V)
CB Ph A Trip count
CB Ph B Trip count
CB Ph C Trip count
CB EF Trip count
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A percent remaining
CB Wear B percent remaining
CB Wear C percent remaining
CB Wear Minimum (%)
Fault Distance Per-unit
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
1
1
1
1
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
1
1
1
1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1000000
1000000
1000000
1
1
1
1
-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
Section 6: IEC60870-5-101
6.1
Introduction
This section describes the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol implementation in the relays. The control system or local
PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the masters commands.
This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic, RS232 and RS485).
Shaded boxes are not required.
Blank = function or ASDU is not used.
Mark type identification/cause of transmission combinations:
X if used only in the standard direction
<1>
activation confirmation
deactivation
deactivation confirmation
activation termination
return info caused by a remote cmd
return info caused by a local cmd
file transfer
10
11
12
13
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
M_SP_TA_1
<3>
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
M_ME_NA_1
<10>
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
M_EP_TB_1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
37
to
to
36
41
unknown information object address
activation
unknown common address of ASDU
request or requested
unknown cause of transmission
initialized
unknown type identification
spontaneous
request by group <n> counter request
background scan
interrogated by group <number>
periodic, cyclic
The cause of transmission (COT) for each information object type is listed below.
44
45
46
47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
M_ME_TF_1
<37>
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
M_EP_TE_1
<40>
M_EP_TF_1
<45>
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
C_RC_NA_1
<70>
M_EI_NA_1
<100>
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
C_TS_NA_1
<105>
C_RP_NA_1
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
activation confirmation
deactivation
deactivation confirmation
activation termination
return info caused by a remote cmd
return info caused by a local cmd
file transfer
10
11
12
13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
37
to
to
36
41
unknown information object address
activation
unknown common address of ASDU
request or requested
unknown cause of transmission
initialized
unknown type identification
spontaneous
request by group <n> counter request
background scan
interrogated by group <number>
periodic, cyclic
44
45
46
47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Definitions
Process Information Object Type in Monitor Direction
Abbreviation
Description
M_SP_NA_1
Single point information
M_SP_TA_1
Single point information with time tag
M_DP_NA_1
Double point information
M_DP_TA_1
Double point information with time tag
M_ST_NA_1
Step position information
M_ST_TA_1
Step position information with time tag
M_BO_NA_1
Bit string of 32 bit
M_BO_TA_1
Bit string of 32 bit with time tag
M_ME_NA_1
Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_TA_1
Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_ME_NB_1
Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_TB_1
Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_NC_1
Measured value, short floating point number
M_ME_TC_1
Measured value, short floating point number with time tag
M_IT_NA_1
Integrated totals
M_IT_TA_1
Integrated totals with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TB_1
Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_ME_ND_1
Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_SP_TB_1
Single point information with time tag CP56Time2A
M_DP_TB_1
Double point information with time tag CP56Time2A
M_ST_TB_1
Step position information with time tag CP56Time2A
M_BO_TB_1
Bit string of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2A
M_ME_TD_1
Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2A
M_ME_TE_1
Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2A
M_ME_TF_1
Measured value, short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2A
M_IT_TB_1
Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2A
M_EP_TD_1
Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A
M_EP_TE_1
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A
M_EP_TF_1
Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A
Process Information Object Type in the Control Direction

Abbreviation
Description
C_SC_NA_1
Single command
C_DC_NA_1
Double command
C_RC_NA_1
Regulating step command
System Information Object Type in the Monitor Direction

Abbreviation
Description
ME_EI_NA_1
End of initialization
System Information Object Type in the Control Direction

Abbreviation
Description
C_IC_NA_1
Interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
Counter interrogation
C_RD_NA_1
Read command
C_CS_NA_1
Clock Synchronisation command
C_TS_NB_1
Test command
C_RP_NC_1
Reset process command
C_CD_NA_1
Delay acquisition command
Information Object Addresses (IOA)

The following table lists information object address (IOA) definitions together with a description of the message
and default function type of that message. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models.
The Default type is given below but all items are user configurable.
IOA
Description
Default Type
1 Data Lost
M_SP_TB_1
4 Remote Mode
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
5 Service Mode
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
6 Local Mode
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
7 Local & Remote Mode
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Control Received
Command Received
Cold Start
Warm Start
Re-start
Trigger Storage
Clear Waveform Records
Clear Fault Records
Clear Event Records
21 Reset Demand metering

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
27 Sag SARFI
59Swell SARFI
Reset SagSwell Count
Battery Test Pass
Battery Test Fail
Battery Ohms High
Battery Volts Low
Battery Volts High
Battery Healthy
32 Battery Test
33
34
35
36
Capacitor Ready
Capacitor Test Pass
Capacitor Test Fail
37 Capacitor Test
38
39
40
41
General Alarm 1
General Alarm 2
General Alarm 3
General Alarm 4
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
IOA
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Description
Default Type
General Alarm 5
General Alarm 6
General Alarm 7
General Alarm 8
General Alarm 9
General Alarm 10
General Alarm 11
General Alarm 12
Quick Logic E1
Quick Logic E2
Quick Logic E3
Quick Logic E4
Quick Logic E5
Quick Logic E6
Quick Logic E7
Quick Logic E8
Quick Logic E9
Quick Logic E10
Quick Logic E11
Quick Logic E12
Quick Logic E13
Quick Logic E14
Quick Logic E15
Quick Logic E16
Quick Logic E17
Quick Logic E18
Quick Logic E19
Quick Logic E20
Quick Logic E21
Quick Logic E22
Quick Logic E23
Quick Logic E24
Quick Logic E25
Quick Logic E26
Quick Logic E27
Quick Logic E28
Quick Logic E29
Quick Logic E30
Quick Logic E31
Quick Logic E32
Function Key 1
Function Key 2
Function Key 3
Function Key 4
Function Key 5
Function Key 6
Function Key 7
Function Key 8
Function Key 9
Function Key 10
Function Key 11
Function Key 12
Function Key 13
Function Key 14
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
IOA
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
Description
Default Type
Function Key 15
Function Key 16
Function Key 17
Function Key 18
Function Key 19
Function Key 20
Function Key 21
Function Key 22
Function Key 23
Function Key 24
Function Key 25
Function Key 26
Function Key 27
Binary Input 1
Binary Input 2
Binary Input 3
Binary Input 4
Binary Input 5
Binary Input 6
Binary Input 7
Binary Input 8
Binary Input 9
Binary Input 10
Binary Input 11
Binary Input 12
Binary Input 13
Binary Input 14
Binary Input 15
Binary Input 16
Binary Input 17
Binary Input 18
Binary Input 19
Binary Input 20
Binary Input 21
Binary Input 22
Binary Input 23
Binary Input 24
Binary Input 25
Binary Input 26
Binary Input 27
Binary Input 28
Binary Input 29
Binary Input 30
Binary Input 31
Binary Input 32
Binary Input 33
Binary Input 34
Binary Input 35
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
IOA
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
Description
Default Type
Binary Input 36
Binary Input 37
Binary Input 38
Binary Input 39
Binary Input 40
Binary Input 41
Binary Input 42
Binary Input 43
Binary Input 44
Binary Input 45
Binary Input 46
Binary Input 47
Binary Input 48
Binary Input 49
Binary Input 50
Binary Input 51
Binary Input 52
Binary Input 53
Binary Input 54
Binary Input 55
Binary Input 56
Binary Input 57
Binary Input 58
Binary Input 59
Binary Input 60
Binary Input 61
Binary Input 62
Binary Input 63
Binary Input 64
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
173 Binary Output 1

174 Binary Output 2
175 Binary Output 3
176 Binary Output 4
177 Binary Output 5
178 Binary Output 6
179 Binary Output 7
180 Binary Output 8
181 Binary Output 9
182 Binary Output 10
IOA
Description

205
206
207
208
Reset FCB
Reset CU
Start/Restart
Power On
209 Auto-reclose active (In/Out)

210 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs)
211 Settings changed
Default Type
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
IOA
Description
212 Settings Group 1 Select

213 Settings Group 2 select
216 Settings Group 5 Selected
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
Trip circuit fail

VT Fuse Failure
Starter/Pick Up L1
Starter/Pick Up L2
Starter/Pick Up L3
Starter/Pick Up N
General Trip
Trip L1
Trip L2
Trip L3
Fault Impedance
Fault Forward/Line
General Starter/Pick Up
Trip I>
Trip I>>
Trip In>
Trip In>>
Reclose blocked
51-1
50-1
51N-1
50N-1
51G-1
50G-1
51-2
50-2
51N-2
50N-2
Default Type
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
IOA
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
Description
Default Type
51G-2
50G-2
51-3
50-3
51N-3
50N-3
51G-3
50G-3
51-4
50-4
51N-4
50N-4
51G-4
50G-4
50BF Stage 2
49 Thermal Alarm
49 Thermal Trip
51V-PhA
51V-PhB
51V-PhC
60 CT Supervision
51SEF-1
50SEF-1
51SEF-2
50SEF-2
51SEF-3
50SEF-3
51SEF-4
50SEF-4
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
282 SEF Out/In

283 46IT
284 46DT
285 64H
286 EF Out/In
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
SEF Forward/Line
SEF Reverse/Busbar
47-1
47-2
37-1
37-2
37G-1
37G-2
37SEF-1
37SEF-2
46BC
27/59-1
27/59-2
IOA
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
Description
Default Type
27/59-3
27/59-4
59NIT
59NDT
Vx27/59
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-4
81-5
81-6
81HBL2
Trip Circuit Fail 1
Trip Circuit Fail 2
Trip Circuit Fail 3
Close CB Failed
Open CB Failed
Reclaim
Lockout
Successful Close
Successful DAR Close
Successful Man Close
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
326 Hotline Working

327 Inst Protection Out
328 CB Total Trip Count
329 CB Delta Trip Count
330 CB Count to AR Block
331 Reset CB Trip Count Maint
332 Reset CB Trip Count Delta
333 Reset CB Trip Count Lockout
334 I^2t CB Wear
335 Reset I^2t CB Wear
336 79 AR In Progress
337 CB Frequent Ops Count
338 Reset CB Frequent Ops Count
339 CB LO Handle Ops Count
340 Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count
341
342
343
344
345
CB On By Manual Close
Cold Load Active
IOA
346
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
Description
Default Type

LOV Primed
LOV Trip
LOV Close
LOV Inhibit Fast Protection
LOV Force Fast Protection
LOV In Progress
LOV Backfeed Fail
LOV Successful
LOV 1x Trip and Lockout
LOV Fail
LOV-A Live
LOV-X Live
M_EP_TD_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
360 LOV Out

361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
Trip Time Alarm

Close Circuit Fail
Distance To Fault
Distance To Fault %
Fault Reactance
60 CTS-I
Act Energy Exp
Act Energy Imp
React Energy Exp
React Energy Imp
374 Reset Energy Meters

375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
Active Exp Meter Reset

Active Imp Meter Reset
Reactive Exp Meter Reset
Reactive Imp Meter Reset
CB Total Trip Count
CB Delta Trip Count
CB Freq Ops Count
LOV A Live
LOV B Live
LOV C Live
LOV X Live
LOV Y Live
LOV Z Live
LOV A
LOV B
LOV C
LOV X
LOV Y
LOV Z
25 Check Sync
25 System Sync
IOA
Description
Default Type
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
25 Close On Zero
25 System Split
25 Live Line
25 Live Bus
25 Line U/V
25 Bus U/V
25 Voltage Dif >
25 CS Slip Freq >
25 SS Slip Freq >
25 COZ Slip Freq >
25 In Sync
25 CS In Progress
25 SS In Progress
25 COZ In Progress
25 System Split LO
60VTF-Bus
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
Man Override Sync

79 Override Sync
Dead Line Close
Dead Bus Close
Wattmetric Po>
Close CB-A Failed
Open CB-A Failed
CB-A Reclaim
CB-A Lockout
CB-A Successful Close
CB-A Successful DAR Close
CB-A Successful Man Close
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
430 Reset CB-A Total Trip Count

431 Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count
432 Reset CB-A Count to AR Block
433 CB-A I^2t Wear
434 Reset CB-A I^2t Wear
435 CB-A 79 AR In progress
436 CB-A Frequent Ops Count
437 Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count
438 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count
439 Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count
440
441
442
443
444
445

CB-A Blocked By Interlocking
CB-A on by auto reclose
CB-A Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole A
50BF-2 Pole A
IOA
Description
446 CB-A Trip & Lockout

447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
Cap-A Ready
Cap-A Test Pass
Cap-A Test Fail
Cap-A Recovery Fail
Cap-A Test
CB-A Deadtime Running
Close CB-B Failed
Open CB-B Failed
CB-B Reclaim
CB-B Lockout
CB-B Successful Close
CB-B Successful DAR Close
CB-B Successful Man Close
463 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count

464 Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count
465 Reset CB-B Count to AR Block
466 CB-B I^2t Wear
467 Reset CB-B I^2t Wear
468 CB-B 79 AR In progress
469 CB-B Frequent Ops Count
470 Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count
471 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count
472 Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count
473
474
475
476
477
478

CB-B Blocked By Interlocking
CB-B on by auto reclose
CB-B Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole B
50BF-2 Pole B
479 CB-B Trip & Lockout

480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
Cap-B Ready
Cap-B Test Pass
Cap-B Test Fail
Cap-B Recovery Fail
Cap-B Test
CB-B Deadtime Running
Close CB-C Failed
Open CB-C Failed
CB-C Reclaim
CB-C Lockout
CB-C Successful Close
CB-C Successful DAR Close
Default Type
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
IOA
492
493
494
495
Description
Default Type
CB-C Successful Man Close

M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_DP_TB_1
C_DC_NA_1
M_DP_TB_1
C_DC_NA_1
M_DP_TB_1
C_DC_NA_1
M_DP_TB_1
C_DC_NA_1
496 Reset CB-C Total Trip Count

497 Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count
498 Reset CB-C Count to AR Block
499 CB-C I^2t Wear
500 Reset CB-C I^2t Wear
501 CB-C 79 AR In progress
502 CB-C Frequent Ops Count
503 Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count
504 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count
505 Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count
506
507
508
509
510
511

CB-C Blocked By Interlocking
CB-C on by auto reclose
CB-C Trip & Reclose
50BF-1 Pole C
50BF-2 Pole C
512 CB-C Trip & Lockout

513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
Cap-C Ready
Cap-C Test Pass
Cap-C Test Fail
Cap-C Recovery Fail
Cap-C Test
CB-C Deadtime Running
Pole Discrepancy
Three Pole Trip Select
Force 3Pole Trip
522 CB 1
527 CB-A
528 CB-B
529 CB-C
550 CB 1 Trip & Reclose

551 CB 1 Trip & Lockout
552 Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO
553 Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
IOA
Description
Default Type
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
Blocked by Interlocking
50BF-1
37-PhA
37-PhB
37-PhC
50 LC-1
50 LC-2
50G LC-1
50G LC-2
50SEF LC-1
50SEF LC-2
50BF-PhA
50BF-PhB
50BF-PhC
50BF-EF
Auto-reclose active
Battery Test Pass
Battery Test Fail
Battery Ohms High
Capacitor Test Pass
Capacitor Test Fail
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
Ia Fault
Ib Fault
Ic Fault
Va Fault
Vb Fault
Vc Fault
In Fault
Ig Fault
Isef Fault
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_ME_NC_1
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
Frequency
Vab Primary
Vbc Primary
Vca Primary
Va Primary
Vb Primary
Vc Primary
Va Secondary
Vb Secondary
Vc Secondary
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
554 Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO
621 Vzps
622 Vpps
623 Vnps
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
IOA
Description
Default Type
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
Ia Primary
Ib Primary
Ic Primary
Ia Secondary
Ib Secondary
Ic Secondary
Ia Nominal
Ib Nominal
Ic Nominal
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
In Primary
In Secondary
In Nominal
Ig Primary
Ig Secondary
Ig Nominal
Izps Nominal
Ipps Nominal
Inps Nominal
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
Active Power A
Active Power B
Active Power C
P (3P)
Reactive Power A
Reactive Power B
Reactive Power C
Q (3P)
Apparent Power A
Apparent Power B
Apparent Power C
S (3P)
Power Factor A
Power Factor B
Power Factor C
Power Factor(3P)
Act Energy Exp
Act Energy Imp
React Energy Exp
React Energy Imp
Thermal Status Ph A
Thermal Status Ph B
Thermal Status Ph C
Fault Records
Event Records
Waveform Records
Vab Secondary
Vbc Secondary
Vca Secondary
Vn Primary
Vn Secondary
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_IT_TB_1
M_IT_TB_1
M_IT_TB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
IOA
Description
Default Type
683 Vx Primary
684 Vx Secondary
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
I Phase A Max
I Phase B Max
I Phase C Max
P 3P Max
Q 3P Max
Ig Max
Isef Max
Isef Primary
Isef Secondary
Isef Nominal
Fault Reactance
Vy Primary
Vy Secondary
701 Vz Primary
702 Vz Secondary
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
704
705
706
707
708
709
Vxy Primary
Vyz Primary
Vzx Primary
Vxy Secondary
Vyz Secondary
Vzx Secondary
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
CB Total Trip Count

CB Delta Trip Count
CB LO Handle Ops
Sag SIARFI Pole1
Sag SMARFI Pole1
Sag STARFI Pole1
Sag SIARFI Pole2
Sag SMARFI Pole2
Sag STARFI Pole2
Sag SIARFI Pole3
Sag SMARFI Pole3
Sag STARFI Pole3
Interrupt Pole1
Interrupt Pole2
Interrupt Pole3
Swell SIARFI Pole1
Swell SMARFI Pole1
Swell STARFI Pole1
Swell SIARFI Pole2
Swell SMARFI Pole2
Swell STARFI Pole2
Swell SIARFI Pole3
Swell SMARFI Pole3
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
IOA
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
Description
Default Type
Swell STARFI Pole3

Bus Freq
Phase Diff
Slip Freq
Voltage Diff
Ia Last Trip
Ib Last Trip
Ic Last Trip
Va Last Trip
Vb Last Trip
Vc Last Trip
In Last Trip
Ig Last Trip
Isef Last Trip
CB E/F Trip Count
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_EP_TD_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
757 Reset CB Phase B Trip Count

758 Reset CB Phase C Trip Count
759 Reset CB E/F Trip Count
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
785
785
786
787
CB Ph A Trip Count
CB Ph B Trip Count
CB Ph C Trip Count
CB E/F Trip Count
+ve P (3P)
-ve P (3P)
+ve Q (3P)
-ve Q (3P)
Vx 27/59-1
Vx 27/59-2
Vx 27/59-3
Vx 27/59-4
27/59 PhA
27/59 PhB
27/59 PhC
Vx 27/59 PhA
Vx 27/59 PhB
Vx 27/59 PhC
CB Wear A
CB Wear B
CB Wear C
CB Wear A Remaining
CB Wear B Remaining
CB Wear C Remaining
CB Wear Minimum
Fault Distance Per-unit
79 Last Trip Lockout B
IOA
Description
Default Type
788 79 Last Trip Lockout C
M_SP_TB_1
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
M_BO_TB_1
Binary Inputs 1-8

Binary Inputs 9-16
Binary Inputs 17-24
Binary Inputs 25-32
Binary Outputs 1-8
Binary Outputs 9-16
Binary Outputs 17-24
Binary Outputs 25-32
903 Trip-PhA
904 Trip-PhB
905 Trip-PhC
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
M_SP_TB_1
921 User SP Command 1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1
M_SP_TB_1
C_SC_NA_1

929 User DP Command 1
Section 7: IEC 61850

7.1
IEC 61850 POINTS
IEC 61850 information can be found in the following documents:

1. Model Implementation Conformance Statement, 7SR224 MICS.doc
2. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, 7SR224 PICS.doc
3. Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing, 7SR224 PIXIT.doc
Section 8: Modems
The communications interface has been designed to allow data transfer via modems. However, IEC 60870-5-103
defines the data transfer protocol as an 11 bit format of 1 start, 1 stop, 8 data and even parity, which is a mode
most commercial modems do not support. High performance modems will support this mode, but are expensive.
For this reason, a parity setting is provided to allow use of easily available and relatively inexpensive commercial
modems. This will result in a small reduction in data security and the system will not be compatible with true IEC
60870-5-103 control systems.
8.1.1
Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s)
RS232C defines devices as being either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) e.g. computers, or data
Communications Equipment (DCE), e.g. modems, where one is designed to be connected to the other. In this
case, two DCE devices (the modem and the fibre-optic converter) are being connected together, so a null terminal
connector is required, which switches various control lines. The fibre-optic converter is then connected to the
relay Network Tx to Relay Rx and Network Rx to Relay Tx.
8.1.2
Setting the Remote Modem
The exact settings of the modem are dependent on the type of modem. Although most modems support the basic
Hayes AT command format, different manufacturers use different commands for the same functions. In addition,
some modems use DIP switches to set parameters, others are entirely software configured.
Before applying settings, the modems factory default settings should be applied, to ensure it is in a known state.
Several factors must be considered to allow remote dialling to the relays. The first is that the modem at the
remote end must be configured as auto answer. This will allow it to initiate communications with the relays. Next,
the user should set the data configuration at the local port, i.e. baud rate and parity, so that communication will be
at the same rate and format as that set on the relay and the error correction is disabled.
Auto-answer usually requires two parameters to be set. The auto-answer setting should be switched on and the
number of rings after which it will answer. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) settings should be forced on. This tells
the modem that the device connected to it is ready to receive data.
The parameters of the modems RS232C port are set to match those set on the relay, set baud rate and parity to
be the same as the settings on the relay and number of data bits to be 8 and stop bits 1. Note, although the
device may be able to communicate with the modem at say 19200 bps, the modem may only be able to transmit
over the telephone lines at 14400 bps. Therefore, a baud rate setting on which the modem can transmit should be
chosen. In this example, a baud rate of 9600 should be chosen.
As the modems are required to be transparent, simply passing on the data sent from the controller to the device
and vice versa, error correction and buffering is turned off.
If possible, Data Carrier Detect (DCD) should be forced on, as this control line will be used by the Fibre-optic
converter.
Finally, these settings should be stored in the modems memory for power on defaults.
8.1.3
Connecting to the Remote Modem
Once the remote modem has been configured correctly, it should be possible to dial up the modem and make
connection to the relay. As the settings on the remote modem are fixed the local modem should negotiate with it
on connection, choosing suitable matching settings. If it cannot do this, the local modem should be set with
settings equivalent to those of the remote modem as described above.
Section 9: Configuration
The data points and control features which are possible within the relay is fixed and can be transmitted over the
communication channel(s) protocols in the default format described earlier in this section. The default data
transmitted is not always directly compatible with the needs of the substation control system and will require some
tailoring, this can be done by the user with the Reydisp software comms editor tool.
The Comms Editor is provided to allow its users to configure the Communications Files Protocols in Reyrolle
brand Relays manufactured by Siemens Protection Devices Limited (SPDL).
The editor supports configuring DNP3, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-101 and MODBUS protocols.
The editor allows configuration files to be retrieved from the relay, edited, then uploaded back to the relay. Files
may also be saved/loaded from disc to work offline. The protocols will be stored in a Reyrolle Protection Device
Comms file (RPDC), which will be stored locally, so that the editor can be used when the relay is not connected.
DNP3
The tool will allow:
Data Points to be enabled or disabled.
Changing the point numbers for the Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and Analogue Inputs.
Changing their assigned class and variants for Object 10, 11 & 13 and specifying inclusion in a Class 0 poll.
Setting Binary points to be inverted before transmission.
Setting the Control Relay Output Block (CROB) commands that can be used with a Binary Output (Object 12).
Specifying a dead-band outside which Analogue Events will be generated.
Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission.
IEC60870-5-103
Changing the point numbers Function Type (FUN) and Information (INF), returned by each point.
Changing the text returned to Reydisp for display in its event viewer.
IEC60870-5-101
Changing the Information Object Address (IOA) and information type returned by each point.
MODBUS-RTU
Note, as MODBUS points are polled they do not need to be enabled or disabled. The tool will allow:
Changing the Addresses for the Coils, Inputs and Registers.
Changing the format of the instrument returned in a register, e.g. 16 or 32 bit.
Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission.
The user can check if the relay contains user configured communication files via a meter in the relay menus.
Pressing the Enter and down arrow buttons on the fascia, then scrolling down, the number of files stored in the
relay is displayed. The file name can also be viewed by pressing the Cancel and Test/Reset buttons together
when in the relay Instruments menu. The user must ensure when naming the file, they use a unique file name
including the version number.
Please refer to the Comms Editor User Guide for further guidance.
Section 10: Glossary

Baud Rate
Data transmission speed.
Bit
The smallest measure of computer data.
Bits Per Second (bps)
Measurement of data transmission speed.
Data Bits
A number of bits containing the data. Sent after the start bit.
Data Echo
When connecting relays in an optical ring architecture, the data must be passed from one relay to the next,
therefore when connecting in this method all relays must have the Data Echo ON.
Half-Duplex Asynchronous Communications
Communications in two directions, but only one at a time.
Hayes AT
Modem command set developed by Hayes Microcomputer products, Inc.
Line Idle
Determines when the device is not communicating if the idle state transmits light.
Modem
MOdulator / DEModulator device for connecting computer equipment to a telephone line.
Parity
Method of error checking by counting the value of the bits in a sequence, and adding a parity bit to make the
outcome, for example, even.
Parity Bit
Bit used for implementing parity checking. Sent after the data bits.
RS232C
Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 232,
Revision C.
RS485
Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 485.
Start Bit
Bit (logical 0) sent to signify the start of a byte during data transmission.
Stop Bit
Bit (logical 1) sent to signify the end
USB
Universal Serial Bus standard for the transfer of data.
7SR224 Argus Installation

Overcurrent Relay

2008/03
First Issue
2008/11
Second Issue. Additional I/O connections added
2009/09
Third Issue. Core Balance CT arrangement & Comms options added.
2010/04
Fourth Issue. Check Synchronising added
2010/05
Fifth issue. Document reformat due to rebrand.
2012/09
Ethernet interface added
2012/12

2008/03
2435H80011-R2d-1a
First Release
2008/06
2435H80011-R3d-2b
Second Release. Loss Of Voltage
2008/10
2435H80011-R4-3
Single/Triple AutoReclose function
2009/09
2435H80011-R4c-3b
Additional RS485 & RS232 comms
2010/04
2435H80011-R4d-4
2012/09
2435H85010-R7b-7a
IEC 61850 added
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Section 1: Installation............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Packaging ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Unpacking, Storage and Handling .......................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Recommended Mounting Position .......................................................................................................... 3
1.4 Wiring...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 Earthing................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Ancillary Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 3
1.7 Disposal .................................................................................................................................................. 4
1.8 Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer Circuits .............................................................. 4
1.9 Fibre Optic Communication..................................................................................................................... 4
1.10 Front Cover ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings ................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Relay Dimensions and Weight ................................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Fixings..................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1
Crimps....................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.2
Panel Fixings ............................................................................................................................ 6
Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Case........................................................................................................................................................ 7
Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 10
4.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay............................................................................. 10
4.2 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay ......................................................................... 12
Section 5: Data Comms Connections .................................................................................................................... 13
5.1 RS485 Connection ................................................................................................................................ 13
5.2 RS232 Connections .............................................................................................................................. 14
5.3 IRIG-B Connections .............................................................................................................................. 14
5.4 Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections ...................................................................................................... 14
5.5 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 ..................................................................... 15
Section 6: Connection Diagrams............................................................................................................................ 17
6.1 Typical A.C. Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser Control Relay ................................................ 17
List of Figures
Figure 2.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case ......................................5
Figure 2.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case ......................................5
Figure 3.1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.e. USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) ......................7
Figure 3.1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS +
IRIG-B ..................................................................................................................................7
Figure 3.1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B...................................8
Figure 3.1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B...................................8
Figure 3.1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS .......................................8
Figure 4.1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ...................................................................................................10
Figure 4.1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 ......................................................11
Figure 4.2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 ...............................................................................................12
Figure 5.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays..........................................................13
Figure 5.4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network .........................14
Figure 5.4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network ........................15
Figure 5.5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection)........................................................15
Figure 5.5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection).....................................16
Figure 6.1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit.....................................................................17
Figure 6.1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT .............................................18
Figure 6.1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT ...................................19
Section 1: Installation
1.1
Packaging
Relays are supplied in packaging designed to mechanically protect them while in both transit and storage.
This packaging should be recycled where systems exist, or disposed of in a manner which does not provide a
threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered
to.
1.2
Unpacking, Storage and Handling
On receipt remove the relay from the container in which it was received and inspect it for obvious damage. It is
recommended that the relay not be removed from its case.
If damage has been sustained a claim should immediately be made against the carrier, also inform Siemens
Protection Devices Limited, and the local Siemens agent, using the Defect Report Form in the Maintenance
section of this manual.
When not required for immediate use, the relay should be returned to its original carton and stored in a clean, dry
place.
The relay contains static sensitive devices, which are susceptible to damage due to static discharge. The relays
electronic circuits are protected from damage by static discharge when the relay is housed in its case.
There can be no requirement to disassemble any relay, since there are no user serviceable parts in the relay. If
any modules have been tampered with, then the guarantee will be invalidated. Siemens Protection Devices
Limited reserves the right to charge for any subsequent repairs.
1.3
Recommended Mounting Position
The relay uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) which is used in the programming and for operation. The LCD has a
vertical viewing angle of 30 and is backlit. However, the best viewing position is at eye level, and this is
particularly important given its control features.
The relay should be mounted on the circuit breaker (or protection panel) to allow the operator the best access to
the relay functions
1.4
Wiring
The product should be wired according to the scheme requirements, with reference to the appropriate wiring
diagram. Refer to the appropriate Diagrams and Parameters document for a cross reference of wiring diagrams
and models.
1.5
Earthing
Terminal 28 of the PSU (Power Supply Unit) should be solidly earthed by a direct connection to the panel earth.
The Relay case earth stud connection should be connected to terminal 28 of the PSU.
It is normal practice to additionally 'daisy chain' together the case (safety) earths of all the Relays installed in a
panel to prevent earth current loops posing a risk to personnel.
1.6
Ancillary Equipment
The relay can be interrogated locally or remotely. For local interrogation a portable PC with suitable version of
MS Windows (2000 SP4 or XP SP2) and Reydisp Evolution software is required. The PC is connected to the
front USB port of the relay.
1.7
Disposal
The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All
laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to.
The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope
of either the European WEEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation.
1.8
Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer

Circuits
The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in
injury to personnel or damage to equipment
1.9
Fibre Optic Communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters
should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
1.10 Front Cover
The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in
place during normal operating conditions.
Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings

2.1
Relay Dimensions and Weight
Relays are supplied in size E10 and E12 cases.

The following drawing is available which gives panel cut-out and mounting details.
75 mm MIN
CLEARANCE
FOR ETHERNET
COMMS WIRING
177
151.5
159
168
Figure 2.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case
177
75 mm MIN
CLEARANCE
FOR ETHERNET
COMMS WIRING
151.5
159
168
Figure 2.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case
2.2
Fixings
2.2.1 Crimps
M4 Ring tongued crimps with 90 bend are recommended for connection to the standard M4 terminal screws
including the standard RS485 port connections.
2.2.2 Panel Fixings

Typical mounting screw kit per Relay)
Consists of 8 off M4x10mm Screws
8 off M4 Nuts
8 off M4 Lock Washer
Typical rear terminal block fixing kit (1kit per terminal block fitted to relay) Consists of:
28 x M4, 8mm Screws
28 x M4 Lock Washer
Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings

3.1
Case
D
Figure 3.1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.e. USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2)
Figure 3.1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS + IRIG-B
i.e.:- USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) IRIG B, 2 X Serial F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS)
Figure 3.1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B
Figure 3.1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B
Figure 3.1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS

(RJ45 shown, Fibre optic LC similar)
Notes
1) RECOMMENDED TERMINATIONS ARE PRE-INSULATED & MUST BE CRIMPED USING APPROVED
TOOLING.
2) RS485 (BLOCKBTERMS 14, 16, 18, 20) CONNECTIONS TO THIS COMMUNICATION FACILITY IS BY
SCREENED, TWISTED PAIR CABLE. CABLE SHOULD BE RS485 COMPLIANT. ON SITE WHEN WIRING
OTHER FACILITIES ENSURE THAT THESE TERMINALS AND OTHER COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
ARE NOT OBSCURED BY OTHER WIRING RUNS.
3) REQUIRED CLEARANCES FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN ABOVE IN 2.1 RELAY
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT.
Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams
4.1
Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
22
24
28
7SR224
+ve
-ve
BI 4
BO 7
BI 5
BO 8
+ve
-ve
+ve
BI 6
BO 9
BI 7
BO 10
+ve
+ve
BI 8
6
8
10
12
+ve
BI 10
BI 13
-ve
15
17
19
BO 13
23
BO 14
25
(Optional)
I/O
I/O
PSU
Analogue
Data
Comms
(Optional)
27
28
27
28
27
28
27
28
27
28
Rear View
Arrangement of terminals and modules
NOTES
Binary Input
Binary Output
C
1
BO 1
3
5
+ve
11
BO 3
+ve
BI 2
-ve
13
15
+ve
BO 4
BI 3
-ve
7
9
BI 1
-ve
17
19
BO 5
21
23
BO 6
27
25
26
Alternative Voltage Input

Connections for 6VT Models.
Note re-allocation of Terminals
1A
2
5A
IL1
(IA)
4
1A
6
5A
IL2
(IB)
VL1
(VA)
21
VL2
(VB)
23
VL3
(VC)
25
22
VL1
(VA)
17
VL2
(VB)
19
VL3
(VC)
21
V4
(VX)
23
V5
(VY)
25
18
20
22
1A
10
5A
IL3
(IC)
12
1A
14
16
Shows contacts internal to relay case

assembly.
Contacts close when the relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
GND.
Term.
15
BI =
BO =
VAUX
-ve
20
13
13
27
+ve
11
BI 12
Screen
(Optional)
I/O
+ve
18
+ve
16
11
BI 11
+ve
14
21
BI 9
RS485
BO 12
BO 2
2
BO 11
+ve
-ve
5A
I4
(IG/ISEF)
V4
(VX)
24
26
27
28
V6
(VZ)
24
26
27
28
Figure 4.1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224
Optional Additional I/O for (23 Inputs 22 Outputs) and (33 Inputs 30 Outputs) Models
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
+ve
-ve
BI 14
BO 15
+ve
-ve
BI 15
BO 16
+ve
BI 16
BO 17
11
+ve
BI 17
13
BO 18
15
+ve
BO 19
BI 18
17
19
+ve
-ve
BI 19
+ve
BO 20
21
BO 21
23
BI 20
25
BO 22
+ve
27
BI 21
+ve
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
BI 22
+ve
-ve
26
BI 23
28
+ve
-ve
BI 24
BO 23
+ve
-ve
BI 25
BO 24
+ve
BI 26
BO 25
11
+ve
BI 27
13
BO 26
15
+ve
BO 27
BI 28
17
19
+ve
-ve
BO 28
BI 29
21
BO 29
+ve
23
BI 30
25
BO 30
+ve
27
BI 31
+ve
BI 32
+ve
-ve
BI 33
Optional Additional I/O for (33 Inputs 14 Outputs) Models

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
+ve
-ve
+ve
BI 14
BI 24
+ve
-ve
+ve
BI 15
BI 25
+ve
BI 16
BI 26
BI 17
BI 27
BI 18
BI 28
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
BI 19
BI 29
+ve
-ve
+ve
BI 20
BI 30
BI 21
BI 31
BI 22
BI 32
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
-ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
-ve
+ve
BI 23
BI 33
-ve
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
Optional Additional I/O for (43 Inputs 22 Outputs) Models

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
+ve
-ve
BI 14
BO 15
+ve
-ve
BI 15
BO 16
+ve
BI 16
BO 17
+ve
BI 17
BO 18
+ve
BI 18
BO 19
BI 19
BO 20
3
5
7
9
BO 21
+ve
BI 20
4
6
8
10
11
13
12
15
17
21
23
25
BO 22
+ve
14
18
20
22
+ve
24
BI 22
+ve
BI 23
16
27
BI 21
-ve
19
+ve
-ve
26
28
+ve
+ve
-ve
BI 24
BI 34
+ve
+ve
-ve
BI 25
BI 35
BI 26
BI 36
BI 27
BI 37
BI 28
BI 38
BI 29
BI 39
BI 30
BI 40
BI 31
BI 41
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
+ve
BI 42
BI 32
+ve
-ve
-ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
-ve
BI 33
BI 43
+ve
-ve
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
Figure 4.1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224
4.2
Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay
Figure 4.2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224
Section 5: Data Comms Connections

5.1
RS485 Connection
The RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485
120 screened twisted pair cable.
The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must
support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature.
The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master driving the
connection. A terminating resistor is fitted in each relay, when required this is connected in circuit using an
external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 of the power supply module.
Up to 64 relays can be connected to the RS485 bus.
The RS485 data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case.
The relay is available with an additional RS485 port as an ordering option. The terminal arrangement for this port
are shown in Section 3: of this document. Connections shown below are duplicated on these ports to provide a
separate, parallel, interface.
Ext Wire loop to

Include line
terminating Res
To
Control
System
14
16
18
14
16
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
Rear terminals
14
16
18
20
Rear terminals
20
18
Term.
16
14
A
20
RS485
Screen
18
14
A
Term.
20
16
18
Term.
16
14
A
Screen
RS485
Screen
RS 485 Twisted pair screened Cable
To
Control
System
RS485
Figure 5.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays
5.2
RS232 Connections
The additional (optional) RS232 (9 pin plug) (DTE) communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can
be connected using a suitable RS232 cable. Pinout is shown in the table below. RTR/RTS and CTS pins are
connected together but Hardware Flow Control and RTS/CTS Handshaking are not provided.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Relay Function
Not Connected
Receive Data (RXD)
Transmit Data (TXD)
Input Supply +5 V
Signal Ground (GND)
Input Supply +5 V
Linked to 8 (volts free)
Linked to 7 (volts free)
Output Supply +5 V 50mA
Where there is a requirement for multi-drop RS232 connection, a suitable device to facilitate this should be
obtained.
5.3
IRIG-B Connections
A BNC plug is provided to connect a co-axial cable carrying IRIG-B time synchronisation signals. Ensure that the
stub length is minimised by connecting the tee-connector directly to the rear of the relay. A suitable co-axial cable
would be type RG 58 50ohms.
5.4
Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections
Rear Serial Com ports 3 and 4 comprise FibreOptic ST (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors-4 per product. 62.5 /
125m glass fibre is recommended for all distances.
When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable.
To
Control
System
Sigma 1
Tx
Master
Rx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
Laptop computer or
Control System
RS232 straight
through cable
25 pin male D
connector
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx

connectors
Figure 5.4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Sigma 3
USB or 9 pin male

D connector
Laptop computer or
Control System
RS 232 straight
through cable
25 pin male D
connector
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx

connectors
Figure 5.4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network
The fibre optic data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case.
5.5
Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850
Rear Ethernet Comms port Ch 1 and Ch 2 comprises FibreOptic Duplex LC connectors or electrical RJ45
connectors.
When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable, 62.5 / 125m glass fibre is recommended for all distances.
Figure 5.5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection)
To
Control
System
Switch
Input
Ch 1
Ch 1
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 2
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch n
Ch 1
Ch 2
62.5/125m fibre optic

with Duplex LC
connectors
Figure 5.5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection)
Section 6: Connection Diagrams

6.1
Typical A.C. Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser

Control Relay
L1
L2
L3
P1
1A
2
3
S1
S2
5A
1A
P2
IL1
(IA)
5A
IL2
(IB)
VL1
(VA)
21
VL2
(VB)
23
VL3
(VC)
25
22
8
9
1A
10
11
5A
IL3
(IC)
12
13
1A
14
15
5A
16
I4
(IG/ISEF)
V4
(VX)
A
24
26
27
28
B
C
NOTES
1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs.
2) CT and Earth connections are typical only.
3) Line side Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn
4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual
connections of L1, L2 & L3.
5) Bus side Voltage Config:- for optional Synchronising function.
Vbn shown, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, or Vca can be used.
Figure 6.1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit
L1
L2
L3
P1
1A
2
3
S1
S2
5A
1A
P2
IL1
(IA)
5A
IL2
(IB)
VL1
(VA)
21
VL2
(VB)
23
VL3
(VC)
25
22
8
9
1A
10
Core Balance CT
11
5A
IL3
(IC)
12
13
1A
14
15
5A
16
I4
(IG/ISEF)
V4
(VX)
A
24
26
27
28
B
C
NOTES
3) Phase Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn
4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit
actual connections of L1, L2 & L3.
5) Bus voltage connections for optional Check Synchronising feature are not shown.
Figure 6.1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT
L1
L2
L3
1A
2
P1
3
S1
S2
5A
1A
P2
VL4
(VX)
IL1
(IA)
5A
IL2
(IB)
8
9
5A
IL3
(IC)
12
13
1A
14
15
18
VL5
(VY)
19
VL6
(VZ)
21
VL1
(VA)
23
VL2
(VB)
25
VL3
(VC)
27
20
22
1A
10
11
17
5A
I4
(IG/ISEF)
16
24
26
28
A
B
C
NOTES
3) Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn is shown.
4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual
connections of L1/L4, L2/L5 & L3/L6.
Figure 6.1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT
7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide

Overcurrent Relay

2008/03
First issue
2008/06
Second issue
2009/09
Third issue
2010/04
Fourth issue
2010/05
Fifth issue. Document reformatted due to rebrand.
2012/09
Eighth Issue. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2012/12

2008/03
2435H80011-R2d-1a
First Release
2008/06
2435H80011-R3d-2b
Loss Of Voltage added
2008/10
2435H80011-R4-3
Single/Triple AutoReclose function
2009/09
2435H80011-R4c-3b
Software maintenance release.
2010/04
2434H80011-R4d-4
Synchronising added
2012/09
2435H85010-R7b-7a
IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2012/12
2435H85010-R7c-7a
Contents
Section 1: Common Functions .............................................................................................................5
1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Before Testing...........................................................................................................................5
1.2.1 Safety ...........................................................................................................................5
1.2.2 Sequence of Tests .......................................................................................................5
1.2.3 Test Equipment ............................................................................................................6
1.2.4 Precautions ..................................................................................................................6
1.2.5 Applying Settings .........................................................................................................6
1.3 Tests .........................................................................................................................................8
1.3.1 Inspection .....................................................................................................................8
1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests............................................................................................8
1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests.................................................................................................8
1.3.4 Putting into Service ......................................................................................................8
1.4 AC Energising Quantities..........................................................................................................9
1.5 Binary Inputs ...........................................................................................................................10
1.6 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................11
1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts................................................................................................12
Section 2: Protection Functions .........................................................................................................13
2.1 Phase Directional Polarity Check............................................................................................14
2.1.1 2 out of 3 logic............................................................................................................16
2.2 Phase Overcurrent (67/50,67/51) ...........................................................................................16
2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) ...............................................................................17
2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) .................................................................................17
2.3 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) ....................................................................................19
2.4 Cold Load (51C)......................................................................................................................21
2.4.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C) ..............................................................................22
2.5 Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N) ..........................................................................24
2.6 Measured Earth fault (67/50G,67/51G) ..................................................................................25
2.6.1 Directional Polarity .....................................................................................................26
2.6.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (67/50G)........................................................................26
2.6.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G) .........................................................................26
2.7 Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S,67/51S).....................................................................................29
2.7.1 Directional Polarity .....................................................................................................30
2.7.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (50SEF) ........................................................................30
2.7.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF)..........................................................................30
2.8 Restricted Earth fault (64H) ..................................................................................................33
2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ..................................................................35
2.9.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) ..................................................................36
2.9.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) .....................................................................36
2.10 Undercurrent (37)..................................................................................................................38
2.11 Thermal Overload (49)............................................................................................................40
2.12 Over/Under Voltage ................................................................................................................42
2.12.1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59)...........................................................................42
2.12.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) ..............................................................................44
2.12.3 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59) ..................................................45
2.12.4 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59) ..................................................46
2.13 NPS Overvoltage (47).............................................................................................................48
2.14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ......................................................................................................50
2.14.1 Definite Time (59NDT) ...............................................................................................50
2.14.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) .................................................................................................51
2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) ....................................................................................................52
Section 3: Supervision Functions ......................................................................................................54

3.1 CB Fail (50BF) .......................................................................................................................54
3.2 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS)...........................................................................56
3.2.1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail....................................................................................................56
3.2.2 3 Phase VT fail ...........................................................................................................57
3.3 Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus) ......................................................58
3.4 3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X)......................................................59
3.4.1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail....................................................................................................59
3.4.2 3 Phase VT fail ...........................................................................................................60
3.5 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS)...........................................................................61
3.6 Broken Conductor (46BC).....................................................................................................63
3.7 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ..........................................................................................65
3.8 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................66
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................67
4.1 Autoreclose (79)......................................................................................................................67
4.2 Synchronising..........................................................................................................................67
4.3 Live/Dead ................................................................................................................................68
4.4 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function .................................................................69
4.5 Quick Logic .............................................................................................................................69
Section 5: Testing and Maintenance ..................................................................................................70
5.1 Periodic Tests .........................................................................................................................70
5.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................70
5.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................71
Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions ..............................................................................72
6.1 General ...................................................................................................................................72
6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site ..................................................................72
6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded.............................................................72
6.2.2 Overall Software Information......................................................................................72
6.2.3 Product Configuration Information .............................................................................72
6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software ............................................73
6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front usb port ......................................................................73
6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems ...........................................................................73
List of Figures
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles ............................................................15

Phase Overcurrent.............................................................................................................16
Voltage Controlled Overcurrent .........................................................................................19
Cold Load...........................................................................................................................21
Cold Load Logic diagram...................................................................................................22
Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles..............................................................24
Measured Earth Fault ........................................................................................................25
Sensitive Earth Fault..........................................................................................................29
Restricted Earth Fault ........................................................................................................33
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ............................................................................35
Undercurrent ......................................................................................................................38
Thermal Overload ..............................................................................................................40
Phase Under/Over Voltage................................................................................................42
Vx Under/Over Voltage......................................................................................................45
Vx Under/Over Voltage......................................................................................................46
NPS Overvoltage ...............................................................................................................48
Neutral Overvoltage ...........................................................................................................50
Under/Over Frequency ......................................................................................................52
CB Fail ...............................................................................................................................54
Voltage Transformer Supervision ......................................................................................56
Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail .........................................................................58
3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision ....................................................................59
Current Transformer Supervision ......................................................................................61
Broken Conductor ..............................................................................................................63
Trip Circuit Supervision......................................................................................................65
Magnetising Inrush Detector..............................................................................................66

1.1
Overview
Commissioning tests are carried out to prove:

a)
Equipment has not been damaged in transit.
b)
Equipment has been correctly connected and installed.
c)
Prove characteristics of the protection and settings which are based on calculations.
d)
Confirm that settings have been correctly applied.
e)
To obtain a set of test results for future reference.
1.2
1.2.1
Before Testing
Safety
The commissioning and maintenance of this equipment should only be carried out by skilled personnel trained in
protective relay maintenance and capable of observing all the safety precautions and regulations appropriate to
this type of equipment and also the associated primary plant.
Ensure that all test equipment and leads have been correctly maintained and are in good condition. It is
recommended that all power supplies to test equipment be connected via a Residual Current Device (RCD),
which should be located as close to the supply source as possible.
The choice of test instrument and test leads must be appropriate to the application. Fused instrument leads
should be used when measurements of power sources are involved, since the selection of an inappropriate range
on a multi-range instrument could lead to a dangerous flashover. Fused test leads should not be used where the
measurement of a current transformer (C.T.) secondary current is involved, the failure or blowing of an instrument
fuse or the operation of an instrument cut-out could cause the secondary winding of the C.T. to become an open
circuit.
Open circuit secondary windings on energised current transformers are a hazard that can produce high voltages
dangerous to personnel and damaging to equipment, test procedures must be devised so as to eliminate this risk.
1.2.2
Sequence of Tests
If other equipment is to be tested at the same time, then such testing must be co-ordinated to avoid danger to
personnel and equipment.
When cabling and wiring is complete, a comprehensive check of all terminations for tightness and compliance
with the approved diagrams must be carried out. This can then be followed by the insulation resistance tests,
which if satisfactory allows the wiring to be energised by either the appropriate supply or test supplies.
When primary injection tests are completed satisfactorily, all remaining systems can be functionally tested before
the primary circuit is energised. Some circuits may require further tests before being put on load.
Protection relay testing will require access to the protection system wiring diagrams, relay configuration
information and protection settings. The following sequence of tests is loosely based on the arrangement of the
relay menu structure. A test log based on the actual tests completed should be recorded for each relay tested. A
typical example of this Site Test Sheet is included.
The Description of Operation section of this manual provides detailed information regarding the operation of
each function of the relay.
1.2.3
Test Equipment
Required test equipment is:

1. Secondary injection equipment with integral time interval meter The secondary injection equipment
should be appropriate to the protection functions to be tested
2. Primary injection equipment
3. A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. auxiliary supply rating
4. A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relays d.c. binary input rating
5. Other equipment as appropriate to the protection being commissioned this will be specified in the
product specific documentation.
. Additional equipment for general tests and for testing the communications channel is:
6. Portable PC with appropriate interface equipment.
7. Printer to operate from the above PC (Optional).
USE OF PC TO FACILITATE TESTING
The functions of Reydisp Evolution (see Section 2: Settings and Instruments) can be used during the
commissioning tests to assist with test procedures or to provide documentation recording the test and test
parameters. One method is to clear both the waveform and event records before each test is started, then, after
the test upload from the relay the settings, events and waveform files generated as a result of application of the
test. These can then be saved off to retain a comprehensive record of that test.
Relay settings files can be prepared on the PC (offline) or on the relay before testing commences. These settings
should be saved for reference and compared with the settings at the end of testing to check that errors have not
been introduced during testing and that any temporary changes to settings to suit the test process are returned to
the required service state.
A copy of the Relay Settings as a Rich Text Format (.rtf) file suitable for printing or for record purposes can be
produced from Reydisp as follows. From the File menu select Save As, change the file type to Export
Default/Actual Setting (.RTF) and input a suitable filename.
When testing is completed the event and waveform records should be cleared and the settings file checked to
ensure that the required in-service settings are being applied.
1.2.4
Precautions
Before electrical testing commences the equipment should be isolated from the current and voltage transformers.
The current transformers should be short-circuited in line with the local site procedure. The tripping and alarm
circuits should also be isolated where practical. The provision and use of secondary injection test sockets on the
panel simplifies the isolation and test procedure.
Ensure that the correct auxiliary supply voltage and polarity is applied. See the relevant scheme diagrams for the
relay connections.
Check that the nominal secondary current rating of the current and voltage transformers has been correctly set in
the System Config. menu of the relay.
1.2.5
Applying Settings
The relay settings for the particular application should be applied before any secondary testing occurs. If they are
not available then the relay has default settings that can be used for pre-commissioning tests. See the Relay
Settings section of this manual for the default settings.
Note that the tripping and alarm contacts for any function must be programmed correctly before any scheme tests
are carried out.
Relays feature multiple settings groups, only one of which is active at a time. In applications where more than one
settings group is to be used it may be necessary to test the relay in more than one configuration.
Note. One group may be used as a Test group to hold test-only settings that can be used for regular
maintenance testing, eliminating the need for the Test Engineer to interfere with the actual in-service settings in
the normally active group. This Test group may also be used for functional testing where it is necessary to disable
or change settings to facilitate testing.
When using settings groups it is important to remember that the relay need not necessarily be operating
according to the settings that are currently being displayed. There is an active settings group on which the relay
operates and an edit/view settings group which is visible on the display and which can be altered. This allows the
settings in one group to be altered from the relay fascia while the protection continues to operate on a different
unaffected group. The Active Settings Group and the Edit Settings Group are selected in the System
Configuration Menu.
The currently Active Group and the group currently Viewed are shown at the top of the display in the Settings
display screen. If the View Group is not shown at the top of the display, this indicates that the setting is common
to all groups. CT/VT ratio, I/O mapping and other settings which are directly related to hardware are common to
all groups.
If the relay is allowed to trip during testing then the instruments display will be interrupted and replaced by the
Trip Alert screen which displays fault data information. If this normal operation interferes with testing then this
function can be temporarily disabled for the duration of testing by use of the Trip Alert Enabled/Disabled setting in
the System Config Menu.
After applying a settings change to the relay, which may involve a change to the indication and output contacts,
the TEST/RESET key should be pressed to ensure any existing indication and output is correctly cleared.
1.3
Tests
1.3.1
Inspection
Ensure that all connections are tight and correct to the relay wiring diagram and the scheme diagram. Record any
deviations. Check that the relay is correctly programmed and that it is fully inserted into the case. Refer to
Section 2: Settings and Instruments for information on programming the relay.
1.3.2
Secondary Injection Tests
Select the required relay configuration and settings for the application.
Isolate the auxiliary D.C. supplies for alarm and tripping from the relay and remove the trip and intertrip links.
Carry out injection tests for each relay function, as described in this document
For all high current tests it must be ensured that the test equipment has the required rating and stability and that
the relay is not stressed beyond its thermal limit.
1.3.3
Primary Injection Tests
Primary injection tests are essential to check the ratio and polarity of the transformers as well as the secondary
wiring.
Note. If the current transformers associated with the protection are located in power transformer bushings it may
not be possible to apply test connections between the current transformer and the power transformer windings.
Primary injection is needed, however, to verify the polarity of the CTs. In these circumstances primary current
must be injected through the associated power transformer winding. It may be necessary to short circuit another
winding in order to allow current to flow. During these primary injection tests the injected current is likely to be
small due to the impedance of the transformer.
1.3.4
Putting into Service
After tests have been performed satisfactorily the relay should be put back into service as follows:Remove all test connections.
Replace all secondary circuit fuses and links, or close m.c.b.
Ensure the Protection Healthy LED is on, steady, and that all LED indications are correct. If necessary press
CANCEL until the Relay Identifier screen is displayed, then press TEST/RESET to reset the indication LEDs.
The relay meters should be checked in Instruments Mode with the relay on load
The relay settings should be downloaded to a computer and a printout of the settings produced. The installed
settings should then be compared against the required settings supplied before testing began. Automated setting
comparison can be carried out by Reydisp using the Compare Settings Groups function in the Edit menu. Any
modified settings will be clearly highlighted.
1.4
AC Energising Quantities
Voltage and current measurement for each input channel is displayed in the Instrumentation Mode sub-menus,
each input should be checked for correct connection and measurement accuracy by single phase secondary
injection at nominal levels. Ensure that the correct instrument displays the applied signal within limits of the
Performance Specification.
Phase references A, B & C are allocated to the hardware inputs by user configurable settings. This allows the
7SR224 to be wired to the primary CT and VT without prior knowledge of the customers preference for phase
letter allocation. Current and voltage injection test wiring connections must be adjusted to suit in order that phases
are indicated correctly.
Applied Current
IA
IB
IC
IG
Applied Voltage
ISEF
VA/VAB
VB/VBC
VC/VCB
VX
Secondary
Primary
Apply 3P balanced Current and Voltage at nominal levels and ensure that the measured Zero Phase Sequence
and Negative Phase Sequence quantities are approximately zero. Phase rotation sequence is adjustable by user
setting. Test equipment must be set to reflect this setting to provide correct results for directional protection and
any feature which uses positive and negative phase sequence components.
ZPS
NPS
Voltage
Current
1.5
Binary Inputs
The operation of the binary input(s) can be monitored on the Binary Input Meters display shown in Instruments
Mode. Apply the required supply voltage onto each binary input in turn and check for correct operation.
Depending on the application, each binary input may be programmed to perform a specific function; each binary
should be checked to prove that its mapping and functionality is as set as part of the Scheme Operation tests.
Where the pick-up timers associated with a binary input are set these delays should be checked either as part of
the scheme logic or individually. To check a binary pick-up time delay, temporarily map the binary to an output
relay that has a normally open contact. This can be achieved in the Output Matrix sub-menu by utilising the BI n
Operated settings. Use an external timer to measure the interval between binary energisation and closure of the
output contacts. Similarly, to measure the drop-off delay, map to an output relay that has a normally closed
contact, time the interval between binary de-energisation and closure of the output contacts.
Note. The time measured will include an additional delay, typically less than 20ms, due to the response time of
the binary input hardware, software processing time and the operate time of the output relay.
BI
Tested
DO
Delay
Measured
PU Delay
Measured
Notes (method of initiation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1.6
Binary Outputs
A minimum of six output relays are provided. Two of these have change over contacts, BO2 & BO3, one has a
normally closed contact, BO1 and the remainder have normally open contacts.
Care should be observed with regard to connected devices when forcing contacts to operate for test purposes.
Short duration energisation can cause contact failure due to exceeding the break capacity when connected to
inductive load such as electrically reset trip relays.
Close each output relay in turn from the Reydisp Evolution PC programme, Relay Control - Close output relay.
This function will energise the output for its minimum operate time. This time is specified in the Output Config Binary Output Config menu for each output relay and may be too short to measure with a continuity tester.
An alternative method of energising an output permanently so that wiring can be checked is to temporarily map
the relay being tested to the Protection Healthy signal in the Output Matrix, as this signal is permanently
energised the mapped relay will be held energised, normally open contacts will be closed and vice versa.
BO
Checked
Notes (method of test)
1NC
2NO
2NC
3NO
3NC
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1.7
Relay Case Shorting Contacts
CT inputs and terminals B25-B26 (Relay Withdrawn Alarm) are fitted with case mounted shorting contacts which
provide a closed contact when the relay is withdrawn from the case. The operation of these contacts should be
checked.
CT Shorting contacts checked
Relay Withdrawn Alarm Checked

This section details the procedures for testing each protection function of the 7SR224 relay. These tests are
carried out to verify the accuracy of the protection pick-ups and time delays at setting and to confirm correct
operation of any associated input and output functionality.
Guidance for calculating test input quantities is given in the relevant test description where required. In many
cases it may be necessary to disable some functions during the testing of other functions, this prevents any
ambiguity caused by the operation of multiple functions from one set of input quantities. The Function Config
Menu provides a convenient high level point at which all elements of a particular function can be
Enabled/Disabled to suit testing. The Config tab in Reydisp Evolution can be used to Enable/Disable individual
elements. Note that this screen disables functions by applying setting changes to the relay and that any changes
must be sent to the relay to take effect and settings must be returned to their correct value after testing.
Cold Load
Restricted E/F
O
O
Undercurrent
O
O
Phase U/O voltage
Vx U/O voltage
NPS Overvoltage
U/O Frequency
CB Fail
O
O
O
O
VT Supervision
CT supervision
Broken Conductor
O
O
Trip cct
Inrush Detector
The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of functions during testing if other functions are
disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified.
Voltage inputs may not be required for testing of non-directional Overcurrent elements but it may be
advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid
inadvertent operation of other functions. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that
the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded.
It should be considered that where several overlapping elements are used simultaneously, the overall protection
operate time may be dependent on the operation of different individual elements at the various levels of applied
Inrush Detector
Trip cct Supervision
Sensitive E/F
Thermal
Broken Conductor
CT supervision
VT Supervision
CB Fail
U/O Frequency
NPS Overvoltage
Vx U/O voltage
Measured E/F
NPS Overcurrent
Phase U/O voltage
Restricted E/F
Sensitive E/F
Measured E/F
Thermal
Undercurrent
Voltage Cont O/C
NPS Overcurrent
Phase Overcurrent
Cold Load
Under Test
Voltage Cont O/C
Function
Phase Overcurrent
The table below indicates functions where function conflicts may occur during testing, consideration should be
given to disabling functions to avoid interference.
current or voltage. The resulting composite characteristic may be tested by enabling all of the relevant applicable
elements or the element operations can be separated or disabled and tested individually.
All relay settings should be checked before testing begins. It is recommended that the relay settings are extracted
from the relay using Reydisp Evolution software and a copy of these settings is stored for reference during and
after testing. It may be necessary to disable some protection functions during the testing of other functions to
allow unambiguous results to be obtained.
Care must be taken to reset or re-enable any settings that have been temporarily altered during the testing before
the relay can be put into service. At the end of testing the relay settings should be compared to the file extracted
at the start to ensure that errors have not been introduced.
An example Test Sheet summary document is included at the end of this Guide.
2.1
Phase Directional Polarity Check
If the relay has Directional Overcurrent elements, the common direction polarising can be checked independently
from the individual overcurrent elements and their settings.
In the INSTRUMENTS MODE display, indication is provided in the DIRECTIONAL METERS menu which displays
current direction under P/F Dir as forward or reverse based on the output states of the directional elements, i.e.
whether they see forward current, reverse current or neither for each pole with respect to the 67 Char Angle
setting in the Phase Overcurrent menu. This display and the equivalent Measured and Calculated Earth Fault
direction meters can be used as an aid to commissioning testing.
The tests below show directional polarising for convention A-B-C positive phase sequence. In the unusual case of
A-C-B positive phase sequence applications, the polarising voltages are inverted to suit the actual conditions for
such a system as shown below.
1.
Check the direction of each pole in turn by connecting to the appropriate terminals. The table below shows
the polarising quantity for each pole.
Connections for Directional Polarity

Overcurrent pole
Polarising voltage
Phase A
VBC
Phase B
VCA
Phase C
VAB
Connections for non standard A-C-B positive phase sequence applications.

Overcurrent pole
Polarising voltage
Phase A
VCB
Phase B
VAC
Phase C
VBA
2.
Inject single phase rated current and apply single phase-phase rated voltage at the Char Angle (MTA) phase
angle setting, to each phase in turn. For each pole, monitor the directional display in the instrument menu
and check that indication of forward current (FWD) is displayed. To achieve the required forward
Characteristic Angle, the phase angle of the current should be greater than that of the polarising voltage by
the angle setting.
3.
Repeat all of the above with the current connections reversed. Indication should now be given of reverse
(REV) current flow.
Phase
4.
Forward
FWD
FWD
FWD
Reverse
REV
REV
REV
Apply balanced 3 phase rated voltage and current with Vbc (or Vcb for non standard A-C-B system
applications) voltage as a 0deg reference and Ia at the characteristic angle. Increase current phase angle
until the Fwd indication is extinguished. Record this angle in the table below (Forward lead DO). Continue
to increase/decrease the angle until the instrument reads Rev. Record the angle (Reverse lead PU).
Reduce the current angle until the Rev extinguishes (Reverse lead DO). and the Fwd subsequently returns
(Forward lead PU), recording the angles. Repeat the above tests, starting from the Characteristic Angle, but
reducing the current phase angle to record the directional boundaries in the opposite (lag) direction. The
recorded angle should be the angle at which the phase current leads the phase-phase polarising voltage.
This measurement is greatly simplified if the polarising reference voltage is set to 0deg and the current
phase angle is measured with respect to this reference.
Alternatively, the instrument can be checked at the 4 points marked a,b,c & d on Figure 2-1 only.
Forward
Lag (point C)
Pick-up
MTA
Drop-off
MTA-85
Reverse
Lead (point A)
Pick-up
MTA+85
Drop-off
Lead(point B)
Pick-up
MTA-85
Drop-off
Lag (point D)
Pick-up
Drop-off
MTA-85
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Figure 2-1
Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles
5. With the instrument reading Fwd or Rev, reduce the voltage until the element resets. Record the minimum
phase-phase operate voltage.
Minimum Voltage Setting
Measured
2.1.1
2 out of 3 logic
Ensure that at least 1 Phase Overcurrent element is set to Directional. Apply balanced nominal voltage. Apply
current at a level above on phase A only at the characteristic angle for forward operation, normally 45 lagging.
Ensure no Directional Phase Overcurrent element operation occurs. Note that non-directional Phase Overcurrent
and Non-direction Earth Fault elements may operate unless disabled.
Repeat the test with Phase A current as above but also with equal current in the B phase at 180 to that in the A
phase.
1 phase current
2 phase current
No 50/51-n Operation
50/51-n operation
2.2
Phase Overcurrent (67/50,67/51)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
27
59
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-2
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Phase Overcurrent
Voltage Inputs:
VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements.
Current Inputs:
IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC),
Disable:
51V, 51C, 46, 49, 50CBF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
51-n/50-n - Self Reset
Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some
functions to avoid ambiguity. It should be particularly noted that if the function is enabled, the 51C Cold Load
settings may modify the normal 50-n and 51-n settings if the CB is open during testing.
Voltage inputs may not be required for this function if the Phase Overcurrent functions are not directional but it
may be advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid
inadvertent operation of other functions. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that
the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded.
2.2.1
Definite Time Overcurrent
(50)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates.

If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Phase
Dir.
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
IL1(IA)
IL2(IB)
IL3(IC)
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.2.2
Inverse Time Overcurrent (51)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.
Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting current and record operating time,
Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times
Ph.
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Dir
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
TM
Operate Current
P.U.
D.O.
(Amps) (Amps)
Operate Time
2 x Is 5 x Is
(sec) (sec)
NOTES
IL1(IA)
IL2(IB)
IL3(IC)
Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0

Curve
2 xIs
5 xIs
IEC-NI
10.03
4.28
IEC-VI
13.50
3.38
IEC-EI
26.67
3.33
IEC-LTI
120.00
30.00
ANSI-MI
3.80
1.69
ANSI-VI
7.03
1.31
ANSI-EI
9.52
1.30
Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a
Follower DTL applied.
2.2.2.1
Element Blocking
The Phase Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector
operation, as well as 79 Autoreclose settings for Inst/Delayed. The Characteristic can be modified by Cold Load
(51-n only) and Voltage Controlled Overcurrent and can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This
functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VTS action
Inrush Detector
51-1
51-2
51-3
51-4
50-1
50-2
50-3
50-4
2.2.2.2
ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have an ANSI (decaying) reset delay applied. If
ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous.
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and Time multiplier
(TM) = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve
Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs)
ANSI-MI
4.85
ANSI-VI
21.6
ANSI-EI
29.1
Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for
the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation
(c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.
Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time
(c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
First test (c)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
Second Test
(c)
2.3
Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
OC Phase
Control Voltage
IL1(IA)
V12(VAB)
IL2(IB)
V23(VBC)
IL3(IC)
V31(VCA)

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
47
(x2)
Figure 2-3
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
V4
(VX)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Voltage Controlled Overcurrent
Voltage Inputs:
VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC)
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51C, 46, 37, 49, 50CBF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
51-n/50-n - Self Reset
Shaped Phase Overcurrent elements 51-n should be tested for pick-up and timing before this function is tested.
The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of this function if other functions are disabled or if the
setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified.
Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. Apply 3 phase balanced current at a level below the normal 51-n setting
but above the effective 51V-n setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded. Gradually
reduce the voltage until the a-b voltage is less than the Voltage setting. Pickup LED operation can be used to
confirm the Voltage setting. If the 51V-n current setting is above the continuous rating of the relay an alternative
procedure should be used, apply test current in short duration shots with applied voltage being gradually reduced
for each subsequent shot
Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. Reduce the voltage such that the a-b voltage is 110% of the Voltage
setting
Gradually increase the a-b phase current or balanced 3P current until Pickup LED operates. Confirm result of
Phase O/C test above.
Reduce the applied voltage to a level such that V12(VAB) phase-phase voltage is less than 90% of the setting.
Gradually increase the I12(IAB) phase-phase current until Pickup LED operates.
Note that these elements may be set as directional. If this is the case, the phase angle of the current must be set
with respect to the voltage to produce operation of the elements.
Voltage Setting (V, p-p)
I Setting
Measured (V, p-p)
Multiplier
Calculated PU
Measured
51-1 Pickup
51-2 Pickup
51-3 Pickup
51-4 Pickup
2.3.1.1
Element Blocking
The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function can be set to Inhibit for VT Supervision operation. This functionality
should be checked. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition.
Increase 3P current until the element operates at its full setting, i.e. 51V settings are not used.
Element
VTS action
51-1
51-2
51-3
51-4
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts.
2.4
Cold Load (51C)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-4
27
59
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Cold Load
Voltage Inputs:
VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51V, 46, 49, 50CBF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
51-n - Self Reset
The CB must be open for more than the Cold Load Pick-up Time to allow testing of this function. It may be
convenient to reduce this setting to suit the test procedure. If the CB is open throughout the tests, the Cold Load
protection settings can be tested provided that the current is not allowed to fall below the level of the Reduced
Current Level for more than the Reduced Current Time during testing. It may be convenient to set the Reduced
Current setting to Disabled for the duration of the test. The Cold Load Active output is provided and can be used
as an indication during testing.
Cold Load
Enabled
Disabled
Pick-up Time
&
CB Open
Drop-off Time
51c
See Delayed
Overcurrent
(51-n)
CB Closed
S
Q
51c-n Setting
51c-n Charact
51c-n Time Mult
Reduced
Current
51c-n Delay (DTL)
Reduced
Current Level
51c-n Min. Operate Time
Reduced Current DTL
Enabled
51c-n Follower DTL
Disabled
&
51c-n Reset
<
IL1
start
L1 Dir En
L2 Dir En
General Starter
51-n
trip
<
IL2
start
trip
<
IL3
start
L3 Dir En
Figure 2-5
trip
Cold Load Logic diagram
Ensure that the Cold load active is not raised. This can be reset by CB closed for more than the Cold Load Dropoff Time or current less than the Reduced Current Level for greater than the Reduced Current Time. Check the
Cold Load Pick-up Delay by applying or simulating CB Open. Measure the time delay before Cold Load Active is
raised. Apply current above the Reduced Current Level if this functionality is Enabled before applying CB Closed.
Measure the time for Cold Load Active to reset.
2.4.1
Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C)
Ph.
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Dir
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
TM
Operate Current
P.U.
D.O.
(Amps) (Amps)
Operate Time
2 x Is
5 x Is
(sec)
(sec)
NOTES
IL1(IA)
IL2(IB)
IL3(IC)

Curve
2 xIs
5 xIs
IEC-NI
10.03
4.28
IEC-VI
13.50
3.38
IEC-EI
26.67
3.33
IEC-LTI
120.00
30.00
ANSI-MI
3.80
1.69
ANSI-VI
7.03
1.31
ANSI-EI
9.52
1.30
2.4.1.1
ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected
for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous.
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The
reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve
ANSI-MI
4.85
ANSI-VI
21.6
ANSI-EI
29.1
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
First test (c)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
Second Test (c)
2.5
Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N)
Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be set as directional. These are polarised from
residual voltage, calculated from the 3 phase voltage inputs or the 3Vo input depending on the Phase Voltage
Config setting in the CT/VT Config menu.
The relay Char Angle setting is the Characteristic Phase angle of the fault impedance i.e. the phase angle of the
fault current with respect to the voltage driving the current. The earth fault functions are polarised from the
residual voltage which is in anti-phase with the fault voltage for a single-phase to earth fault. Care is required
when testing by secondary injection with regard to current and voltage polarity.
To simulate an earth fault on a relay with 3 phase-phase or 3 phase-neutral connected voltage inputs, defined by
the Phase Voltage Config setting of Van,Vbn,Vcn or Va,Vb,Vc, proceed as follows. Balanced 3P voltage should
first be applied, then the phase-neutral voltage magnitude on the faulted phase should be reduced in magnitude
with no change in phase angle to produce Vres and simulate the fault. The fault current, on the faulted phase
only, should be set at the MTA with respect to the phase-neutral voltage on the faulted phase, e.g. for a relay
setting of -15, set the phase current to lag the ph-n voltage by 15.
Alternatively, a single phase voltage source can be used in the above test. The polarity of this voltage, applied to
the faulted phase-neutral alone, must be reversed to produce the same residual voltage (Vres) phase direction as
that produced by the 3P voltage simulation described above.
For the Phase Voltage Config of Vab, Vbc, Vo, the single phase voltage applied to the Vo input is used as the
polarising quantity. The inversion is once again required since this input is designed to measure the residual
voltage directly, as produced by an open delta VT arrangement. The current must be set at the MTA with respect
to the inversion of this voltage. e.g. for a relay setting of -15, the phase current must lag the (Vo+180) voltage by
15, i.e. if Vo is set at 180, set Iph at -15.
If the Pickup of one directional Earth Fault element is mapped to an LED, this can be used to check directional
boundaries for pickup and drop-off as the current phase angle is increased and decreased. Note that the
Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault have separate directional settings and must be tested
individually.
The diagram opposite shows a Phase A

Earth fault.
-300
FWD
Apply residual voltage either directly to input or

by reducing voltage of faulted phase.
B
-600
VRES
IC
IB
+900
-900
C.A.
IPHASE
IA
+1200
REV
+1500
d
1800
Figure 2-6
Adjust the phase angle of the phase current

relative to the voltage:
Verify directional pick-up and drop off at points
A, B, C and D
Alternatively,
Verify correct directional indication at points a,
b, c and d (C.A +750, +950, -750, -950)
Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles
2.6
Measured Earth fault (67/50G,67/51G)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
67/
50G
(x4)
64
H
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
67/
50G
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
*
VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-7
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
* *
67/
51G
(x4)
* *
67/
51G
(x4)
NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive.

67/51G(x4) can be selected as I4 or derived from IL1-IL3
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Measured Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
IL1-IL3 (IA-Ic) or I4 (IG) (selectable)
Disable:
50CBF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
51G-n/50G-n - Self Reset
functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF, Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled
individually or as groups in the Function Config menu.
The operating current source for these elements is selectable and may be either measured directly on current
input I4 or the calculated residual current derived from the sum of current inputs IL1 IL3. This selection is specified
by the 50/51G Measurement setting in the Measured E/F sub-menu of the Current Protn menu. Tests must be
applied using the correct analogue inputs.
If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce
an operation of those elements.
2.6.1
Directional Polarity
See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details.
Forward
MTA
Lag (point C)
Pick-up
Drop-off
Reverse
Lead (point A)
Pick-up
Lead(point B)
Drop-off
Pick-up
Lag (point D)
Drop-off
Pick-up
MTA-85
MTA+85
MTA-85
MTA-85
..
...
Drop-off
Measured
EF
2.6.2
(67/50G)

Phas
e
I1/I4*
Dir.
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
* Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting.

Note that these elements can be set to directional.
If VTS action is set to BLOCK, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase
voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate.
If VTS action is set to Non-Directional, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce
a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its
normal setting. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset.
2.6.3
Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G)
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMIN
G
TESTS
Ph.
(I1 or
*
I4)
Dir
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
T.M.
Operate Current
P.U.
D.O.
(Amps)
(Amps)
Operate Time
2 x Is
5 x Is
(sec)
(sec)
NOT
ES
* Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting.

Curve
2 xIs
5 xIs
IEC-NI
10.03
4.28
IEC-VI
13.50
3.38
IEC-EI
26.67
3.33
IEC-LTI
120.00
30.00
ANSI-MI
3.80
1.69
ANSI-VI
7.03
1.31
ANSI-EI
9.52
1.30
2.6.3.1
Element Blocking
The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector
operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be
checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VTS action
Inrush Detector
51G-1
51G-2
51G-3
51G-4
50G-1
50G-2
50G-3
50G-4
2.6.3.2
ANSI Reset
Curve
ANSI-MI
4.85
ANSI-VI
21.6
ANSI-EI
29.1
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
First test (c)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
Second Test (c)
2.7
Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S,67/51S)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-8
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Sensitive Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
I4 (ISEF)
Disable:
64H, 50CBF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
51SEF-n/50SEF-n - Self Reset
functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF, Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled
individually or as groups in the Function Config menu.
If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce
an operation of those elements.
2.7.1
Directional Polarity
See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details.
Forward
MTA
Lag (point C)
Pick-up
Drop-off
Reverse
Lead (point A)
Pick-up
Lead(point B)
Drop-off
Pick-up
Lag (point D)
Drop-off
Pick-up
MTA
-85/87.5
MTA
MTA
MTA
+85/87.5
-85/87.5
-85/87.5
..
...
Drop-off
SEF
2.7.2
(50SEF)

Phas
e
I4(ISE
F)
Dir.
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES

Note that these elements can be set to directional.
2.7.3
Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF)
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Ph.
Dir
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI,
DTL)
Is
(A)
T.M.
Operate Current
P.U.
D.O.
(Amps)
(Amps)
Operate Time
2 x Is
5 x Is
(sec)
(sec)
NOTES
I4(ISEF)

2 xIs
5 xIs
IEC-NI
Curve
10.03
4.28
IEC-VI
13.50
3.38
IEC-EI
26.67
3.33
IEC-LTI
120.00
30.00
ANSI-MI
3.80
1.69
ANSI-VI
7.03
1.31
ANSI-EI
9.52
1.30
2.7.3.1
Element Blocking
The Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. The Characteristic
can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VTS action
51SEF-1
51SEF-2
51SEF-3
51SEF-4
50SEF-1
50SEF-2
50SEF-3
50SEF-4
2.7.3.2
ANSI Reset
Curve
ANSI-MI
4.85
ANSI-VI
21.6
ANSI-EI
29.1
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
First test (c)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
Second Test (c)
2.8
Restricted Earth fault (64H)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-9
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Restricted Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
I4 (IREF)
Disable:
51SEF, 50SEF, 79
Map Pickup LED:
64H - Self Reset
The setting resistance should be measured and the value compared to that specified in the settings data. Both
values should be recorded.
Settings Data Resistor Value
Measured
The high value of setting resistance R will often interfere with secondary current injection when using a digital test
set. It is normal practice in these cases to short out the resistor to allow testing, the shorting link should be
removed after testing.
Since the DTL setting is generally small the pick-up setting can be tested by gradually increasing current until
element operates. The relay should be disconnected from the current transformers for this test.
Phas
e
REF
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
It is also desirable to check the operating voltage achieved with the setting resistor and all parallel CTs connected
but de-energised. A higher capacity test set will be required for this test. Adequate current must be supplied to
provide the magnetising current of all connected CTs. Precautions should be taken to ensure that no personnel
are at risk of contact with any of the energised secondary wiring during the test.
Settings Data Voltage Setting
Measured
To complete testing of the REF requires primary injection through the phase and residual (REF) CT in series to
simulate an out of zone fault and ensure stability of the relay. The test can then be repeated with the REF CT
secondary connections reversed to prove operation.
2.8.1.1
Element Blocking
The Restricted Earth Fault element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
64H

Check that any shorting links are removed after testing.
2.9
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
(46NPS)
7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
27
59
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-10
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51, 51V, 51C, 37, 49, 50CBF, 60CTS, 46BC
Map Pickup LED:
46IT/46DT - Self Reset
Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the
highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings.
The Thermal withstand limitations of the current inputs, stated in the Performance Specification should always be
observed throughout testing.
NPS Overcurrent can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase current connections should be
reversed so that the applied balanced 3P current is Negative Phase Sequence. For relay applications on non
standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B, NPS current is provided by a 3 phase source with
conventional A-B-C phase sequence
2.9.1
Definite Time NPS Overcurrent
(46DT)

Phase
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
NPS
2.9.2
Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT)
Ph.
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Char.
(NI EI VI LTI,
DTL)
Is
(A)
TM
Operate Current
P.U.
D.O.
(Amps)
(Amps)
Operate Time
2 x Is
5 x Is
(sec)
(sec)
NOTES
NPS

Curve
2 xIs
5 xIs
IEC-NI
10.03
4.28
IEC-VI
13.50
3.38
IEC-EI
26.67
3.33
IEC-LTI
120.00
30.00
ANSI-MI
3.80
1.69
ANSI-VI
7.03
1.31
ANSI-EI
9.52
1.30
2.9.2.1
ANSI Reset
Curve
ANSI-MI
4.85
ANSI-VI
21.6
ANSI-EI
29.1
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
First test (c)
2.9.2.2
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
Second Test (c)
Element Blocking
The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
46IT
46DT
When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
2.10 Undercurrent (37)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-11
47
(x2)
27
59
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Undercurrent
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51N, 51G, 46, 60CTS, 46BC
Map Pickup LED:
37-n - Self Reset
If two Undercurrent 37 elements are used with different settings, it is convenient to test the element with the
lowest setting first. The higher setting element can then be tested without interference from the other element.
Apply 3P balanced current at a level above the Undercurrent 37-n setting until the element resets.
If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce any each phase current in turn until element operates.
Testing of this element phase by phase may cause inadvertent operation of the 46 NPS Overcurrent elements.
Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time
Phase
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
0.5 x Is
NOTES
IL1(IA)
IL2(IB)
IL3(IC)
2.10.1.1
Element Blocking
The Undercurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
37-1
37-2
2.11 Thermal Overload (49)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-12
27
59
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Thermal Overload
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51, 50, 37, 50CBF
Map Pickup LED:
49Alarm
The current can be applied from a 3P balanced supply or phase by phase from a 1P supply. Alternatively the 3
phase current inputs can be connected in series and injected simultaneously from a single 1P source.
The Thermal Overload Setting and Time Constant Setting can be considered together to calculate the operating
time for a particular applied current.
The following table lists operate times for a range of Time Constant Settings for an applied current of 2x the
Thermal Overload setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded during this test.
Time Constant (mins)
Operate Time (sec)
17.3
34.5
51.8
69
86.3
10
173
15
259
20
345
25
432
30
51.8
50
863
100
1726
The Thermal State must be in the fully reset condition in order to measure the operate time correctly. This can be
achieved by setting change in the Thermal protection settings menu or by pressing the Test/Reset button when
the Thermal Meter is shown in the Instruments Mode.
Reset the thermal State then apply 2x the Overload Setting current.
Calculated Operate Time (s)
Measured Operate Time (s)
If the Thermal Overload Capacity Alarm is used, this can be tested by monitoring the Thermal Capacity in the
instruments menu. If the Thermal time constant is longer than a few minutes, this can be assessed during the
timing test above. If the Time Constant is less than a few minutes, a lower multiple of current will be required such
that the rate of capacity increase is slowed to allow monitoring of the instrument to be accurate.
Capacity Alarm Setting
2.11.1.1
Measured
Element Blocking
The Thermal element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
49
2.12 Over/Under Voltage

2.12.1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59)
7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
27
59
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-13
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Phase Under/Over Voltage
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions
Disable:
47, 59N, 60VTS
Map Pickup LED:
27/59-n - Self Reset
Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test
the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling
the lower settings.
Note that if the voltage is reduced below the 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. VTS operation may
also block the 27 Undervoltage function. Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during
voltage element testing.
If the O/P Phases is set to All, the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously. Otherwise the 3
phases should be tested individually. If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the
applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The
LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the
reset voltage to check the Hysteresis setting. If the DTL is long, the operate level level should be checked by
applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting
plus the hysteresis setting.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting.
The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5%
Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary.

Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the
elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the
higher settings.
If the O/P Phases is set to All, the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3
phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the
applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting
Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to
check the Hysteresis setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of
setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting.
Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary.
Phase
27/59
setting
(Volts)
U
/
O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calc.)
P.U.
Volts
D.O
Volts
Op. Time
2x Vs (OV)
0.5x Vs
(UV)
UV
Guard
NOTES
V1(VA)
V2(VB)
V3(VC)
2.12.1.1
Element Blocking
The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality
should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VT Supervision
27/59-1
27/59-2
27/59-3
27/59-4
2.12.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG)

If any 27 Undervoltage element is set to be inhibited by the 27 Undervoltage Guard element, this function should
be tested.
Connect the test voltage inputs to suit the installation wiring diagram utilising any test socket facilities available. It
may be useful to temporarily map an LED as General Pickup to assist during testing. 27UVG operation will reset
the General Pickup if no other element is operated. This LED should not be set as Hand Reset in the Output
matrix.
Starting from nominal voltage, apply a step decrease to the applied voltage to a level below the 27 Undervoltage
setting but above the 27UVG setting such that an Undervoltage element operation occurs. Slowly reduce the
applied voltage until the 27 Undervoltage element resets, this can be detected by the General Pickup LED reset if
no other element is operated (this includes any Undervoltage element which is not UV Guarded).
Phas
e
Vs
(Volts)
V element
Used for test
Blocked
Volts
NOTES
UVG
2.12.3 VX Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-14
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Vx Under/Over Voltage
Voltage Inputs:
V4 (VX)
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
Vx 27/59 - Self Reset
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage applied to Vx input until element operates if the
element is Overvoltage. Alternatively, if the element is Undervoltage, increase single phase voltage applied to Vx
input until element operates.
If DTL is large, for Overvoltage elements, apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check
operation. For Undervoltage elements, apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check
operation.
Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time
Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the
element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 27/59 Hysteresis setting.
Phase
27/59
setting
(Volts)
U
/
O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O. (calc.)
P.U.
Volts
D.O
Volts
Op. Time
2x Vs (OV)
0.5x Vs
(UV)
UV
Guard
NOTES
V4(Vx)
2.12.3.1
Element Blocking
The Vx Under/Over Voltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This
functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VT Supervision
27/59x
2.12.4 VX Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)

Figure 2-15
VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
27
59
(x4)
V5
(VY)
27
59
(x4)
V6
(VZ)
27
59
(x4)
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Vx Under/Over Voltage
Voltage Inputs:
V4 (VX), V5 (VY), V6(VZ)
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
Vx 27/59-1, Vx 27/59-2, Vx 27/59-3, Vx 27/59-4, - Self Reset
Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test
the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling
the lower settings.
Note that if the voltage is reduced below the Vx 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. VTS operation may
also block the 27 Undervoltage function. Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during
voltage element testing.
If the O/P Phases is set to All, the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously. Otherwise the 3
phases should be tested individually. If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the
applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The
LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the
reset voltage to check the Hysteresis setting. If the DTL is long, the operate level level should be checked by
applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting
plus the hysteresis setting.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting.
Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary.
Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the
elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the
higher settings.
If the O/P Phases is set to All, the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3
phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the
applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting
Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to
check the Hysteresis setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of
setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting.
Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary.
Phase
Vx
27/59
setting
(Volts)
U
/
O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calc.)
P.U.
Volts
D.O
Volts
Op. Time
2x Vs (OV)
0.5x Vs
(UV)
UV
Guard
NOTES
V4(VX)
V5(VY)
V6(VZ)
2.12.4.1
Element Blocking
The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality
should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
VT Supervision
Vx 27/59-1
Vx 27/59-2
Vx 27/59-3
Vx 27/59-4
2.13 NPS Overvoltage (47)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-16
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
NPS Overvoltage
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
Disable:
27/59, 59N, 60VTS
Map Pickup LED:
47-n - Self Reset
Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the
highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings.
NPS Overvoltage can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase voltage connections should be
reversed so that the applied balanced 3P voltage is Negative Phase Sequence. For relay applications on non
standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B, NPS voltage is provided by a 3 phase source with
conventional A-B-C phase sequence
If the 47-n delay is small, gradually increased the applied balanced 3P voltage until element operates.
Phas
e
27/59
setting
(Volts)
U/O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calculated)
P.U.
Volts
D.O
Volts
Op. Time
2x Vs
NOTES
NPS
2.13.1.1
Element Blocking
The NPS Overvoltage element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
47-1
47-2
2.14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
49
50
BF
37
(x2)
49
37
(x2)
46
BC
I4
(IG/ISEF)

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
V4
(VX)
Figure 2-17
47
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Neutral Overvoltage
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
Disable:
27/59, 47, 60VTS
Map Pickup LED:
59N-n - Self Reset
The voltage source for the Neutral Overvoltage 59N function can be set as either Vn , calculated from the applied
3 phase voltage inputs or Vx, the V4 input. Apply test voltage to 1 phase input or V4 input to suit.
2.14.1 Definite Time (59NDT)

If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage until element operates.
Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time
Phase
Vs
(Volts)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Volts
Operate Time
2 x Vs
NOTES
2.14.2 Inverse Time (59NIT)

Gradually increase voltage until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting voltage and record operating time,
Apply a higher multiple of setting voltage and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times from:
1
top (sec onds ) ) = M Vn
[Vs ] 1
Where M = Time multiplier and Vn/Vs = multiple of setting.
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
2.14.2.1
Ph.
Vs
(V)
TM
Operate Voltage
P.U.
(Volts)
D.O.
(Volts)
Operate Time
2 x Vs
(sec)
NOTES
x Vs
(sec)
Element Blocking
The Neutral Overvoltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
59NIT
59NDT

2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81)
Figure 2-18
Under/Over Frequency
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
81-n - Self Reset
This function can be tested by application of 1P or 3P voltage. For Over-frequency, the elements with the highest
setting should be tested first and for Under-frequency the elements with the lowest settings should be tested first.
The elements with other settings can then be tested without need to disable the elements already tested. Note
that the relay is designed to track the gradual changes in power system frequency and that sudden step changes
in frequency during testing do not reflect normal system operation. Normal instantaneous operation of the
frequency element is 140-175ms in line with the Performance Specification. Application of sudden step changes
to frequency can add additional delay which can produce misleading test results.
Gradually increase/decrease applied voltage frequency until 81-n operation occurs. Elements set for more
extreme frequency fluctuation should be tested first with lesser elements disabled.
If the 81-n Delay setting is long it will be advantageous to map the function to temporarily drive the relevant
Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to
operate for the function. If the delay setting is short the operation of the element can be easily checked directly.
The frequency should then be gradually decreased/increased until the element resets. The reset frequency can
be used to check the Hysteresis setting.
If the element is set as 81-n U/V Guarded, The applied voltage must be above the 81 UV Guard Setting in the
U/O Frequency menu.
Apply setting frequency +0.5Hz for Over-frequency or -0.5Hz for Under-frequency and record operating time.
Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the
element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 81 Hysteresis setting.
F
(Hertz)
U/O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calc.)
P.U.
Freq
Hertz
D.O.
Freq.
Hertz
Operate
Time
+/- 0.5Hz
UV
Guard
NOTES
If the element is set as 81-nU/V Guarded, this setting can be tested by applying the test voltage at a level below
the 81 U/V Guard Setting at a frequency in the operate range. Increase the voltage until the relay operates.
UVG
UVG Setting
(Volts)
Freq element
Used for test
Blocked
Volts (D.O.)
Unblocked Volts (P.U.)
NOTES
U/O
Freq
2.15.1.1
Element Blocking
The U/O Frequency elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-4
81-5
81-6


3.1
CB Fail (50BF)
Figure 3-1
CB Fail
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
50BF-n - Self Reset
The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from:
A binary output mapped as Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu,
or
A binary input mapped as 50BF Ext Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu.
Apply a trip condition by injection of current to cause operation of a suitable protection element. Allow current to
continue after the trip at a level of 110% of the 50BF Setting current level on any phase. Measure the time for
operation of operation of 50BF-1 Delay and 50BF-2 Delay. Repeat the sequence with current at 90% of the 50BF
Setting current level after the element trip and check for no CB Fail operation.
50BF Setting (xIn)
Test Current
50BF-1 Delay
50BF-2 Delay.
No Operation
No Operation
(110%).
(90%)...
3.1.1.1
Element Blocking
The CB Fail function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
50BF
3.2
Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-2
3.2.1
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Voltage Transformer Supervision
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
Disable:
27, 47, 59N
Map Pickup LED:
60VTS - Self Reset
1 or 2 Phase VT fail
Apply 3P balanced nominal current and voltage. Reduce 1 phase voltage until VTS operates, record voltage
reduction level.
60VTS V Setting
Setting x 3
Measured Voltage Reduction
Increase the voltage until VTS resets. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS I setting. Reduce
voltage as above and check for no operation. Return voltage to nominal. Increase current on 1 phase by 90% of
3x the 60VTS I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation
60VTS I Setting
Setting x 3
110% of Setting x 3
90% of Setting x 3
No VTS
VTS operation
3.2.2
3 Phase VT fail
Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS Ipps Load setting and
the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the 60VTS
Vpps setting. Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets.
Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS Ipps Load setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage
to a level below the operate level above. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates.
Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test. Increase the 3P
balanced current to a level above the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below
the operate level above. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates.
Setting
Measured
60VTS Vpps
60VTS Ipps Load
60VTS Ipps Fault
If the VTS can be started from a status input fed from an external source, this functionality should be tested.
Ext_Trig 60VTS Operation
3.2.2.1
Not Applicable
Element Blocking
The VT Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
60VTS
3.3
Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
Note: The use of some

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-3
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
60
VTF
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail
Voltage Inputs:
Vx, VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC)
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Vx27/59
Map Pickup LED:
60VTS - Self Reset
This feature is supplied in devices with the optional Check Synchronising feature.
With the CB in the closed position, apply nominal voltage to the Vx input and to the corresponding synchronising
voltage input. Remove voltage from the Vx input and measure time delay to 60VTF-Bus alarm.
Alarm Time Setting(s)
Measured Alarm Time (s)
3.4
3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
60
VTS
X
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)

Figure 3-4
VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
27
59
(x4)
V5
(VY)
27
59
(x4)
V6
(VZ)
27
59
(x4)
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision
Voltage Inputs:
VL4 (VX), VL5 (VY), VL6 (VZ)
Current Inputs:
Disable:
27/59-X
Map Pickup LED:
60VTS-X - Self Reset
This feature is provided in devices with six VT inputs.
3.4.1
1 or 2 Phase VT fail
Apply 3P balanced nominal current and 3 phase balanced voltage to the Vxyz inputs. Reduce 1 phase voltage
until VTS-X operates, record voltage reduction level.
60VTS-X V Setting
Setting x 3
Measured Voltage Reduction
Increase the voltage until VTS-X resets. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting.
Reduce voltage as above and check for no operation. Return voltage to nominal. Increase current on 1 phase by
90% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation
60VTS-X I Setting
3.4.2
Setting x 3
110% of Setting x 3
90% of Setting x 3
No VTS
VTS operation
3 Phase VT fail
Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting
and the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the
60VTS-X Vpps setting. Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets.
Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting. Reduce the 3P balanced
voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS
operates.
Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test. Increase the 3P
balanced current to a level above the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level
below the operate level above. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates.
Setting
Measured
60VTS-X Vpps
60VTS-X Ipps Load
60VTS-X Ipps Fault
3.4.2.1
Element Blocking
The VT-X Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
60VTS-X
3.5
Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-5
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Current Transformer Supervision
Voltage Inputs:
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51N, 46IT, 46DT, 46BC
Map Pickup LED:
60CTS - Self Reset
The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure.
Apply normal 3P balanced current with a crossover of any two phases at a level above 60CTS Inps setting.
Measure the delay to operation.
Apply 3P balanced voltage with a similar phase crossover to the current. Increase the applied 3P voltage until the
CTS element resets.
Reduce the 3P voltage to cause CTS operation again. Gradually reduce the 3P current until the element resets.
Setting
Measured
60CTS Delay
60CTS Inps
60CTS Vnps
3.5.1.1
Element Blocking
The CT Supervision function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
60CTS
3.6
Broken Conductor (46BC)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-6
27
59
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Broken Conductor
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
51N, 46IT, 46DT
Map Pickup LED:
46BC - Self Reset
Broken Conductor uses the ratio of NPS current to PPS current to detect an open circuit conductor. These
quantities can be produced directly from many advanced test sets but with limited equipment the following
approach can be applied.
Apply 3P balanced current with normal phase rotation direction. This current will consist of PPS alone, no NPS or
ZPS.
Increase 1 phase current magnitude in isolation to produce NPS. The single phase unbalance current will contain
equal quantities of ZPS, NPS and PPS. The NPS component will be 1/3 of the unbalance current and the total
PPS component will be value of the original balanced 3P current plus 1/3 of the additional unbalance current. i.e.
as the single phase unbalance current increases, the ratio of NPS to PPS will also increase. The levels of each
sequence component current can be monitored in the Current Meters in Instruments Mode.
Note that if the relay is applied on a non-standard A-C-B networks, the positive and negative sequences are
reversed and the 3 phase test supply must be arranged to suit.
Inject 1A of balanced current. Gradually increase imbalance current, operating level should be as follows:
46BC Setting
1P unbalance current
(% of 3P current)
20%
75%
25%
100%
30%
129%
35%
161%
40%
200%
46BC Setting
3P balanced current (A)
1P unbalance current (A)
Measured Unbalance current
Apply 1A 1P unbalance current without 3P balanced current. Measure 46BC operating time.
46BC Delay setting
3.6.1.1
Measured
Element Blocking
The Broken Conductor element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
46BC
3.7
Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
BC
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
I4
(IG/ISEF)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-7
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
27
59
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Trip Circuit Supervision
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
n/a
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
74TCS-n - Self Reset
The TCS-n Delay can be initiated by applying an inversion to the relevant status input and measured by
monitoring of the alarm output.
TCS-n Delay setting
Measured
3.8
Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2)

7SR224
IL1
(IA)
IL2
(IB)
IL3
(IC)
37
(x2)
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
49
50
BF
51V
67/
50
(x4)
67/
51
(x4)
81
HBL
2
46
NPS
(x2)
60
CTS
60
VTS
64
H
67/
50G
(x4)
67/
51G
(x4)
67/
50S
(x4)
67/
51S
(x4)
49
50
BF
37
(x2)
49
37
(x2)
46
BC
I4
(IG/ISEF)

VL1
(VA)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL2
(VB)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
VL3
(VC)
27
59
(x4)
27S
59S
V4
(VX)
Figure 3-8
27
59
47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
Note:
Example shows
Voltage Config =
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Batt
Test
74
TCS
(x3)
Cap.
Test
79
Magnetising Inrush Detector
Voltage Inputs:
n/a
Current Inputs:
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by current injection at 100Hz to cause operation of the
blocking signals.
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions

4.1
Autoreclose (79)
Autoreclose sequences can be specified differently for Phase, Earth, Externally Initiated and SEF faults.
Sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type with the actual relay settings required for
service installed in the relay.
The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected
current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the autoreclose sequence to provide a
realistic simulation of the actual system conditions.
The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No. which are useful
during sequence testing.
The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence
including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring
equipment or complex connections.
4.2
Synchronising
The optional Synchronising function provides (Re)closure modes which utilise the synchronising voltages to
impose restrictions on the closing of the recloser to allow co-ordination with other devices in the network. Correct
operation of the application of blocking for all combinations of live and dead line and bus voltage should be
checked for manual closing operations and during the testing of autoreclose.
Enabled/Disabled
Tested
Notes
DLC
DBC
CS
DLDB
Apply 3 phase nominal voltage to the relay and single phase voltage to the Vx Synchronising input. Ensure that
the synchronising voltage is of the correct phase to represent an In Sync condition. Check the Line Volts and
Bus Volts voltage magnitudes are displayed correctly on the Sync Meters and that the Voltage Diff and Phase Diff
are shown as approximately zero.
Voltage (Vb/Vab etc)
Applied Line Volts
Measured Line Volts
Applied Bus Volts
Measured Bus Volts
..
Magnitude
Phase
Reduce Line and Bus voltages from nominal in turn to measure the Dead Line and Dead Bus settings. Increase
the voltages in turn to measure the Live Line and Live Bus settings.
Live Setting
Dead Setting
Live Pickup
Dead Pickup
Line Volts
Bus Volts
Repeat the reduction of Bus and Line voltages to check the pickup and drop off of the Bus Undervolts, Line
Undervolts and Voltage Diff settings, if enabled. Outputs signals are available in the Output Matrix to allow leds or
Binary Outputs to be allocated to these functions.
Setting
Pickup
Reset
Line Undervolts
Bus Undervolts
Voltage Diff
Test voltages can be manipulated to test the Check Synchronising window parameters using the Voltage Check
and In Sync outputs. The In Synch output is raised when all voltage conditions are met such that a close will be
issued during an autoreclose sequence. In Synch monitors voltage magnitude, phase difference and Slip
Frequency conditions. Voltage Check is raised when voltage magnitude conditions alone are met such that a
close will be issued if phase requirements are additionally met during an autoreclose sequence which will allow.
Voltage Check is useful during testing and fault finding but is not used in service.
Setting
Pickup
Reset
Setting
Pickup
Reset
Setting
Pickup
Reset
CS phase leading
CS phase lagging
CS Slip
Split Angle
Split Slip
SS phase leading
SS phase lagging
SS Slip
Following controller commissioning, when the circuit is live with test connections removed, the Synchronising
Meters should be checked to ensure primary voltages are correct. With the circuit breaker closed, Bus and Line
voltages should have equal magnitudes, differential voltage and phase difference should be zero.
Expected
Voltage diff
0V
Phase Diff
Slip
0 mHz
4.3
Measured
Notes
Live/Dead
Voltage Inputs:
VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC), VL4 (VX), VL5 (VY), VL6 (VZ)
Current Inputs:
n/a
Disable:
27/59, 27/59-Vx, 59N, 47
Map Pickup LED:
A,B,C Live, A,B,C Dead, ABC Live, ABC Dead
This feature can be tested using a dual or single three phase AC voltage supply or from a single
phase supply.
Apply a voltage at a level below the Dead setting of the side to be tested. Check indication for that
phase indicates dead. Increase the voltage level to above the Live setting. Check pickup of Live
indication and reset of Dead indication. Decrease voltage to below the relevant Dead setting. Check
change-over of indication. 3 phase indication ABC Live and ABC Dead and XYZ Live and XYZ Dead
can be tested by connection of a single phase supply to all inputs in parallel. The output indicates that
all phases are below the dead setting and the Live setting indicates that all phases are above the Live
setting.
A Live setting
A Dead Setting
Dead to Live
transition
Live to Dead
transition
Indication &
outputs
X Live setting
X Dead Setting
Dead to Live
transition
Live to Dead
transition
Indication &
outputs
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
ABC
Phase X
Phase Y
Phase Z
XYZ
4.4
Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type
with the actual relay settings required for service installed in the relay.
The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected
current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the LOV autoreclose sequence to provide
a realistic simulation of the actual system conditions.
The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No. which are useful
during sequence testing.
The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence
including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring
equipment or complex connections.
4.5
Quick Logic
If this functionality is used, the logic equations may interfere with testing of other protection functions in the relay.
The function of the Quick Logic equations should be tested conjunctively with connected plant or by simulation to
assess suitability and check for correct operation on an individual basis with tests specifically devised to suit the
particular application.
Section 5: Testing and Maintenance

These relays are maintenance free, with no user serviceable parts.
5.1
Periodic Tests
During the life of the relay, it should be checked for operation during the normal maintenance period for the site
on which the product is installed. It is recommended the following tests are carried out:Visual inspection of the metering display
1. Operation of output contacts
2. Secondary injection of each element
5.2
Maintenance
Relay failure will be indicated by the Protection Healthy LED being off or flashing. A message may also be
displayed on the LCD. In the event of failure contact the local Siemens office or the manufacturer see defect
report sheet in section 5.3.
The relay unit comprises an outer case and the withdrawable relay element. The relay should be returned as a
complete unit. No attempt should be made to disassemble the unit to isolate and return only the damaged subassembly. It may however be convenient to fit the withdrawable relay to the outer case from a spare relay, to
avoid the disturbance of relay panel wiring. The withdrawable relay should never be transported without the
protection of the outer case.
5.3
Table 5-1
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Guide
Observation
Action
Relay does not power up.
Check that the correct auxiliary DC voltage is applied and that the
polarity is correct.
Relay wont accept the password.
The Password being entered is wrong. Enter correct password.

If correct password has been forgotten, note down the Numeric
Code which is displayed at the Change Password screen e.g.
Change password
= 1234567
To retrieve the password, communicate this code to a Siemens
Protection Devices Ltd. representative.
Protection Healthy LED flashes
General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.

representative.
LCD screen flashes continuously.
The LCD has many possible error messages which when

displayed will flash continuously. These indicate various processor
card faults.
General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.
representative.
Backlight is on but no text can be seen.
Adjust the contrast.
Scrolling text messages are unreadable.
Adjust the contrast.
Relay displays one instrument after

another with no user intervention.
This is normal operation, default instruments are enabled.

Remove all instruments from the default list and only add those
that are required.
(See Section 2: Settings and Instruments).
Cannot communicate with the relay.
Check that all of the communications settings match those used

by ReyDisp Evolution.
Check that the Tx and Rx fibre-optic cables are connected
correctly. ( Tx > Rx and Rx > Tx ).
Check that all cables, modems and fibre-optic cables work
correctly.
Ensure that IEC 60870-5-103 is specified for the connected port
(COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4).
Relays will not communicate in a ring

network.
Check that the Data Echo setting on all relays is set to ON.
Check that all relays are powered up.
Check that all relays have unique addresses.
Status inputs do not work.
Check that the correct DC voltage is applied and that the polarity
is correct.
Check that the status input settings such as the pick-up and dropoff timers and the status inversion function are correctly set.
Relay instrument displays show small

currents or voltages even though the
system is dead.
This is normal. The relay is displaying calculation noise. This will

not affect any accuracy claims for the relay.
If the above checklist does not help in correcting the problem please contact the local Siemens office or contact
PTD 24hr Customer Support, Tel: +49 180 524 7000, Fax: +49 180 524 2471, e-mail:
support.energy@siemens.com.
Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions

6.1
General
Please read thoroughly all of the instructions supplied with the firmware upgrade before starting the download
process.
If you are loading firmware into a product that is already installed on site then follow the instructions in
section 2, 3 and 4.
Otherwise skip directly to section 3 to load firmware into the device.
6.2
Replacing firmware on a product installed on site
6.2.1
Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded
With the relay connected to a suitable DC supply. Press CANCEL several times to ensure that you are at the root
of the menu system. The relay will typically display the relay model name or circuit name.
On newer relay models press CANCEL and TEST to bring up the
SOFTWARE VERSION
menu. While still pressing TEST release the other keys. On older relay models press and hold CANCEL, press
and hold TEST, press and hold ENTER then
"Build Version --> to view"

should appear. While still pressing ENTER release the other keys. Navigate to the software information screen
using the TEST/RESET-> button.
The following typical information uniquely identifies a particular relay model. (Older relay models may only display
a subset of this information).
6.2.2
Overall Software Information
Software Art No
Build Date
Build Time
Code CRC
Boot Block Art No
6.2.3
This is the application software code used which may common to many relay variants.
This is the date when the software was compiled.
This is time when the software was compiled.
This is the CRC check code of the software code.
This is the boot block software code responsible for loading in new application software
code.
Product Configuration Information
Product Art No
Product Name
Release Date
Release Time
This is the Products unique configuration article number.

This is the Products unique model name.
This is the date when this particular configuration was released.
This is the time when this particular configuration was released.
6.2.4
Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software
Ensure that a secure copy of relay settings is available as all settings will be lost during the code upload process.
A hard copy is useful for checking purposes. It is usually possible to download the existing settings into Reydisp
Evolution, save the file and then reload these settings into the relay following the upgrade. Reydisp will highlight
any changes that it cannot automatically resolve for you to manually correct when re-installing the settings..
If the relay is in service then it is advisable to remove any TRIP LINKS to prevent in-advertent mal-operation due
to incorrect settings being applied.
The attachments are password protected self extracting zip files to prevent email systems discarding them or
modifying them which should be saved with the "EX" extension renamed to be "EXE". The password that is
applied to this zip file is "REYROLLE" in capital letters.
6.2.5
Loading Firmware using front usb port
New firmware/software may be loaded via the USB port on the front Fascia.
Check compatibility of software before starting the procedure. The relay will not accept firmware/software for
which the MLFB ordering code is not supported.
Installation instructions are provided with the upgrade firmware and should be studied before the procedure is
attempted..
A USB connection between a PC and the relay front port is required.
The process may take several minutes to complete at which time the relay will restart.
Please make note of any warning or error messages that appear on the Reyfresh terminal window as the relay
restarts.
6.2.6
Solving Software Upload Problems
The relay will auto detect the download baud rate and will use whatever baud rate set within Reyfresh. However
the default and maximum baud rate of 460800 bits/sec is preferred
The download procedure has been tested on Windows 98, NT and XP.
On Windows 98 it may be necessary to add the line :shell=C:\COMMAND.COM C:\ /e:4056 /p
to the file C:\CONFIG.SYS to increase the environment space.
When the relay restarts, messages appear on the LCD to confirm the number of I/O modules fitted, please press
the ENTER key when requested if the details displayed are correct.
7SR224 Argus Applications

Overcurrent Relay

2008/03
First issue
2008/06
Second issue
2008/11
Third issue. Single/Triple Autoreclose added
2009/09
Fourth issue. Maintenance release
2010/04
Fifth issue. Synchronising added.
2010/09
Sixth Issue. TCS updated
Contents
Section 1: Common Functions ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Multiple Settings Groups ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Binary Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1
Alarm and Tripping Inputs ......................................................................................................... 5
1.2.2
Control and tripping circuits....................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 8
1.4 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Phase Allocation and Rotation ................................................................................................................ 8
Section 2: Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N)................................................................................................. 9
2.1.1
Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics................................................................................. 10
2.1.2
Reset Delay ............................................................................................................................ 11
2.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) ................................................................................................... 12
2.3 Cold Load Settings (51c)....................................................................................................................... 12
2.4 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N) ............................................................................................. 13
2.4.1
Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes .............................................................................. 13
2.5 Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF)............................................................................................... 15
2.6 Directional Protection (67)..................................................................................................................... 16
2.6.1
2 Out of 3 Logic....................................................................................................................... 18
2.7 Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G, 50/51N, 51/51SEF)............................................................................ 19
2.8 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H) ..................................................................... 20
2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ................................................................................. 22
2.10 Undercurrent (37).................................................................................................................................. 22
2.11 Thermal Overload (49) .......................................................................................................................... 22
2.12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59) ................................................................................................. 23
2.13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) .................................................................................................................... 24
2.13.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units .................................................................................... 25
2.13.2 Derived NVD Voltage .............................................................................................................. 25
2.14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) ........................................................................................ 25
2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................................................................. 26
Section 3: CT Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 27
3.1 CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection .............................................................. 27
3.1.1
Overcurrent Protection CTs .................................................................................................... 27
3.1.2
Earth Fault Protection CTs...................................................................................................... 27
3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection ............................................. 28
Section 4: Control Functions .................................................................................................................................. 29
4.1 Auto-reclose Applications...................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.1
Auto-Reclose Example 1......................................................................................................... 30
4.1.2
Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR) ............................................................ 31
4.2 Synchronising ....................................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.1
Check Sync, System Sync ...................................................................................................... 32
4.2.2
Rated Voltage Setting V.T. Connection................................................................................ 32
4.2.3
Bus/Line Undervolts Settings .................................................................................................. 32
4.2.4
Voltage Differential Settings.................................................................................................... 33
4.2.5
Synchronising Bypass Logic ................................................................................................... 33
4.2.6
Slip and Phase Angle Relationship ......................................................................................... 33
4.2.7
Check Synchronising Settings ................................................................................................ 34
4.2.8
System Synchronising Settings............................................................................................... 34
4.2.9
Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer .......................................................................... 35
4.2.10 Close on Zero ......................................................................................................................... 36
4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ................................................................................ 36
4.4 Single/Triple Autoreclose ...................................................................................................................... 40
4.4.1
System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose......................................... 40
4.4.2
Triple/Single Modes of Operation............................................................................................ 41
4.4.3
Pole Discrepancy .................................................................................................................... 43
4.4.4
Auto-Changeover Scheme Example ....................................................................................... 43
Section 5: Supervision Functions........................................................................................................................... 44

5.1 Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF) ................................................................................................................... 44
5.1.1
Settings Guidelines ................................................................................................................. 44
5.2 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) ........................................................................................... 46
5.3 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) ........................................................................................... 47
5.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS) .......................................................................................................... 48
5.4.1
Trip Circuit Supervision Connections ...................................................................................... 48
5.5 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ..................................................................................................................... 50
5.6 Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC) ........................................................................................ 50
5.7 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance................................................................................................................. 50
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups ......................................................................4
Figure 1.2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring.............................................................5
Figure 1.2-2 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes
ESI 1 and ESI 2 ...................................................................................................................7
Figure 2.1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied .............................................9
Figure 2.1-2 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied ..............................................10
Figure 2.4-1 General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic....................................................................13
Figure 2.4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements.........................................14
Figure 2.5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application......................................................................15
Figure 2.6-1 Directional Characteristics ................................................................................................16
Figure 2.6-2 Phase Fault Angles............................................................................................................16
Figure 2.6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection..............................................................17
Figure 2.6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network ..........................................................................18
Figure 2.7-1 Earth Fault Angles .............................................................................................................19
Figure 2.8-1 Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers ....................................20
Figure 2.8-2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection .........................................21
Figure 2.11-1
Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic .............................................22
Figure 2.13-1 NVD Application...............................................................................................................24
Figure 2.13-2 NVD Protection Connections ...........................................................................................24
Figure 2.15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements...........................................26
Figure 4.1-1 Sequence Co-ordination ....................................................................................................29
Figure 4.3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point......................................................36
Figure 4.3-2 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and
LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. .........................................................................39
Figure 4.4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers..............................40
Figure 4.4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic..............................................................................................43
Figure 5.1-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail ..........................................................................................................44
Figure 5.1-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing.........................................................................45
Figure 5.1-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ............................................................................45
Figure 5.4-1:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) ............................................................................48
List of Tables
Table 2-1
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Application of IDMTL Characteristics.................................................................................11

Typical Check Synchronising Settings...............................................................................34
Typical System Synchronising Settings.............................................................................35
Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) .....................................................................46
Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) .....................................................................47
Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases) ............................................................................47
Magnetic Inrush Bias .........................................................................................................50

1.1
Multiple Settings Groups
Alternate settings groups can be used to reconfigure the relay during significant changes to system conditions
e.g.
Primary plant switching in/out.
Summer/winter or day/night settings.
switchable earthing connections.
Loss of Grid connection (see below)
Start
generators
Trip non-essential loads
Local
Generation
Industrial system draws power from grid

system during normal operation
Select alternate
settings group
Relays normally use settings group 1

On loss of mains:
Local generation switched in.
Non essential loads tripped
Relays on essential circuits switched to
settings group 2 to reflect new load and
fault currents
RADIAL SUBSTATION
Non-essential
loads
Figure 1.1-1
Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups
1.2
Binary Inputs
Each Binary Input (BI) can be programmed to operate one or more of the relay functions, LEDs or output relays.
These could be used to bring such digital signals as Inhibits for protection elements, the trip circuit supervision
status, autoreclose control signals etc. into the Relay.
1.2.1
Alarm and Tripping Inputs
A common use of binary inputs is to use the 7SR224 to provide indication of alarm or fault conditions from an
external device which does not itself provide indication or recording facilities. The Binary Inputs are mapped to
LED(s), waveform storage trigger and binary outputs. Note that external device outputs which require high speed
tripping, should be wired to a binary input to provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired to
directly trip the circuit via a blocking diode, see fig. 1.2-1:
Figure 1.2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring
1.2.2
Control and tripping circuits
Where a binary input is used to as part of a control function, for example tripping or closing a circuit breaker, it
may be desirable to provide an enhanced level of immunity to prevent maloperation due to induced voltages. This
is most important where cross-site cabling is involved, as this is susceptible to induced voltages and will
contribute to capacitive discharge currents under DC system earth fault conditions.
One method of enhancing the immunity of the binary input is to switch both positive and negative connections;
however this is often not possible or desirable.
Where the battery voltage allows its use, the 88V binary input will give an added measure of immunity, compared
to the 19V binary input, due to its higher minimum pickup voltage.
As a guide to suitable degrees of enhanced immunity, we have adopted the parameters laid down in U.K.
standard EATS 48-4. This standard identifies two levels of immunity: Category ESI 1 may be adopted for
connections which do not include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. Category ESI 2
should be used for connections which include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. This
category also gives immunity to capacitive discharge currents.
The following diagrams show the external resistors which should be fitted to allow the binary input to comply with
either of the above categories. Fitting these components will raise the current required to operate the binary input,
and hence makes it less susceptible to maloperation.
Where required, the minimum pickup delay for the binary input is stated on the diagram.
Figure 1.2-2 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2
1.3
Binary Outputs
Binary Outputs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to bring out such
digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc.
All Binary Outputs are Trip rated
Each can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Self-reset contacts are applicable to most protection applications.
Hand-reset contacts are used where the output must remain active until the user expressly clears it e.g. in a
control scheme where the output must remain active until some external feature has correctly processed it.
Case contacts 26 and 27 will automatically short-circuit when the relay is withdrawn from the case. This can be
used to provide an alarm that the Relay is out of service.
Notes on Self Reset Outputs

With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is
interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing
through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with
heavy-duty contacts should be utilised.
1.4
LEDs
Output-function LEDs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to display such
digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc.
User Defined Function LEDs are used to indicate the status of Function Key operation. These do not relate
directly to the operation of the Function Key but rather to its consequences. So that if a Function Key is depressed
to close a Circuit-Breaker, the associated LED would show the status of the Circuit-Breaker closed Binary Input.
Each LED can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Hand reset LEDs are used where the user is required to
expressly acknowledge the change in status e.g. critical operations such as trips or system failures. Self-reset
LEDs are used to display features which routinely change state, such as Circuit-Breaker open or close.
The status of hand reset LEDs is retained in capacitor-backed memory in the event of supply loss.
1.5
Phase Allocation and Rotation
Settings are provided in the CT/VT Config menu to allow the phase letter references to be allocated to
any of the three physical current or voltage input channels. This means that the three Recloser
mechanisms 1, 2 and 3 can be pre-wired to the controller inputs V1 V2 V3 and I1 I2 I3 and the phase
references A, B and C can be allocated later during commissioning when settings are installed to suit
customer requirements. This feature allows for physical transposing of phases and different direction
orientation of the Recloser installation without changes to secondary wiring and simply allocates the
physical connections to be selected by the controller. If this setting is set incorrectly, metering and
instrumentation will be incorrect and protection operation may be affected.
The electrical (phasor) sequence can also be selected as A-B-C or A-C-B by a separate setting. This
setting is used to select the positive phasor rotation sequence as either standard (A-B-C) or reverse
sequence (A-C-B). If this setting is set incorrectly, directional polarizing of overcurrent protection will
be incorrect and cause incorrect directional operation. Negative and positive sequence components
will also be exchanged, for both current and voltage. This will cause incorrect metering as well as
distortion to elements utilizing these components for measurement or polarizing.

2.1
Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N)
The 51-n characteristic element provides a number of time/current operate characteristics. The element can be
defined as either an Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) or Definite Time Lag (DTL) characteristic. If an
IDMTL characteristic is required, then IEC, ANSI/IEEE and a number of manufacturer specific curves are
supported.
IDMTL characteristics are defined as Inverse because their tripping times are inversely proportional to the Fault
Current being measured. This makes them particularly suitable to grading studies where it is important that only
the Relay(s) closest to the fault operate. Discrimination can be achieved with minimised operating times.
To optimise the grading capability of the relay additional time multiplier, Follower DTL (Fig. 2.1-1) or Minimum
Operate Time (Fig. 2.1-2) settings can be applied.
1000.00
1000.00
100.00
100.00
10.00
Operating Time (Seconds)
10.00
1.00
1.00
0.10
0.10
0.01
0.01
1
10
100
1000
Current (x Is)
10
100
1000
Current (x Is)
Figure 2.1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0.10
0.01
1
10
100
1000
Current (x Is)
Figure 2.1-2
IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied
To increase sensitivity, dedicated Earth fault elements are used. There should be little or no current flowing to
earth in a healthy system so such relays can be given far lower pick-up levels than relays which detect excess
current ( > load current) in each phase conductor. Such dedicated earth fault relays are important where the fault
path to earth is a high-resistance one (such as in highly arid areas) or where the system uses high values of
earthing resistor / reactance and the fault current detected in the phase conductors will be limited.
2.1.1
Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics
Each pole has two independent over-current characteristics. Where required the two curves can be used:
To produce a composite curve
To provide a two stage tripping scheme
Where one curve is to be directionalised in the forward direction the other in the reverse direction.
The characteristic curve shape is selected to be the same type as the other relays on the same circuit or to grade
with items of plant e.g. fuses or earthing resistors.
The application of IDMTL characteristic is summarised in the following table:
OC/EF Curve Characteristic

IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
Application
Generally applied
ANSI Moderately Inverse (MI)

IEC Very Inverse (VI)
ANSI Very Inverse (VI)
IEC Extreme Inversely (EI)
Used with high impedance paths where there is a significant difference

between fault levels at protection points
Grading with Fuses
ANSI Extremely Inverse (EI)

IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
Used to protect transformer earthing resistors having long withstand times
Recloser Specific
Use when grading with specific recloser
Table 2-1
2.1.2
Application of IDMTL Characteristics
Reset Delay
The increasing use of plastic insulated cables, both conventionally buried and aerial bundled conductors, have
given rise to the number of flashing intermittent faults on distribution systems. At the fault position, the plastic
melts and temporarily reseals the faulty cable for a short time after which the insulation fails again. The same
phenomenon has occurred in compound-filled joint boxes or on clashing overhead line conductors. The
repeating process of the fault can cause electromechanical disc relays to ratchet up and eventually trip the faulty
circuit if the reset time of the relay is longer than the time between successive faults.
To mimic an electromechanical relay the relay can be user programmed for an ANSI DECAYING characteristic
when an ANSI operate characteristic is applied. Alternatively a DTL reset (0 to 60 seconds) can be used with
other operate characteristics.
For protection of cable feeders, it is recommended that a 60 second DTL reset be used.
On overhead line networks, particularly where reclosers are incorporated in the protected system, instantaneous
resetting is desirable to ensure that, on multiple shot reclosing schemes, correct grading between the source
relays and the relays associated with the reclosers is maintained.
2.2
Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V)
Reduced voltage can indicate a fault on the system, it can be used to make the 51 elements more sensitive.
Typically Voltage Dependent Over-current (51V) is applied to:
Transformer Incomers: Where the impedance of the transformer limits fault current the measured
voltage level can be used to discriminate between load and fault current.
Long lines: Where the impedance of the line limits fault current the measured voltage level can be used
to discriminate between load and fault current.
Generator circuits: When a Generator is subjected to a short circuit close to its terminals the shortcircuit current follows a complex profile. After the initial "sub-transient" value, generally in the order of 7
to 10 times full load current, it falls rapidly (around 10 to 20ms) to the "transient" value. This is still about
5 to 7 times full load and would be sufficient to operate the protection's over-current elements. However
the effect on armature reactance of the highly inductive short-circuit current is to increase significantly
the internal impedance to the synchronous reactance value. If the Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
system does not respond to increase the excitation, the fault current will decay over the next few
seconds to a value below the full load current. This is termed the steady state fault current, determined
by the Generator's synchronous reactance (and pre-fault excitation). It will be insufficient to operate the
protection's over-current elements and the fault will not be detected. Even if AVR is active, problems may
still be encountered. The AVR will have a declared minimum sustained fault current and this must be
above the protection over-current settings. Close-in short circuit faults may also cause the AVR to reach
its safety limits for supplying maximum excitation boost, in the order of several seconds, and this will
result in AVR internal protection devices such as diode fuses to start operating. The generator excitation
will then collapse, and the situation will be the same as when no AVR was present. The fault may again
not be detected.
Current grading remains important since a significant voltage reduction may be seen for faults on other parts of
the system. An inverse time operating characteristic must therefore be used.
The VDO Level - the voltage setting below which the more sensitive operating curve applies - must be set low
enough to discriminate between short-circuits and temporary voltage dips due to overloads. However, it must also
be high enough to cover a range of voltage drops for different circuit configurations, from around 0.6Vn to almost
zero. Typically it will be set in the range 0.6 to 0.8Vn.
2.3
Cold Load Settings (51c)
Once a Circuit-Breaker has been open for a period of time ed, higher than normal levels of load current may flow
following CB re-closure e.g. heating or refrigeration plant. The size and duration of this current is dependent upon
the type of load and the time that the CB is open.
The feature allows the relay to use alternative Shaped Overcurrent (51c) settings when a Cold Load condition is
identified. The cold load current and time multiplier settings will normally be set higher than those of the normal
overcurrent settings.
The relay will revert to its usual settings (51-n) after elapse of the cold load period. This is determined either by a
user set delay, or by the current in all 3-phases falling below a set level (usually related to normal load levels) for
a user set period.
2.4
Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N)
Operating time
Each instantaneous element has an independent setting for pick-up current and a follower definite time lag (DTL)
which can be used to provide time grading margins, sequence co-ordination grading or scheme logic. The
instantaneous description relates to the pick-up of the element rather than its operation.
Figure 2.4-1
General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic
Instantaneous elements can be used in current graded schemes where there is a significant difference between
the fault current levels at different relay point. The Instantaneous element is set to pick up at a current level above
the maximum Fault Current level at the next downstream relay location, and below its own fault current level. The
protection is set to operate instantaneously and is often termed Highset Overcurrent. A typical application is the
protection of transformer HV connections the impedance of the transformer ensuring that the LV side has a
much lower level of fault current.
The 50-n elements have a very low transient overreach i.e. their accuracy is not appreciably affected by the initial
dc offset transient associated with fault inception.
2.4.1
Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes
A combination of instantaneous and DTL elements can be used in blocked overcurrent protection schemes.
These protection schemes are applied to protect substation busbars or interconnectors etc. Blocked overcurrent
protection provides improved fault clearance times when compared against normally graded overcurrent relays.
The blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar protection shown in Figure 2.2-2 illustrates that circuit overcurrent and
earth fault protection relays can additionally be configured with busbar protection logic.
The diagram shows a substation. The relay on the incomer is to trip for busbar faults (F1) but remain inoperative
for circuit faults (F2).
In this example the overcurrent and earth fault settings for the incomer 50-1 element are set to below the relevant
busbar fault levels. 50-1 time delay is set longer than it would take to acknowledge receipt of a blocking signal
from an outgoing circuit.
Close up faults on the outgoing circuits will have a similar fault level to busbar faults. As the incomer 50-1
elements would operate for these faults it is necessary to provide a blocking output from the circuit protections.
The 50-1 elements of the output relays are given lower current settings than the incomer 50-1 settings, the time
delay is set to 0ms. The output is mapped to a contact. The outgoing relay blocking contacts of all circuits are
wired in parallel and this wiring is also connected to a BI on the incomer relay. The BI on the incomer relay is
mapped to block its 50-1 element.
Figure 2.4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
Typically a time delay as low as 50ms on the incomer 50-1 element will ensure that the incomer is not tripped for
outgoing circuit faults. However, to include for both equipment tolerances and a safety margin a minimum time
delay of 100ms is recommended.
This type of scheme is very cost effective and provides a compromise between back-up overcurrent busbar
protection and dedicated schemes of busbar protection.
Instantaneous elements are also commonly applied to autoreclose schemes to grade with downstream circuit
reclosers and maximise the probability of a successful auto-reclose sequence see section 4
2.5
Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF)
Earth fault protection is based on the assumption that fault current levels will be limited only by the earth fault
impedance of the line and associated plant. However, it may be difficult to make an effective short circuit to earth
due to the nature of the terrain e.g. dry earth, desert or mountains. The resulting earth fault current may therefore
be limited to very low levels.
Sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is used to detect such faults. This range of relays have a low burden, so
avoiding unacceptable loading of the CTs at low current settings.
SEF provides a backup to the main protection. A DTL characteristic with a time delay of several seconds is
typically applied ensuring no interference with other discriminative protections. A relatively long time delay can be
tolerated since fault current is low and it is impractical to grade SEF protection with other earth fault protections.
Although not suitable for grading with other forms of protection SEF relays may be graded with each other.
Where very sensitive current settings are required then it is preferable to use a core balance CT rather than wire
into the residual connection of the line CTs. The turns ratio of a core balance CT can be much smaller than that of
phase conductors as they are not related to the rated current of the protected circuit and are not required to
measure the higher currents associated with phase to phase faults. Since only one core is used, the CT
magnetising current losses are also reduced by a factor of three. If a core balance CT is applied to a network
where high earth fault currents can occur, these currents can cause saturation of the core leading to reduced CT
output. In this case it is recommended that the SEF protection is applied with support from Earth Fault protection
with less sensitive settings. This lower level of sensitivity is easily achieved by Derived Earth Fault protection
which uses the calculated sum of the three phase currents as its operating quantity. The 7SR224 provides this
feature by allowing the 50/51G Measured earth fault elements to alternatively use a calculated quantity whilst the
50/51SEF elements use the I4 measured quantity.
INCOMER
Core
Balance
CT
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Figure 2.5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application

There are limits to how sensitive an SEF relay may be set since the setting must be above any line charging
current levels that can be detected by the relay. On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault e.g. on circuit 3 the
elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively earthed system can result in a zero sequence
current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the relay location.
The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes
transients. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging
current. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system
is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase.
2.6
Directional Protection (67)
Each overcurrent stage can operate for faults in either forward or reverse direction. Convention dictates that
forward direction refers to power flow away from the busbar, while reverse direction refers to power flowing
towards the busbar.
The directional phase fault elements, 67/50 and 67/51, work with a Quadrature Connection to prevent loss of
polarising quantity for close-in phase faults. That is, each of the current elements is directionalised by a voltage
derived from the other two phases.
This connection introduces a 90 Phase Shift (Current leading Voltage) between reference and operate quantities
which must be allowed for in the Characteristic Angle setting. This is the expected fault angle, sometimes termed
the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) as an analogy to older Electro-mechanical type relays
Example: Expected fault angle is -30 (Current lagging Voltage) so set Directional Angle to: +90 -30 = +60.
A fault is determined to be in the selected direction if its phase relationship lies within a quadrant +/- 85 either
side of the Characteristic Angle setting.
Current
- operating
quantity
Characteristic
Angle
OPERATE
Volts
- polarising
quantity
OPERATING
BOUNDARY
(Zero Torque Line)
INHIBIT
Figure 2.6-1
Directional Characteristics
A number of studies have been made to determine the optimum MTA settings e.g. W.K Sonnemanns paper A
Study of Directional Element Connections for Phase Relays. Figure 2 10 shows the most likely fault angle for
phase faults on Overhead Line and Cable circuits.
Current lagging
Voltage
- 300
MTA
V
MTA
- 450
I
Plain Feeders
(Overhead Lines)
I
Transformer Feeders
(Cable Circuits)
Figure 2.6-2 Phase Fault Angles
Directional overcurrent elements allow greater fault selectivity than non-directional elements for interconnected
systems where fault current can flow in both directions through the relaying point. Consider the network shown in
fig. 2.6-3.
The Circuit breakers at A, B, E and G have directional overcurrent relays fitted since fault current can flow in both
directions at these points. The forward direction is defined as being away from the busbar and against the
direction of normal load current flow. These forward looking IDMTL elements can have sensitive settings applied
i.e. low current and time multiplier settings. Note that 7SR22 relays may be programmed with forward, reverse
and non-directional elements simultaneously when required by the protection scheme.
Load
Figure 2.6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection
Fault 1
Load
Figure 2.6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network
Considering the D-G feeder fault shown in fig. 2.6-4: the current magnitude through breakers C and D will be
similar and their associated relays will similar prospective operate times. To ensure that only the faulted feeder is
isolated G FWD must be set to be faster than C. Relay G will thus Trip first on FWD settings, leaving D to operate
to clear the fault. The un-faulted Feeder C-E maintains power to the load.
Relays on circuits C and D at the main substation need not be directional to provide the above protection scheme.
However additional directional elements could be mapped to facilitate a blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar
protection.
At A and B, forward looking directional elements enable sensitive settings to be applied to detect transformer
faults whilst reverse elements can be used to provide back-up protection for the relays at C and D.
By using different settings for forward and reverse directions, closed ring circuits can be set to grade correctly
whether fault current flows in a clockwise or counter clockwise direction i.e. it may be practical to use only one
relay to provide dual directional protection.
2.6.1
2 Out of 3 Logic
Sensitive settings can be used with directional overcurrent relays since they are directionalised in a way which
opposes the flow of normal load current i.e. on the substation incomers as shown on fig. 2.6-4. However on
occurrence of transformer HV or feeder incomer phase-phase faults an unbalanced load current may still flow as
an un balanced driving voltage is present. This unbalanced load current during a fault may be significant where
sensitive overcurrent settings are applied - the load current in one phase may be in the operate direction and
above the relay setting.
Where this current distribution may occur then the relay is set to CURRENT PROTECTION>PHASE
OVERCURRENT> 67 2-out-of-3 Logic = ENABLED
Enabling 2-out-of-3 logic will prevent operation of the directional phase fault protection for a single phase to earth
fault. Dedicated earth-fault protection should therefore be used if required.
2.7
Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G, 50/51N, 51/51SEF)
The directional earth-fault elements, either measure directly or derive from the three line currents the zero
sequence current (operate quantity) and compare this against the derived zero phase sequence voltage
(polarising quantity). Section 1 of the Technical Manual Description of Operation details the method of
measurement. The required setting is entered directly as dictated by the system impedances.
Example: Expected fault angle is -45 (i.e. residual current lagging residual voltage) therefore 67G Char Angle =
-45
However directional earth elements can be selectable to use either ZPS or NPS Polarising. This is to allow for the
situation where ZPS voltage is not available; perhaps because a 3-limb VT is being used. Care must be taken as
the Characteristic Angle will change if NPS Polarising is used.
Once again the fault angle is completely predictable, though this is a little more complicated as the method of
earthing must be considered.
Figure 2.7-1 Earth Fault Angles
2.8
High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H)
Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection is applied to Transformers to detect low level earth faults in the
transformer windings. Current transformers are located on all connections to the transformer. During normal
operation or external fault conditions no current will flow in the relay element. When an internal earth fault occurs,
the currents in the CTs will not balance and the resulting unbalance flows through the relay.
The current transformers may saturate when carrying high levels of fault current. The high impedance name is
derived from the fact that a resistor is added to the relay leg to prevent relay operation due to CT saturation under
through fault conditions.
The REF Trip output is configured to provide an instantaneous trip output from the relay to minimise damage from
developing winding faults.
The application of the element to a Delta-Star transformer is shown in Figure 2-5. Although the connection on the
delta winding is more correctly termed a Balanced Earth-Fault element, it is still usually referred to as Restricted
Earth Fault because of the presence of the transformer.
Balanced
Earth Fault
Figure 2.8-1
Restricted
Earth Fault
Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers
The calculation of the value of the Stability Resistor is based on the worst case where one CT fully saturates and
the other balancing CT does not saturate at all. A separate Siemens Protection Devices Limited Publication is
available covering the calculation procedure for REF protection. To summarise this:
The relay Stability (operating) Vs voltage is calculated using worst case lead burden to avoid relay operation for
through-fault conditions where one of the CTs may be fully saturated. The required fault setting (primary operate
current) of the protection is chosen; typically, this is between 10 % and 25 % of the protected winding rated
current. The relay setting current is calculated based on the secondary value of the operate current, note,
however, that the summated CT magnetising current @ Vs must be subtracted to obtain the required relay
operate current setting.
Since the relay operate current setting and stability/operating voltage are now known, a value for the series
resistance can now be calculated.
A check is made as to whether a Non-Linear Resistor is required to limit scheme voltage during internal fault
conditions typically where the calculated voltage is in excess of 2kV.
The required thermal ratings for external circuit components are calculated.
Composite overcurrent and REF protection can be provided using a multi-element relay as.
overcurrent
elements
series
stabilising
resistor
25
REF
element
non-linear resistor
Figure 2.8-2
Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection
Although core-balance CTs are traditionally used with elements requiring sensitive pickup settings, cost and size
usually precludes this on REF schemes. Instead single-Phase CTs are used and their secondarys connected in
parallel.
Where sensitive settings are required, the setting must be above any line charging current levels that can be
detected by the relay.
On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault the elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively
earthed system can result in a zero sequence current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the
relay location.
The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes
transients. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging
current. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system
is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase.
High impedance differential protection is suitable for application to auto transformers as line currents are in phase
and the secondary current through the relay is balanced to zero by the use of CTs ratios at all three terminals.
High impedance protection of this type is very sensitive and fast operating for internal faults.
2.9
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)
The presence of Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) current indicates an unbalance in the phase currents, either
due to a fault or unbalanced load.
NPS current presents a major problem for 3-phase rotating plant. It produces a reaction magnetic field which
rotates in the opposite direction, and at twice the frequency, to the main field created by the DC excitation system.
This induces double-frequency currents into the rotor which cause very large eddy currents in the rotor body. The
resulting heating of the rotor can be severe and is proportional to (I2)2 t.
Generators and Motors are designed, manufactured and tested to be capable of withstanding unbalanced current
for specified limits. Their withstand is specified in two parts; continuous capability based on a figure of I2, and
short time capability based on a constant, K, where K = (I2)2 t. NPS overcurrent protection is therefore configured
to match these two plant characteristics.
2.10 Undercurrent (37)

Undercurrent elements are used in control logic schemes such as Auto-Changeover Schemes, Auto-Switching
Interlock and Loss of Load. They are used to indicate that current has ceased to flow or that a low load situation
exists. For this reason simple Definite Time Lag (DTL) elements may be used.
For example, once it has been determined that fault current has been broken the CB is open and no current
flows an auto-isolation sequence may safely be initiated.
2.11 Thermal Overload (49)

The element uses measured 3-phase current to estimate the real-time Thermal State, , of cables or
transformers. The Thermal State is based on both past and present current levels.
= 0% for unheated equipment, and = 100% for maximum thermal withstand of equipment or the Trip
threshold.
Figure 2.11-1 Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic
For given current level, the Thermal State will ramp up over time until Thermal Equilibrium is reached when
Heating Effects of Current = Thermal Losses.
The heating / cooling curve is primarily dependant upon the Thermal Time Constant. This must be matched
against that quoted for the item of plant being protected. Similarly the current tripping threshold, I , is related to
the thermal withstand of the plant.
Thermal Overload is a slow acting protection, detecting faults or system conditions too small to pick-up fast acting
protections such as Phase Overcurrent. An Alarm is provided for at or above a set % of capacity to indicate that
a potential trip condition exists and that the system should be scrutinised for abnormalities.
2.12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59)

Power system under-voltages on may occur due to:
System faults.
An increase in system loading,
Non-energized power system e.g. loss of an incoming transformer
During normal system operating conditions regulating equipment such as transformer On Load Tap Changers
(OLTC) and generator Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVR) ensure that the system runs within acceptable
voltage limits.
7SR24 undervoltage/DTL elements can be used to detect abnormal undervoltage conditions due to system
overloads. Binary outputs can be used to trip non-essential loads - returning the system back to its normal
operating levels. This load shedding should be initiated via time delay elements so avoiding operation during
transient disturbances. An under voltage scheme (or a combined under frequency/under voltage scheme) can
provide faster tripping of non-essential loads than under-frequency load shedding so minimising the possibility of
system instability.
Where a transformer is supplying 3-phase motors a significant voltage drop e.g. to below 80% may cause the
motors to stall. An undervoltage element can be set to trip motor circuits when the voltage falls below a preset
value so that on restoration of supply an overload is not caused by the simultaneous starting of all the motors. A
time delay is required to ensure voltage dips due to remote system faults do not result in an unnecessary
disconnection of motors.
To confirm presence/loss of supply, the voltage elements should be set to values safely above/below that where a
normal system voltage excursion can be expected. The switchgear/plant design should be considered. The Dead
level may be very near to the live level or may be significantly below it. The variable hysteresis setting allows the
relay to be used with all types of switchgear.
System over-voltages can damage component insulation. Excessive voltage may occur for:
Sudden loss of load
A tap changer run-away condition occurs in the high voltage direction,
Generator AVR equipment malfunctions or
Reactive compensation control malfunctions.
System regulating equipment such as transformer tap changers and generator AVRs may correct the overvoltage
unless this equipment mal-functions. The 7SR24 overvoltage/DTL elements can be used to protect against
damage caused by system overvoltages.
If the overvoltage condition is small a relatively long DTL time delay can be used. If the overvoltage is more
severe then another element, set at a higher pickup level and with a shorter DTL can be used to isolate the circuit
more quickly. Alternatively, elements can be set to provide alarm and tripping stages, with the alarm levels set
lower than the tripping stages.
The use of DTL settings allows a grading system to be applied to co-ordinate the network design, the regulating
plant design, system plant insulation withstand and with other overvoltage relays elsewhere on the system. The
DTL also prevents operation during transient disturbances.
The use of IDMTL protection is not recommended because of the difficulty of choosing settings to ensure correct
co-ordination and security of supply.
2.13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N)

Neutral Overvoltage Displacement (Residual Overvoltage) protection is used to detect an earth fault where little or
no earth current flows.
This can occur where a feeder has been tripped at its HV side for an earth fault, but the circuit is still energised
from the LV side via an unearthed transformer winding. Insufficient earth current would be present to cause a trip,
but residual voltage would increase significantly; reaching up to 3-times the normal phase-earth voltage level.
If Neutral Overvoltage protection is used, it must be suitably time graded with other protections in order to prevent
unwanted tripping for external system earth faults.
EHV/HV
HV/MV
HV CB
Transformer Feeder
OC/EF
HV CB
Tripped
by local
protection
MV CB
Earth
fault
NVD
MV CB tripped by:
1) Feeder unit protection or
2) Intertrip from HV feeder protection or
3) NVD protection
Figure 2.13-1 NVD Application
Typically NVD protection measures the residual voltage (3V0) directly from an open delta VT or from capacitor
cones see fig. 2.13-2 below.
Figure 2.13-2 NVD Protection Connections
2.13.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units

Capacitor cones provide a cost effective method of deriving residual voltage. The wide range of capacitor cone
component values used by different manufacturers means that the relay cannot be connected directly to the
cones.
The external adaptor unit contains parallel switched capacitors that enable a wide range of values to be selected
using a DIL switch and hence the Capacitor Cone output can be scaled to the standard relay input range.
2.13.2 Derived NVD Voltage

Alternatively NVD voltage can be derived from the three phase to neutral voltages, this setting is available within
the relay. Note with this method the NVD protection may mal-operate during a VT Fail condition.
2.14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47)

Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection detects phase unbalances and is widely used in protecting rotating
plant such as motors and generators. However such protection is almost universally based on detecting NPS
Current rather than Voltage. This is because the NPS impedance of motors etc. is much less than the Positive
Phase Sequence (PPS) impedance and therefore the ratio of NPS to PPS Current is much higher than the
equivalent ratio of NPS to PPS Voltage.
NPS Voltage is instead used for monitoring busbar supply quality rather than detecting system faults. The
presence of NPS Voltage is due to unbalanced load on a system. Any system voltage abnormality is important
since it will affect every motor connected to the source of supply and can result in mass failures in an industrial
plant.
The two NPS Voltage DTL elements should therefore be used as Alarms to indicate that the level of NPS has
reached abnormal levels. Remedial action can then be taken, such as introducing a Balancer network of
capacitors and inductors. Very high levels of NPS Voltage indicate incorrect phase sequence due to an incorrect
connection.
2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81)

During normal system operation the frequency will continuously vary over a relatively small range due to the
changing generation/load balance. Excessive frequency variation may occur for:
Loss of generating capacity, or loss of mains supply (underfrequency): If the governors and other
regulating equipment cannot respond to correct the balance, a sustained underfrequency condition may
lead to a system collapse.
Loss of load excess generation (overfrequency): The generator speeds will increase causing a
proportional frequency rise. This may be unacceptable to industrial loads, for example, where the
running speeds of synchronous motors will be affected.
In the situation where the system frequency is falling rapidly it is common practise to disconnect non-essential
loads until the generation-load balance can be restored. Usually, automatic load shedding, based on
underfrequency is implemented. Underfrequency relays are usually installed on the transformer incomers of
distribution or industrial substations as this provides a convenient position from which to monitor the busbar
frequency. Loads are disconnected from the busbar (shed) in stages until the frequency stabilises and returns to
an acceptable level.
The 7SR24 has six under/over frequency elements.
An example scheme may have the first load shedding stage set just below the nominal frequency, e.g. between
49.0 - 49.5Hz. A time delay element would be associated with this to allow for transient dips in frequency and to
provide a time for the system regulating equipment to respond. If the first load shedding stage disconnects
sufficient plant the frequency will stabilise and perhaps return to nominal. If, however, this is not sufficient then a
second load shedding stage, set at a lower frequency, will shed further loads until the overload is relieved. This
process will continue until all stages have operated. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, a final
stage of underfrequency protection should be provided to totally isolate all loads before plant is damaged, e.g.
due to overfluxing.
An alternative type of load shedding scheme would be to set all underfrequency stages to about the same
frequency setting but to have different length time delays set on each stage. If after the first stage is shed the
frequency doesnt recover then subsequent stages will shed after longer time delays have elapsed.
Network
Incomer
STAGE 1: Least important

STAGE 2
STAGE 3
STAGE 4
Generator
G59
300/5
STAGE 5
STAGE 6
Essential
Load
Figure 2.15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements
Section 3: CT Requirements
3.1
CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault

Protection
3.1.1
Overcurrent Protection CTs
a) For industrial systems with relatively low fault current and no onerous grading requirements - a class
10P10 with VA rating to match the load.
b) For utility distribution networks with relatively high fault current and several grading stages - a class
5P20, with VA rating to match the load.
Note: if an accuracy limit factor is chosen which is much lower than the maximum fault current it will be
necessary to consider any effect on the protection system performance and accuracy e.g. grading margins.
For i.d.m.t.l. applications, because the operating time at high fault current is a definite minimum value, partial
saturation of the CT at values beyond the overcurrent factor has only a minimal effect. However, this must be
taken into account in establishing the appropriate setting to ensure proper grading.
Definite Time and Instantaneous Overcurrent
a)
For industrial systems with requirements as for i.d.m.t.l. relays item (a) above, a class 10P10 (or 20).
b)
For utilities as for (b) above - a class 5P10 (or 20), with rated burden to suit the load.
Note: Overcurrent factors do not need to be high for definite time protection because once the setting is
exceeded magnitude accuracy is not important. Often, however, there is also the need to consider
instantaneous HighSet overcurrent protection as part of the same protection system and the settings would
normally be of the order of 10x the CT rating or higher. Where higher settings are to be used then the
overcurrent factor must be raised accordingly, e.g. to P20.
3.1.2
Earth Fault Protection CTs
Considerations and requirements for earth fault protection are the same as for Phase fault. Usually the relay
employs the same CT's e.g. three phase CTs star connected to derive the residual earth fault current.
The accuracy class and overcurrent accuracy limit factors are therefore already determined and for both these
factors the earth fault protection requirements are normally less onerous than for overcurrent.
3.2
CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth

Fault Protection
For high impedance schemes it is necessary to establish characteristics of the CT in accordance with Class PX
to IEC 60044. The basic requirements are:
All CTs should, if possible have identical turns ratios.
The knee point voltage of each CT, should be at least 2 x Vs.
The knee point voltage is expressed as the voltage applied to the secondary circuit with the primary
open circuit which when increased by 10% causes the magnetizing current to increase by 50%.
Where the REF function is used then this dictates that the other protection functions are also used with class PX
CTs.
Section 4: Control Functions

4.1
Auto-reclose Applications
Automatic circuit reclosing is extensively applied to overhead line circuits where a high percentage of faults that
occur are of a transient nature. By automatically reclosing the circuit-breaker the feature attempts to minimise the
loss of supply to the customer and reduce the need for manual intervention.
The Recloser supports up to 4 ARC sequences. That is, 4 x Trip / Recloses followed by a Trip & Lockout. A
lockout condition prevents any further attempts, automatic or manual, to close the circuit-breaker. The number of
sequences selected depends upon the type of faults expected. If there are a sufficient percentage of semipermanent faults which could be burnt away, e.g. fallen branches, a multi shot scheme would be appropriate.
Alternatively, if there is a high likelihood of permanent faults, a single shot scheme would minimise the chances of
causing damage by reclosing onto a fault. In general, 80% of faults will be cleared by a single Trip and Reclose
sequence. A further 10% will be cleared by a second Trip and Reclose. Different sequences can be selected for
different fault types (Phase/Earth/Sensitive Earth faults).
The Deadtime is the interval between the trip and the CB close pulse being issued. This is to allow for the line to
go dead after the fault is cleared. The delay chosen is a compromise between the need to return the line to
service as soon as possible and prevented unnecessary trips through re-closing too soon. The Reclaim Time is
the delay following a re-closure before the line can be considered back in service. This should be set long enough
to allow for protection operation for the same fault, but not so long that two separate faults could occur in the
same Autoreclose (ARC) sequence and cause unnecessary lockouts.
The Sequence Fail Timer provides an overall maximum time limit on the ARC operation. It should therefore be
longer than all the set delays in a complete cycle of ARC sequences; trip delays, Deadtimes, Reclaim Time etc.
Generally this will only be exceeded if the circuit-breaker has either failed to open or close.
Since large fault currents could potentially damage the system during a prolonged ARC sequence, there are also
settings to identify which protection elements are High-sets and these can cause an early termination of the
sequence.
Where a relay is to operate as part of an ARC scheme involving a number of other relays, the feature attempts to
clear any faults quickly without regard to normal fault current grading. It does this by setting each Trip element to
be either Delayed or Instantaneous. Instantaneous Trips are set to operate at just above maximum load current
with small delays while Delayed Trips are set to suit actual fault levels and with delays suitable for current
grading.
A typical sequence would be 2 Instantaneous Trips followed by a Delayed Trip & Lockout:
When any fault occurs, the relay will trip instantaneously and then reclose.
If this does not clear the fault, the relay will do the same again.
If this still does not clear the fault, the fault is presumed to be permanent and the next Trip will be
Delayed and so suitable for grading with the rest of the network. Thus allowing downstream
protection time to operate.
This Trip will Lockout the ARC sequence and prevent further recloses.
It is important that all the relays in an ARC scheme shadow this process advancing through their own ARC
sequences when a fault is detected by an element pickup even though they are not actually causing a trip or
reclose. This is termed Sequence Co-ordination and prevents an excessive number of recloses as each
successive relay attempts to clear the fault in isolation. For this reason each relay in an ARC scheme must be set
with identical Instantaneous and Delayed sequence of trips.
Figure 4.1-1 Sequence Co-ordination
The relay closest to the fault (D) would step through its Instantaneous Trips in an attempt to clear the fault. If
unsuccessful, the relay would move to a Delayed Trip sequence.
The other relays in the network (A, B and C) would recognise the sequence of Pick-up followed by current switchoff as ARC sequences. They would therefore also step to their Delayed Trip to retain co-ordination with the
respective downstream devices.
The next Trip would be subject to current grading and Lockout the ARC sequence such that the fault is cleared by
the correct CB.
4.1.1
Auto-Reclose Example 1
Requirement: Settings shall provide four phase fault recloses two instantaneous and two delayed - and only
two recloses for faults detected by the SEF protection.
Proposed settings include:
CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROTN:

79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1
79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1
79 SEF Delayed Trips: 51SEF-1
CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG

79 Num Shots: 4
CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS

79 P/F Protn Trip 1 : Inst
79 P/F Protn Trip 3 : Delayed
79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3
CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > SEF SHOTS

79 SEF Protn Trip 1 : Delayed
79 SEF Protn Trip 2 : Delayed
79 SEF Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3
Note that Instantaneous shots are inhibited if the shot is defined as Delayed
4.1.2
Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR)
Requirement: The relay at location A it is required to provide a reclose sequence of 2 Instantaneous followed by
2 delayed recloses. Where the fault current level is between the values I1 and I2 and the first trip is initiated
from the 51-1 (IDMT) element, the IDMT characteristic should trip the CB and lockout the auto-reclose.
Typical settings are:

CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROTN:
79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1
79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1
CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS

The above settings are suitable at values of fault current above I2 however were a fault to occur with a current
value between I1 and I2 this would be detected by the 51-1 element only. As Protn Trip 1 = Inst then the relay
would trip and reclose whereas it is required to lockout for this occurrence.
To provide a lockout for the above faults an additional element 50-2 with identical settings to 50-1 is assigned as
a Delayed Trip and is used in conjunction with the Quick Logic feature i.e.
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 51-1 = V1

OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = V3
CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = V1.!V2
INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX: 79 Lockout = V3
4.2
Synchronising
The 7SR224 includes an optional Synchronising function which can be incorporated into the
autoreclose and manual close sequences. The device provides a combined check and system
synchronising function which can automatically select check or system synchronise, as appropriate, from
measurements of the relative phase angles between the line and bus voltages. The relay will prevent closure of
the circuit breaker if the phase angle, slip frequency or the voltage magnitudes of the incoming and running
voltages fall outside prescribed limits. Both the check and system synchronise functions have independent
settings and blocking features. Synchronising bypass logic is provided to close or block close when the circuit
breaker is dead on the line side, bus side or both.
4.2.1
Check Sync, System Sync
The function can be used as a check and system synchronising relay for applications where two power systems
are to be connected. The following examples show various ways that the relay can be enabled for different
applications.
The device will switch between check sync (CS) and system sync (SS) modes to suit system conditions. If the
requirement is for the relay to be used as a check before closing or reclosing a normal distribution network, then
system sync consideration is not required:
Set MC Split Mode to CS
Set DAR Split Mode to CS
This specifies that when a system split is detected during a MC or DAR operation, the CS mode will be retained
and the split detection ignored.
If the possibility of a system split is applicable but the network should not be reclosed by DAR in these
circumstances then:
Set DAR Split Mode to LO (Lockout)
If the independent System Sync settings are to be used following a Split detection during DAR, then:
Set DAR Split Mode to SS
The reaction to a split detection during a Manual Close operation can be specified separately:
Set MC Split Mode to SS
Similarly, the device can be set to use Close On Zero (COZ) for either or both modes following a split detection.
4.2.2
Rated Voltage Setting V.T. Connection
The Vx analogue voltage input is used for the synchronising Bus voltage and can be either Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab,
Vbc or Vca. The voltage is compared to the respective Line voltage connected to the V1-V3 analogue voltage
inputs.
V.T. ratings for secondary connections are normally either 100V or 110V for phase-phase, with the associated
phase-neutral ratings being 57.7V and 63.5V respectively. For phase-neutral connections the Vx Nom Voltage
setting in the CT/VT Config menu should be set to 63.5V. For phase-phase connections the Rated Voltage setting
should be set to 110V etc. Voltage element settings are a percentage of this setting..
4.2.3
Bus/Line Undervolts Settings
The relay undervoltage blocking elements, if enabled, can be used to block the close operation if either the line
(incoming) or bus (running) voltages fall below a certain percentage of rated voltage. Typically, the undervoltage
elements are set between 80% and 90% of rating.
Note : when using the undervoltage elements care should be taken to ensure that the reset of the element occurs
at below the expected minimum normal operating voltage of the system. The undervoltage elements reset at
<103% of the operate level. If the system is expected to run at less than the rated voltage, the undervoltage
element reset level must be set to operate at a value below this plus a discrimination margin.
e.g. - for a phase to neutral connection nominally at 63.5 Vrms but which can run as low as 59 Vrms,
the undervoltage setting should be set no higher than 59 V 1 V (margin) = 58V / 103% = 56.31V (the actual
setting would have to be 56.5V). This is equivalent to approximately 89% of rated voltage. If the setting is set
higher than this then the element may never reset and will continuously block.
4.2.4
Voltage Differential Settings
A differential voltage detector is incorporated and this, if enabled, blocks the synchronising function if the
difference between the measured bus and line voltages is greater than the setting. This is used to prevent closing
of the circuit breaker with a large voltage differential between the line (incoming) or bus (running) voltages, which
could overstress the electrical systems. Typically, the differential voltage elements are set below 10% of rated
voltage.
4.2.5
Synchronising Bypass Logic
The relay Dead and Live voltage monitors are used along with corresponding internal logic to bypass the
synchronising operation of the relay. Typically, anywhere above 80% to 90% of rating can be classed as a live
line or live bus. The dead voltage monitors should be set to somewhere above the expected level of induced
voltages on the line or bus. It should be noted that a dead line or dead bus can have a considerable potential
induced onto it from a parallel line or via capacitance across open breaker contacts. This potential on some
networks can be as high as 30% of rated voltage.
The synchronising Bypass logic can be enabled, if required, to provide the following:
Line charging and/or Bus charging, from the other side which is live.
Close with both sides dead,
Synchronising check with both sides live.
Unconditional Close (ignore all voltage conditions)
Different options can be enabled for Manual Closing and DAR operations. This can be used for example to allow
MC operations to be carried out with both sides dead for normal operational switching but prevent closing if the
condition occurred during DAR. Alternatively, the device at one line end can be set to provide line charging whilst
the other only Check Sync, i.e. after the line has been restored and become live.
Additional DLC and DBC delays are provided to allow co-ordination of devices whilst also allowing a close applied
conditions after a delay if the normally expected conditions are not met. For example, a device which will usually
be the second end to close, thus operating in Check Sync mode, can allow Dead Line Close after a further delay,
thus charging the line if the first end fails to close.
4.2.6
Slip and Phase Angle Relationship
Slip frequency is defined as the difference between two frequencies. Where a slip frequency exists between two
separate systems, during a slip cycle the two voltage vectors will be in anti-phase at one point in time. The phase
angle difference will vary between being in phase and anti-phase. The relay can be set to measure slip frequency
in two ways. One way is to measure the two system frequencies directly and calculate the difference. Another
way is to measure the phase difference between the two systems and check that the phase angle change in a
defined time period is less than a predetermined value. If F1 and F2 represent the frequencies of two systems
then it can be shown that for check synchronising operation,
F = F1 F2 =
Td 180
where Td = time delay setting and = phase angle setting.

For system synchronising operation the following formula is used because in this mode the relay will only issue a
close signal if the phase angle is decreasing in value. It will not issue a close if the phase angle is increasing in
value.
F = F1 F2 =
Td 360
where Td = time delay setting and = phase angle setting.

The relay has both a frequency measuring element and phase detector and so can be set up to measure slip
either directly or by the phase detector plus timer method. Use of either method is perfectly valid, as is use of both
at the same time.
Note : if using both the slip frequency detector and the phase angle plus slip timer for a particular scheme then
care has to be taken in setting selection. It is possible to set the relay up with an incorrect slip timer setting which
will prevent the relay from issuing a valid close signal.
e.g. - a system with a high rate of slip which is within the allowable slip frequency limit, could be set up with too
long a slip timer setting. This would mean that the incoming vector could pass through the valid close window too
quickly and not allow the slip timer to time out and give a valid output.
4.2.7
Check Synchronising Settings
The check synchronising operation of the relay is used mainly in switching operations which link two parts of a
system which are weakly tied via other paths elsewhere in the system. In this synchronous system there should
be no frequency difference across the breaker but significant differences in phase angle and voltage magnitude
may exist due to the transmission line characteristics such as its length and type of loading.
For check synchronising operation the relay should be set to the maximum phase angle and maximum voltage
differences which still permit the circuit breaker to close without causing large disturbances to the system. For
most systems the phase angle can be set between 20 and 30. There should not be any slip frequency but a
setting of 50mHz is typically applied as a check against loss of synchronism due to tripping of all parallel
interconnections. Table 2 shows some possible check synchronising settings when using the phase detector plus
time delay method. This shows a range of phase angles and the required slip timer settings to achieve a slip
frequency limit of 50mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 50mHz slip limit is not always
achievable.
CS Phase Angle Setting ( )
CS Slip Timer Setting
Slip Frequency
(sec)
Limit
(mHz)
10
1.1
50.51
15
1.7
49.02
20
2.2
50.51
25
2.8
49.60
30
3.3
50.51
35
3.9
49.86
40
4.4
50.51
45
5.0
50.00
Table 4-1
Typical Check Synchronising Settings
Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, a setting of 50mHz could be
applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends.
Note : in check synchronising mode the valid phase difference window for closing is actually twice the phase
angle setting value because the valid Check Sync close can be given when the phase angle is either decreasing
or increasing.
4.2.8
System Synchronising Settings
The changeover to system synchronising operation will occur automatically if set, if the two systems become
asynchronous i.e. there are no ties between the two systems and one system is effectively islanded. If this
situation occurs the frequencies will slip past each other and may cause the phase angle to come into the system
split limits. The system split detector can be set to operate on a differential angle anywhere from 90 to 175 and
is typically set to 170. Alternatively, the change to System Sync can be made based on Slip frequency using a
high value of typically 125mHz or more.
When there are high rates of slip between the two systems greater care is needed when closing the breaker and
for this reason the system synchronising mode has independent settings from the check synchronising mode. The
allowable phase angle close window is usually set much narrower than for check synchronising operation. Also,
the close decision from the relay is only given in the case of the phase angle decreasing. It will not issue a close if
the phase angle is increasing in value. Typically the slip frequency will be set to a limit of 250mHz or less and the
phase angle to 10 or 15. Table 4-2 shows some possible system synchronising settings for limits of 100mHz
and 250mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 100mHz or 250mHz slip limit is not
always achievable.
SS Phase Angle Setting
SS Slip Timer
Slip Frequency Limit
Setting
(mHz)
(sec)
10
0.3
92.59
15
0.4
104.17
10
0.1
277.78
15
0.2
Table 4-2
208.33
Typical System Synchronising Settings
Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, settings of 100mHz or 250mHz
could be applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends.
The relay will automatically revert to Check Synchronising mode when zero slip is applied.
4.2.9
Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer
In Check Synchronising operation the relay will issue a Check Sync close if the system conditions are such that
the phase angle and slip frequency are within limits. There is a possibility, however, that a Check Sync close
could be issued at a point where the phase angle is approaching the angular limits, say + 20, and the slip
frequency is at the maximum allowable value. The consequence of this is that due to the inherent closing time of
the CB the actual CB close occurs outside of the phase angle limits. The angle overshoot being dependent on the
actual slip frequency and the total CB closing delay.
The total delays involved in this process include the main software timing loop which issues the close command,
the output relay time to pick up and the actual breaker closing time delays. To reduce the risk of a late closure it is
common practice to set the slip timer setting (Td) to typically 10x the CB closing time. This will ensure that the CB
will close no later than 1.2x the actual phase angle setting of the relay e.g. 24 for a 20 setting.
e.g. :The change in phase angle between two waveforms is directly related to the frequency difference, or slip,
between them. The change in phase angle
Change in phase angle
for a system with 1Hz slip is 360 in 1 second. Thus,
= (Slip 360 ) /sec.
The distance the phasor can travel during the breaker close time can therefore be given by,
= (Slip 360 t CB )
- where tCB is the breaker close time in seconds.
Using the equation given in section 2.7 for check synchronising,
Slip =
=
Td 180
and substituting this into
360 t CB
Td 180
= (Slip 360 t CB )
= 2
which gives
gives the following,
t CB
Td
It was stated that the slip timer setting Td should be set to 10x the breaker closing time tCB.
Substituting for this in the above equation gives,
(2 )
10
or
= 0 .2
Thus for a slip timer setting (Td) of 10x breaker closing time (tCB) the actual change in phase angle will be 20% of
the phase angle setting. The maximum closing angle will be 120% of phase angle setting.
In practice, however, the relay operating times need to be taken into consideration. A typical example now follows
:
- Maximum allowed phase angle for closure = 30.
- Circuit breaker closure time = 150ms.
Maximum relay delays : Software timing loop + Output relay delays = 5ms + 7ms = 12ms.
Therefore slip timer time delay should be set to 10x (150ms + 12ms) = 1.62sec. In practice this will have to be set
to 1.6sec due to the resolution of the slip timer.
The phase angle setting should be set to 80% of the maximum allowable closing angle, which is 24.
If the relay was to issue a close right on the boundary of 24
then the breaker will not close outside of 30.
With an angle of 24 and a slip timer delay (Td) of 1.6sec, using the equation from section 2.7, the slip is
therefore,
24 / (1.6 x 180) = 83mHz. If the relay were to close on the boundary the phase angle traversed in the 160ms total
delay time is given by,
= (Slip 360 ) (t CB + t RELAY )
= 0.083 x 360 x 0.16 = 4.80.
Therefore the CB will close at 24 + 4.80 = 28.80.
4.2.10 Close on Zero

Close on zero is the preferred method of some customers for restoration of a split system. The relay
uses the measured slip frequency and the typical closing time of the circuit breaker to issue a close
pulse, as the phase difference is reducing, which will close the circuit breaker when the phase
difference is zero. High accuracy is not required regarding the CB Close Time.
4.3
This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. The
LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open
Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders, see
, the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is possible
following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. The resultant
permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential closure of the
NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted section. This
sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly, restore the power to healthy
sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost (CML) metric. LOV
Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which, the normal NOP having been
closed, manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its normal configuration.
The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other permanent fault(s)
occurring, after the first-fault LOV automation sequence, depending on their location within the system. However,
if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be considered.
Feeder 1
1A
Vabc
1B
Vabc
1C
Vabc
Vabc
NOP
(TIE)
Vxyz
Feeder 2
2A
Vabc
2B
Vabc
2C
Vabc
Figure 4.3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point

Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types:
Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state, the controller issues a trip then
subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points
along the feeder.
NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of
the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different, unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost.
Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV, followed by no further action to establish a new normally
open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence.
The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A, B & C on both Feeders will be closed as
shown in
and the NOP will be open. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream sides and
voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. It should be noted that Reclosers at different points
in the system are programmed to give the optimum, different, reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that their response
is not conditional on seeing fault current, only on detection of loss of voltage. An LOV sequence starts to operate
due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after a persistent fault
is isolated from the supply i.e. fault current no longer flows, following a complete but unsuccessful autoreclose
sequence. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source side from the supply and
from adjacent feeders by the NOP.
For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1- A section, the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a
sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that
1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.g. 1B to
1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is
initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. This is achieved as follows;- following the Lockout of the Source
Recloser/CB-1A, the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV), (this may also
have occurred temporarily, more than once during or for the whole, of the 1A recloser sequence).
1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in
each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay
e.g. 60 seconds, set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence, then their LOV Elements will each take
action and give a 3 pole Trip output, both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time.
The NOP, which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu, in example 1, will see LOV on its Feeder
1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side; if the NOPs LOV Element sees
permanent LOV on either side i.e. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 75 seconds to give a
grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at, for example, 60 seconds, then the NOP LOV
Element will take action and issue a NOP Close.
A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays
to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser.
For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip &
Lockout, thus, if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e.g. 5
seconds), on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the NOP close is
successful and no fault appears, the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode
must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the
Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1Cs LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. Note that the 1C
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if 1C closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C will Fast Protection
Trip and Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1C Line
Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to
Delayed for the Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF
Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1Bs LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. Note the 1B
Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a
permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B will Fast Protection
Trip & Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1B
Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be
changed to Delayed for the Reclosers LOV Reclaim Time.
For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check
Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections
backfed via the NOP.
As can be seen from the above, the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e.g. 5
seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line
Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast
Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout; this ensures that the Recloser
closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven, unfaulted,
sections energised. This mode of operation does impose a fault, which will be cleared by a single high-speed
Fast-Protection Trip, onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in as much of the System being
maintained in-service as possible.
If, following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation, a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on
one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed, then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i.e. the LOV
Automation time-allowed-to-live timer, the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout.
The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set
to a longer time, with grading margin > 5 secs, than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV
Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose, tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself
as necessary. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers, which will see fault current when the
last Recloser in the sequence closes, remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all
Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted.
Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they
must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy
sections. This co-ordinated grading, under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure, is achieved by
programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional, their settings in both directions can
be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or
NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed, Reverse directions.
LOV Element has two main outputs i.e. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to
the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs, it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix, all
other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes.
It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at
that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder, therefore, there must be a user-set
pecking order. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.g. 75 s - 80 s - 85 s,
ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply
is restored via a third path should the first or second, choice path not be available or fails, see Error! Reference
source not found. .
Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting; Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ
selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting. As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential
first choice, a second choice and third choice back-feed feeder, the user can set these independently to suit his
system. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e.g. 85 second
Action Delay time. NB the NOP LOV Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that
the User can select NOP LOV Close so as to supply power in a single first required direction only, not a second.
The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder,
showing how the user can select the 1st, 2nd and 3rd choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. Other
arrangements can be set-up by User. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same
Action Delay time settings on both sides.
The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled, by the User setting and can be switched In/Out
dynamically via any Binary Inputs, LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General
Commands. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected.
For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence, only the
downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required.
Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the
downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. The controller monitors will
respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the A or
X side.
For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence, the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i.e. both
downstream and upstream voltages, must be monitored. Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary.
LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds

S/STN 1
S/STN 2
85 s
1st
2nd
75 s
80 s
80 s
3rd
85 s
1st
2nd
75 s
85 s
75 s
80 s
3rd
85 s
1st
75 s
OFF
2nd
85 s
1st
2nd
75 s
80 s
Figure 4.3-2
Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay
timer grading margins.
An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. The setting of the
Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing.
The LOV function is set to Out by default and must be switched In. The voltages and open/closed state of the
recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function In. A type Feeder or Recloser must be
Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides.
This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the primed staus is achieved. The device must
be in the primed state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed
Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. The
NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when
voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the
unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault.
The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of
voltage on any single phase. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole
tripping is permitted.
The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. When selected as Single mode, the
LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV
sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed
following a subsequent loss of voltage.
4.4
4.4.1
Single/Triple Autoreclose
System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose
In countries, such as the USA, where the distribution network is 4 wire i.e. three phase plus neutral, a three phase
feeder may run out from a sub/station and then at some point be split into three separate single phase plus
neutral feeders where, for example, each line can go up a separate valley and thus be subjected separately to
lightning strikes or single phase to Earth (Ground) or Neutral, Faults. Loads can thus be entirely single pole or a
mix of three pole and single pole.
Some utilities are upgrading their systems to improve the quality of supply to customers by installing three
separate single pole Reclosers plus a Controller that can selectively apply Single or Triple AutoReclose
sequences to each pole asynchronously. Each pole has its own separate fault detection/Trip and AutoReclose
sequencing capability. Different modes of operation can be set by the user to cater for the basic and or seasonal
requirements of different types of load on the three phases. The Controller provides settings to enable the user to
set the required options of Single/Triple Trip/Close and Single/Triple Lockout combinations including the option of
what must happen under two-pole faults. Before setting the controller to Single pole Trip/Single pole Lockout
mode the user must ensure that no plant is connected for which a three phase supply is essential e.g. three
phase motor. A typical application is feeders supplying Oil Rig pumping motors, single pole ARC can be
beneficially applied provided the motor is not run on two poles for extended periods otherwise NPS induced
overheating and failure could result, the Single pole Trip - Three pole Lockout, Mode B, provides for this by
allowing single pole trips followed by reclose but issues only three pole trips when a reclose is not started. An
additional subsequent three pole trip is issued in this Mode if single pole autoreclose fails.
If Single pole Trip is set then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single pole
circuit breaker, however, in some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole
device. Each Single pole Recloser, therefore, has its own independent Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed
Auxiliary contacts; also, its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle, with auxiliary T&LO contacts, operated by a HotLine working tool. The Control Cubicle must have pole by pole external push button switches to provide local
electrical Trip/Close controls for each Recloser. The Controller provides pole by pole logic and interlocking to
ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes and for all complex fault conditions. Three instances of the
Capacitor Monitor/Test element are included to allow for the additional capacitor networks required by the phase
segregated system.
Figure 4.4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers.
Single pole tripping is not normally applied where three-phase loads, or delta connected loads are connected. It is
only applied to Reclosers on systems which allow Single pole to Neutral load connection, e.g. 4 wire, 3Phase +
Neutral, systems, as typically used in the USA and South America. In such systems the routing and loading cab
be such that loads can tolerate running for short periods on only two phases, the third being temporarily dead. As
a simplified model consider that pole A is routed up valley A, Pole B is routed up valley B and pole C is routed up
valley C; all with single phase to Neutral loads. A permanent phase to neutral fault and single pole Recloser
sequence to Lockout on pole A will not, therefore, affect the supply to customers in valleys B and C.
For a fault at the position shown on Phase A, the A pole CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast
plus Delayed Trips to attempt to clear the A-G(N) fault. For a permanent A-G fault the outcome will be that pole A
goes to Lockout and phase A will be left totally dead. Customers on Phases B and C will continue to receive
uninterrupted supply, they will not suffer interruptions.
It should be noted that Single/Triple operation of Reclosers is applied to Rural Feeders and for these Loss Of
Voltage (LOV) automation is not applied, (to do so would require a very complex LOV scheme requiring single
pole closure of the NOP (TIE) and Feeder Reclosers with resultant single pole back-feed.). In the MLFB LOV
Automation is not to be made available with Single /Triple Software.
Single-phase Tripping/Reclosing improves system reliability by maintaining supply to customers who are not on
the faulted phase of a feeder. When a permanent fault occurs on one of the phases e.g. on the B phase, only the
B pole Recloser performs a Trip and Reclose sequence, A and C phases, if unaffected, stay Closed maintaining
supply to the Customers on poles A and C. If a single-phase reclosing sequence is unsuccessful because of a
permanent fault, only the customers on the B phase are left without power, rather than all three-phases locking
out. Single-phase operation will be applied, especially in rural areas where the majority of loads are single phase
L-N and manual restoration can take longer because of the greater travel distances.
Note:- All unbalance Protection elements i.e. NPS, Broken Conductor, Loss of Phase, VTS, CTS, etc. algorithms
have to be inhibited or pre-set to a long ride-through delay, BEFORE a single pole Recloser Trip is issued to
prevent false operation during single-phase sequence Dead-Times, or inhibited when a single-phase Lockout
state is reached. Because of the inherent unbalanced nature of three poles of single pole to neutral loads the NPS
levels will be high on such systems and even higher when one pole trips out leaving only two poles energized,
therefore, when Single pole Trip is selected all Unbalance protection elements are usually Inhibited. The ZPS will
also be high, same level, but a considerable percentage will return via the Neutral conductor, therefore, a Neutral
CT is essential, the rest via the multiple Ground paths.
4.4.2
Triple/Single Modes of Operation
The User may select one of three modes for the Single/Triple operation to suit the system load characteristics and
thus avoid subjecting loads to conditions which could cause damage to plant. The settings of the Trip-RecloseLockout operation modes for the Recloser provide for three Modes of Trip Sequences to Lockout for a permanent
fault. Mode selection can be via Settings menu to provide default mode, via Control Mode Menu, or via Settings
Group change either in response to a General Command via SCADA or by Binary Input selection. If more than
one mode is selected simultaneously, the priority is Mode A over B over C with Modes as defined below. When a
binary input mapped to this function is energised, the setting is changed to the selected Mode. The setting does
not revert to its previous state when the input is reset. The additional LEDs available on E12 Controllers can be
used to show which Mode is ON. Only the selected Mode LED will be ON. Single Pole Reclosers can be operated
by the User in any one of the following modes as and when the application requires it. Three single pole
Reclosers connected in a full single pole wired scheme may thus be operated individually or together as a three
pole Recloser as system operations require.
[It should be noted that Single/Triple operation only applies to Phase Fault elements and not to Earth Faults nor to
Sensitive Earth faults. The use of three CTs, one per pole, and a single neutral CT i.e. 4 CTs, only allows
detection that an SEF/Earth Fault has occurred but not on which pole. This determination is only possible if a
Phase to Earth Fault current is above the Phase Fault Overcurrent setting, it is then possible to single pole trip
and reclose as per the logic shown in tables in the Description of Operation section of this manual. Therefore, in
the absence of any supplementary data, an SEF trip and/or Earth fault trip must cause Three pole Trip and Three
pole Reclose.
MODE A
3PTrip-3PLO
This is the standard Three pole only mode of operation, only three pole Trip/Close sequences are performed and
all three poles are Locked Out together when the Lockout state is reached. This mode is used where three phase
loads such as motors cannot be allowed to on two phases, even for the duration of the autoreclose deadtime.
In this mode any pole CB Trip or CB Close Command must operate all three Reclosers.
In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO.
In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO.
In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO.
MODE B
1PTrip-3PLO
In this mode Controller can perform independent single pole TRIP sequences up to the point at which the Lockout
state is reached on any one pole, it then performs a final three pole TRIP and all three
poles are Locked Out together. Controller only goes to 3PTrip-3PLO if and when a 3P Trip and Lockout has to be
performed. If at any point during an AutoReclose sequence a Phase-to-Phase or 3-Phase Fault condition
develops and exists when a Trip output has to be issued i.e. if at the point at which a first pole element operates a
starter is also raised on any other pole, then the Controller reverts to 3 pole Trip and 3 pole Close sequencing and
3PTrip-3PLO as applicable at that point in the sequence.
This mode prevents detrimental LONG TERM 2 phase energisation of three phase loads e.g. motors.
In this mode 2 pole trips are never issued, any fault diagnosed as affecting more than 1 pole will cause a 3 pole
trip which may be followed by 3 pole reclose.
Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase will cause a 3 pole trip
which may be followed by 3 pole reclose.
In this mode any single pole CB Trip or CB Close Command is considered to be a long term action and is
therefore diverted to operate all three Reclosers.
In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO.
In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO.
In this mode, the single pole Trip and Reclose Command remains pole segregated.
In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO.
If ARC OFF is selected in Mode B all trips will be 3PTrip-3PLO.
MODE C
1PTrip-1PLO
Mode C applies single pole tripping for all Phase Fault fault combinations. Each pole of the Recloser Controller
follows its own settings and sequence independently. This is the equivalent of having three separately mounted
single pole Reclosers each with its own Controller, each Recloser Controller is, therefore, unaware of the state of
the Reclosers & Controllers on the other poles. This does mean that the sequences on each pole are not
synchronous and are not interlocked, therefore, a fault scenario can develop where for a Phase to Phase fault
one pole could be performing a Fast Trip the other could be performing a Delayed Trip, this is not an issue, one
pole will initiate the tripping action(s) and if unsuccessful eventually both sequences will be doing delayed. Also
different Dead times could be applicable on each of the poles at that point in the two sequences but Close
commands issued by the Sequences are co-ordinated so that both poles close at the same time.
In this mode the Controller performs independent single pole Trip and Reclose sequences, each pole will Lockout
independently. The Controller operates to drive each Recloser pole as an independent Circuit Breaker. Normal
system operating modes will thus be 3P or 2P or 1P for extended periods, this determines the type of protection
elements which can be enabled, Frequency elements and Voltage elements must track the remaining in-service
phase(s). Controller does NOT revert to three-pole Trip and Close sequencing or three pole Lockout if a Phase to
Phase Fault condition exists at any Trip point in the sequence.
In this mode all unbalance protection elements would usually be inhibited, i.e. NPS Overcurrent, NPS
OverVoltage, VT Supervision, CT Supervision, and Broken Conductor. It is NOT expected that Directional
elements will be applied as single pole tripping will change the polarising conditions for the sound poles.
In this mode a CBA Trip or CBA Close Command operates only on the A Pole Recloser, ditto for B and C poles.
In this mode 2 pole trips can be issued, any fault diagnosed as affecting 2 poles simultaneously will cause a 2
separate single pole trips which will be followed by two separate single pole reclose sequences. Close pulses to
the two poles are aligned so that if the 2 trips were resultant from the same fault, re-strike does not occur from the
two phases individually such that the fault is perpetuated by passing it from one phase to the other.
Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase can cause a separate
single pole trip which will be followed by separate single pole recloses with close pulses aligned.
In this mode any Line Check Trip will result in a 1PT - 1PLO
In this mode a manual Lockout Lever Command on one pole only acts on that pole, there is no cross linking
action to other poles. A Binary Input 79 Lockout is required for each pole and each pole has its own manual
Lockout counter.
In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3Pole Trip and Lockout 3PT - 3PLO.
If ARC OFF is selected Modes A & B do 3P Trip & Lockout. Mode C does pole by pole 1PT - 1PLO.
4.4.3
Pole Discrepancy
In Modes A and B the Recloser should not be left with 1 pole open for extended periods. This can occur if a single pole is
opened in Mode C then the Mode is changed to A or B. A Pole Discrepancy output is available which is driven in Mode A
and B only, to indicate that all poles of the recloser are not in the same state. An associated timer, PD Time Delay is set in
the Circuit Breaker menu. This output can be used as an alarm or to cause a three pole trip.Quick Logic Applications
4.4.4
Auto-Changeover Scheme Example

INCOMER 1
INCOMER 2
Start On-Load
Change-over
BI 1
Start On-Load
Change-over
BO3
CB1
CB2
VT1
CB1
OPEN
VT2
V1
Busbar 1
Vx
Busbar 2
CB3
LOADS
LOADS
Figure 4.4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic

The MV installation illustrated above is fed from two incomers. To limit the substation fault level the busbar is run
with CB3 open. When a fault occurs on one of the incomers it is isolated by the circuit protection. To re-supply the
disconnected loads from the remaining incomer CB3 is closed.
If the line fault occurs on incomer 1 it must be confirmed that CB 1 has opened before CB3 can be closed. The
relay on incomer 1 confirms that a trip has been issued to CB1 (e.g. Binary Output 2), that CB 1 has opened (e.g.
Binary Input 1) and that no current flows in the circuit (e.g. 37-1 = Virtual 1):
Incomer 1 Relay is Configured:
CB1 Open auxiliary switch wired to B.I. 1
Trip output to CB1 = B.O. 2
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3
CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = O2.I1.V1
The output from Incomer 1 (BO3) relay is input to the relay on CB 3 (Binary Input 1). A panel switch may be used
to enable the On-Load Change-over scheme (Binary Input 2). Before Closing CB3 a check may be made that
there is no voltage on busbar 1 (27/59-1 = Virtual 1). CB 3 is closed from Binary Output 3.
CB3 Relay is Configured:
Panel switch (ON-Load Change-over Enabled) wired to B.I. 1
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 27/59-1 = V1
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3
CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = I1.I2.V1
If required a time delay can be added to the output using the CONTROL & LOGIC > QUICK LOGIC: E1
Pickup Delay setting.

5.1
Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF)
Where a circuit breaker fails to operate to clear fault current the power system will remain in a hazardous state
until the fault is cleared by remote or back-up protections. To minimise any delay, CB Failure protection provides
a signal to either re-trip the local CB or back-trip adjacent CBs.
The function is initiated by the operation of user selectable protection functions or from a binary input. Current
flow is monitored after a tripping signal has been issued if any of the 50BF current check elements have not reset
before the timers have expired an output is given.
The relay incorporates a two-stage circuit breaker fail feature. For some systems, only the first will be used and
the CB Failure output will be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s). On other systems, however, this output will be
used to re-trip the local CB to minimise potential disruption to the system; if possible via a secondary trip coil and
wiring. The second CB Failure stage will then be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s).
Figure 5.1-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail
5.1.1
Settings Guidelines
50BF Setting
The current setting must be set below the minimum protection setting current.
50BF DTL1/50BF DTL2
The time delay setting applied to the CB Fail protection must be in excess of the longest CB operate time + relay
reset time + a safety margin.
First Stage (Retrip)

Trip Relay operate time
10ms
7SR224 Reset Time
20ms
CB Tripping time
80ms
Safety Margin
40ms
Overall First Stage CBF Time Delay
150ms
Second Stage (Back Trip)

First CBF Time Delay
120ms
Trip Relay operate time
10ms
7SR224 Reset Time
20ms
CB Tripping time
80ms
Margin
60ms
Overall Second Stage CBF Time Delay
290ms
The safety margin is extended by 1 cycle for the second CBF stage as this will usually involve a back-trip of a
Busbar tripping scheme.
The timing sequence for each stage of the circuit breaker fail function is as below.
Relay
Operation
and CBF
Timer
Started
System
Fault
Main
Trip
Relay
Operation
20
Backtrip
Trip Relay
Reset of
CBF elements
does not occur
Backtrip
Operation
Failure of
CB to trip
40
60
80
CB Backtrip
Sucessful
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
ms from fault
occuring
340
CB Operate Time
Stage 1 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 120ms
Figure 5.1-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing
Relay
Operation
and CBF
Timer
Started
Backtrip
Trip Relay
Operation
CBF Retrip
Trip Relay
System
Fault
Main
Trip
Relay
Operation
40
CB's
Fails to
Trip
60
80
No Reset of
CBF elements
No Reset of
CBF elements
CBF Retrip
Operation
Reset of
CBF elements
CBF Back trip
Operation
Failed CB Retrip
Operation
100
120
140
Operation of all
BB CB's
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360
ms from
occuri
CB Operate Time
Stage 1 CBF Timer (Retrip) = 120ms
Stage 2 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 250ms
Figure 5.1-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing
5.2
Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS)
When a CT fails, the current levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. A large level of NPS current is
therefore detected - around 0.3 x In for one or two CT failures. However this condition would also occur for a
system fault. To differentiate between the two conditions, the element uses NPS voltage to restrain the CTS
algorithm as show in the accompanying table.
Table 5-1
NPS Current
NPS Voltage
Decision
> Setting
> Setting
System Fault
> Setting
< Setting
CT Failure
Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases)
Following a CT Failure, there should be little or no NPS voltage. Perhaps 0.1 x Vn as a maximum.
Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects.
A 3-phase CT failure is considered so unlikely (these being independent units) that this condition is not tested for.
5.3
Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS)
Although VTs rarely fail themselves, VT Supervision presents a common application because of the failure of
protective Fuses connected in series with the VTs.
When a VT failure occurs on one or two phases, the voltage levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. A
large level of NPS voltage is therefore detected - around 0.3 x Vn for one or two VT failures. However this
condition would also occur for a system fault. To differentiate between the two conditions, the element uses NPS
current to restrain the VTS algorithm as show in the accompanying table.
Table 5-2
NPS Voltage
NPS Current
Decision
> Setting
> Setting
System Fault
> Setting
< Setting
VT Failure
Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases)
Following a VT Failure, the level of NPS current would be dependent solely upon load imbalance - perhaps 0.1 x
In as a maximum.
NPS voltage and current quantities are used rather than ZPS since the latter makes it difficult to differentiate
between a VT failure and a Phase-Phase fault. Both conditions would generate little or no ZPS current. However
the element provides an option to use ZPS quantities to meet some older specifications.
There are possible problems with using NPS quantities due to load imbalances. These would also generate
significant levels of NPS current and so possibly cause a VT failure to be missed. This problem can be overcome
by careful selection of settings, however, setting the NPS current threshold above the level expected for
imbalance conditions.
If a failure occurs in all 3 Phases of a Voltage Transformer, then there will be no NPS or ZPS voltage to work with.
However the PPS Voltage will fall below expected minimum measurement levels.
This could also be due to a close in fault and so PPS Current must remain above minimum load level BUT below
minimum fault level.
PPS Voltage
PPS Current
Decision
< Setting
> Minimum Fault Level
System Fault
< Setting
Minimum Load Level <
VT Failure
AND
< Minimum Fault Level
Table 5-3
Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases)
Operation is again subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects.
Alternatively a 3 Phase VT failure can be signalled to the relay via a Binary Input taken from the Trip output of an
external MCB. This can also be reset by a Binary Input signal.
VTS would not normally be used for tripping - it is an alarm rather than fault condition. However the loss of a VT
would cause problems for protection elements that have voltage dependant functionality. For this reason, the
relay allows these protection elements - under-voltage, directional over-current, etc. - to be inhibited if a VT failure
occurs.
5.4
Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS)
Binary Inputs may be used to monitor the integrity of the CB trip circuit wiring. A small current flows through the
B.I. and the trip circuit. This current operates the B.I. confirming the integrity of the auxiliary supply, CB trip coil,
auxiliary switch, C.B. secondary isolating contacts and associated wiring. If monitoring current flow ceases, the
B.I. drops off and if it is user programmed to operate one of the output relays, this can provide a remote alarm. In
addition, an LED on the relay can be programmed to operate. A user text label can be used to define the operated
LED e.g. Trip CCT Fail.
The relevant Binary Input is mapped to 74TCS-n in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. To avoid giving
spurious alarm messages while the circuit breaker is operating the input is given a 0.4s Drop-off Delay in the
INPUT CONFIG>BINARY INPUT CONFIG menu.
To provide an alarm output a normally open binary output is mapped to 74TCS-n.
5.4.1
Trip Circuit Supervision Connections
The following circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard schemes H5, H6 and H7.
For compliance with this standard:
Where more than one device is used to trip the CB then connections should be looped between the
tripping contacts. To ensure that all wiring is monitored the binary input must be at the end of the looped
wiring.
Resistors must be continuously rated and where possible should be of wire-wound construction.
Scheme 1 (Basic)
Figure 5.4-1: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5)
Scheme 1 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.
Where a Hand Reset Trip contact is used measures must be taken to inhibit alarm indications after a CB trip.
Scheme 2 (Intermediate)
52a
TRIP COIL
52a
Circuit
Breaker
BO
52b
TRIP CCT n FAIL

BI
+ve
-ve
BO 1
BO n
7SR24
Remote
Alarm
H6 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply)
BI = 88V (110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
Scheme 2 provides continuous Trip Circuit Supervision of trip coil with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. It does
not provide pre-closing supervision of the connections and links between the tripping contacts and the circuit
breaker and may not therefore be suitable for some circuits which include an isolating link.
Scheme 3 (Comprehensive)
52a
TRIP COIL
Circuit
Breaker
BO
52b
TRIP CCT n FAIL

R
BI
+ve
-ve
BI
+ve
H7 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (48, 110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
-ve
BO 1
BO n
7SR24
Remote
Alarm
Scheme 3 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.
5.5
Inrush Detector (81HBL2)
This element detects the presence of high levels of 2nd Harmonic current which is indicative of transformer Inrush
current at switch-on. These currents may be above the operate level of the overcurrent elements for a short
duration and it is important that the relay does not issue an incorrect trip command for this transient network
condition.
If a magnetic inrush condition is detected operation of the overcurrent elements can be blocked.
Calculation of the magnetising inrush current level is complex. However a ratio of 20% 2nd Harmonic to
Fundamental current will meet most applications without compromising the integrity of the Overcurrent protection.
There are 3 methods of detection and blocking during the passage of magnetising inrush current.
Phase
Blocking only occurs in those phases where Inrush is detected.

Large, Single Phase Transformers Auto-transformers.
Cross
All 3-phases are blocked if Inrush is detected in any phase.

Traditional application for most Transformers but can give delayed operation for
Switch-on to Earth Fault conditions.
Sum
Composite 2nd Harmonic content derived for all 3-phases and then compared to
Fundamental current for each individual phase.
Provides good compromise between Inrush stability and fast fault detection.
Table 5-4
5.6
Magnetic Inrush Bias
Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC)
Used to detect an open circuit condition when a conductor breaks or a mal-operation occurs in phase segregated
switchgear.
There will be little or no fault current and so overcurrent elements will not detect the condition. However the
condition can be detected because there will be a high content of NPS (unbalance) current present.
An NPS / PPS ratio > 50% will result from a Broken Conductor condition.
5.7
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance
The Relay provides Total, Delta and Frequent CB Operation Counters alongwith an I2t Counter to estimate the
amount of wear and tear experienced by a Circuit-Breaker. Alarm can be provided once set levels have been
exceeded.
Typically estimates obtained from previous circuit-breaker maintenance schedules are used for setting these
alarm levels. The relay instrumentation provides the current values of these counters.
Published by and copyright 2012:

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
Siemens Protection Devices Limited
P.O. Box 8
North Farm Road
Hebburn
Tyne & Wear
NE31 1TZ
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901
Fax:
+44 (0)191 401 5575
www.siemens.com/energy
For more information, please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Phone: +49 180/524 70 00
Fax:
+49 180/524 24 71(Charges depending on provider)
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Power Distribution Division Order No. C53000-G7076-C11-4
Printed in Frth
Printed on elementary chlorine-free bleached paper.
All rights reserved.
Trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of Siemens AG, its affiliates, or
their respective owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.
The information in this document contains general
descriptions of the technical options available, which
may not apply in all cases. The required technical
options should therefore be specified in the contract.
www. siemens.com/energy

7SR224 - Argus Complete Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SR224 - Argus Complete Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reyrolle

7SR224 Recloser Controller

Answers for energy.

7SR224 Argus Contents

Settings, Configuration & Instruments

Commissioning and Maintenance

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

7SR224 Recloser Controller

Document Release History

Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand

Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol.

Eighth Issue. Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol.

Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents

Software Revision History

Single/Triple Autoreclose function

Check Synchronising function

IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol

IEC61850 communication protocol

File handling during shutdown

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

4.2 Manual Close ..................................................................................................................................48

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections .........................8

7SR224 Ordering Options ...................................................................................................7

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Symbols and Nomenclature

Setting Menu Location

Elem Char Dir

Binary Output visible to user

List of settings associated with a specific

Common setting for multiple functions

Digital signal not visible to

Analogue signal with signal

Common control input (c) for multiple

Elem Reset Delay

Individual functions are enabled when

EVENT: IEC, Modbus or DNP

Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

General Safety Precautions

Fibre Optic Communication

Current Transformer Circuits

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Argus Description of Operation

Protection Product Family

E10 case, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys

E10 case, 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys

E10 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys

E12 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys

E12 case, 43 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys

Auxiliary Nominal Voltage

Region Specific Functions

Protection Function Packages

Case, I/O and Fascia 1)

E12 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 30 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys

Synchronising, synchronising check

4CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting).

2013 Siemens Protection Devices Limited

7SR224 Ordering Options